MyLabX9 AdvancedOperations E R02

Rev.
02
February 2021
MyLabX9
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
350080400
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS ii
Introduction
This manual details MyLab operations and describes the available optional
packages.
The manual is composed of the following sections:
INTRODUCTION
 Section 1: Advanced Features.
 Section 2: Image Optimization.
 Section 3: Measurements.
 Section 4: Archiving.
Advanced tools, like 3D/4D, are described in dedicated and optional
manuals.
In this manual system controls are indicated using the following graphical
conventions:
 Control panel buttons are indicated by GREY CAPITAL LET-

TERS.
 Touchscreen keys are indicated by BOLD BLUE CAPITAL

LETTERS.
 Touchscreen software strings are indicated by NORMAL BLUE

CAPITAL LETTERS.
 Screen software buttons and options are indicated by B O L D

B L A C K C A P I T A L L E T T E R S.
 Screen software strings are indicated by NORMAL BLACK

CAPITAL LETTERS.
The confirmation button is always indicated throughout the manual as EN TER , the
menu context button as UN DO .
Select/Click means positioning the cursor with the trackball over the desired
option and pressing EN TER to confirm.
Double click means positioning the cursor with the trackball over the desired
option and pressing EN TER twice.
Tap means touching with your finger the desired command on the touch screen.
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS iii

Swipe means placing your finger on the desired area of the touch screen and
moving it to the left or to the right.
WARNING In this manual WARNING identifies a risk for the patient and/or the
operator.
CAUTION The word CAUTION describes the precautions necessary to protect the
equipment.
NOTE In this manual NOTE points out information of special interest but not
related to risks for patient, operator or device.
Be sure to understand and observe each of the cautions and warnings.
The MyLab systems have multiple configurations and feature sets. All are
described in this user manual but not every option may apply to your system.
System features are dependent on your system configuration, transducer, and
exam type. Not all the system features are approved in all Countries.
Keep the manual with the equipment for future reference.
All the information included in this manual is relative to the following Esaote
ultrasound equipments: MyLabX9.
In this manual, all the above mentioned systems are referred to as MyLabX9 or
MyLab.
Unless specifically noted, the sections of this manual pertain to all the
systems.
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS iv

ADVANCED FEATURES
ADVANCED
FEATURES
INDEX
Table of Contents
1 Annotations................................................................................... 1-1
Free Text Annotations............................................................................... 1-2
By Sentence / By Word Annotations...................................................... 1-2
Glossary by Word.................................................................................... 1-2
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Glossary by Sentence .............................................................................. 1-3
Editing and Relocating Annotations........................................................ 1-4
Annotations Configuration ....................................................................... 1-4
Settings for All Applications.................................................................. 1-5
Settings for a specific Application ........................................................ 1-5
Glossary Configuration ..................................................................... 1-6
Glossary Organization in the Touchscreen.................................... 1-7
2 Bodymarks.................................................................................... 2-1
Bodymark Activation ................................................................................. 2-1
Bodymarks Configuration ......................................................................... 2-3
Settings for a specific Application ........................................................ 2-3
Bodymark Configuration .................................................................. 2-4
Bodymark Organization in the Touchscreen................................. 2-4
3 Acquisition Protocols ................................................................... 3-1

Configuration Menu ................................................................................... 3-1
Available Actions..................................................................................... 3-4
Set Acquisition.................................................................................... 3-4
Select Frame & Store......................................................................... 3-4
Select Frame & Measurement .......................................................... 3-5
Manage Annotations.......................................................................... 3-6
Save Clip .............................................................................................. 3-6
Working with Protocols............................................................................. 3-7
4 Security ......................................................................................... 4-1

Security Configuration Menu.................................................................... 4-1
Settings Tab .............................................................................................. 4-2
Users Tab.................................................................................................. 4-3
User Accounts .................................................................................... 4-3
Security Access to the System................................................................... 4-5
Access Security Control............................................................................. 4-6
Protection from Viruses ............................................................................ 4-6
Malware Infection.................................................................................... 4-7
MyLab Operating System Patches Policy ............................................ 4-7
Firewall...................................................................................................... 4-7

INDEX
Correct management and privacy of patient data...................................4-8

Data interface and transmission protocol ..........................................4-10
Wired network...................................................................................4-10
Wireless network...............................................................................4-10
Storage media ....................................................................................4-10
Storage format...................................................................................4-10
5 Remote Service..............................................................................5-1
How to Access to Remote Service ...........................................................5-1
Pre Conditions..........................................................................................5-1
Network Connection...............................................................................5-2
Remote Service Connection ...................................................................5-2
6 Using the Needle Guides..............................................................6-1

Displaying the Needle Guide ....................................................................6-1
Needle Length ..........................................................................................6-4
After the Examination................................................................................6-5
Checking the Guide Alignment.................................................................6-5
Needle Enhanced Imaging.........................................................................6-6
Biopsy Configuration..................................................................................6-7
7 QPack............................................................................................7-1
QPack Activation ........................................................................................7-1
QPack analysis on frozen clips ..............................................................7-1
QPack analysis on archived clips ...........................................................7-2
Touchscreen controls in QPack................................................................7-3
Intensity Curve .........................................................................................7-4
QPack deactivation ..................................................................................7-5
8 Screen sharing and MyLab Remote .............................................8-1

Second monitor ...........................................................................................8-1
Physical clone............................................................................................8-2
Smart clone ...............................................................................................8-2
Video streaming and MyLab Remote.......................................................8-2
Web Portal tab ....................................................................................8-3
Streaming tab.......................................................................................8-4
MyLab Remote tab .............................................................................8-5
Streaming video activation......................................................................8-5
MyLab Remote activation.......................................................................8-5
Use in sterile environment ................................................................8-7
Camera streaming........................................................................................8-7
9 VPan ..............................................................................................9-1
VPan Acquisition.........................................................................................9-1

INDEX
Exam End................................................................................................. 9-2

Reviewing a VPan Image........................................................................... 9-3
Measurements.............................................................................................. 9-4
Storing the Reconstructed Image............................................................. 9-4
10 HyperDoppler..............................................................................10-1
Overview.................................................................................................... 10-1
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Activation................................................................................................... 10-1
Procedure for frozen clips.................................................................... 10-1
Procedure for archived clips ................................................................ 10-2
Touchscreen controls in HyperDoppler ............................................... 10-3
HyperDoppler Deactivation ................................................................... 10-5
Appendix.................................................................................................... 10-7
Flux and vorticity................................................................................... 10-7
Shaded functions ................................................................................... 10-7
Steady Streaming.................................................................................... 10-8
A ECG Cables ................................................................................. A-1

Checking the ECG Cable ......................................................................... A-1
Cleaning and Disinfecting the ECG Cable............................................ A-1
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS v

INDEX
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS vi

1
Chapter
1 - Annotations
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Annotations function provides the capability to place comments and arrows
on an image to identify anatomical structures and locations.
Annotations can be activated typing a comment of free text by the QWERTY
keyboard (Free Text Annotations) and/or inserting pre-defined comments
from a glossary by pressing ABC (By Sentence or By Word Annotations).
Annotations can be inserted both in real time and in freeze, during
measurements, in Exam review and Archive review.
Annotations appear on all saved images and clips and on prints as well.
When Annotations are activated, the system displays the following
touchscreen:
Fig. 1-1: Annotations
and the following controls (it may change depending on the type of selected
annotation):
BY WORD alternatively activates the By word and By sentence annotation modality.

BY SENTENCE Refer to next paragraph for further details.
DELETE ALL cancels the whole edited text. The same button has to be pressed to cancel
the displayed text.
DELETE LAST WORD cancels the last edited text without exiting.
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 1-1

ANNOTATIONS
DELETE LINE cancels the whole row where the cursor is without exiting.
INSERT ARROW when pressed, it displays an arrow; rotating the knob, it rotates the arrow.
Place the arrow using the trackball and confirm the final position by pressing
the EN TER key.
OK closes the annotation session without erasing the inserted text.
SET HOME sets the default position (HOME) for the annotation cursor based on the
present position.
SCROLL when in By Sentence Annotation, this knob scrolls the list of words.
UN DO key closes the annotation session.
Free Text Annotations

Pressing any alphanumeric key of the QWERTY keyboard during the exam
automatically activates text input and text is placed in the HOME position. If
AUTOMATIC WORD RECOGNITION is enabled, during the typing, MyLab suggests
the word, present in the glossary, starting with the same letters while rotating
the trackball it browses the glossary.
To confirm the proposed word press Enter  or go on with typing text, then
confirm pressing EN TER .
The text can be placed anywhere within the image area using the trackball.
By Sentence / By Word Annotations

Pressing ABC , you can insert both a sentence and a single word taken from a
configurable glossary.
MyLab displays the glossary associated to the active preset. Press the
APPLICATIONS tab to browse the glossaries available with other applications.
Glossary by Word
To select a word follow this procedure.
Procedure 1. Press ABC .
2. If necessary select the desired glossary by browsing the
navigation tabs.

ANNOTATIONS
3. If necessary swipe to scroll the touchscreen pages.

4. Tap on the desired word: it is displayed on the screen in
HOME position or at the right side of the last word settled
or at cursor position.
5. Depending on the settings of Annotation Configuration
Menu, the word can be definitely placed, edited or moved.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Press ACTIO N to change function:
• When the word is yellow with cursor blinking it can be edited.
• When the word is yellow contoured by a frame it can be
placed on the screen moving the trackball.
• When the word is gray it is definitely placed.
6. Edit or place the word, then press Enter  to confirm its
final position.
Glossary by Sentence
The sentence is composed of four words. On the touchscreen the system
displays the list of the available words, organized in columns: the first column
lists the available words for the first term of the sentence, the second column
for the second term and so on.
To select the words in the sentence:
Procedure 1. Press ABC .
2. If necessary select the desired glossary by browsing the
navigation tabs.
3. Tap on each word of the sentence to select it: the sentence is
displayed on the screen contoured by a frame. When the
available words are more than the displayable, you can scroll
each column rotating SCROLL.
4. The sentence is displayed on the screen contoured by a frame
(unless FIX is selected as First Cursor Action in the
Annotation Configuration Menu).
5. Move the trackball to place the sentence, then press Enter 
to confirm its final position: the sentence is positioned and
the frame disappears.

ANNOTATIONS
Editing and Relocating Annotations

Once the annotation is confirmed on the screen it can be edited and moved
in another place.
Text Editing To edit Free Text and By Word Annotations (By Sentence Annotations can
not be modified):
1. Place the cursor on the text to be modified and press EN TER
to highlight it.
2. If necessary press ACTIO N to switch to EDIT modality (refer
to the Annotations Configuration paragraph).
3. Move the trackball to place the cursor.
4. Use the left/right arrow keys of the alphanumeric keyboard.
Place the cursor on the desired position to edit the text.
5. Edit the text and press EN TER to confirm.
Text Relocation To relocate Free Text, By Word and By Sentence Annotations:
1. Place the cursor on the text to be moved and press EN TER to
highlight it: the text is contoured by a frame.
2. If necessary press ACTIO N to switch to MOVE modality (refer
to the Annotations Configuration paragraph).
3. Move the trackball to place the text in the new position, then
press EN TER to confirm its final position: the sentence is
positioned and the frame disappears.
Annotations Configuration
Refer to the “Getting Press M EN U then A N N O T to enter in the Annotations Configuration Menu. It
Started” manual for is organized in two main areas: the left side shows the list of all saved
information on the annotations, organized by applications, and the right side the glossary
configuration procedure. configuration menu.
NOTE When an application is selected, F A C T O R Y retrieves all factory annotations

and deletes all user customized glossaries saved for that application.
The glossary configuration menu changes depending on the selection made

on the left list, (ALL APPLICATIONS option or an application/customized
glossary).

ANNOTATIONS
Settings for All Applications

When ALL APPLICATIONS has been selected, the menu allows the user to
enable the following parameters:
Parameter Action
ADVANCED
FEATURES
FONT SIZE It sets the font size.
AUTOMATIC WORD It enables the Automatic word recognition.
RECOGNITION
DELETE WHEN When enabled, the text is automatically deleted as

UNFROZEN soon as real time is resumed.
TEXT REPLACEMENT When selected, the new word is placed starting
ENABLED from the HOME position and any existing word in
such position is overwritten.
When not selected, the new word is placed at the
right side of the last existing one, and a space
character is automatically placed in between.
FIRST CURSOR It sets the trackball functionality when text is
ACTION highlighted, whether it shall move (MOVE option
cursor displayed on the screen) or edit (EDIT option
text contoured by a frame) the highlighted text. A
third option (FIX option) places the selected word
and allows to select a new one.
Settings for a specific Application

When an application/customized glossary has been selected for editing, the
configuration menu is organized with internal folders, selectable using the
tabs displayed on the top of the menu.

ANNOTATIONS
Fig. 1-2: Glossary Configuration Menu
The glossary configuration menu shows:

 in the center the touchscreen layout. Both modalities “By
Word” and “By Sentence” have their dedicated touchscreen,
selectable through the corresponding tab;
 on the right the selected application and the lists of all words
available in all glossaries, organized as FACTORY and CUSTOM
lists;
 on the bottom the fields where the customized glossary is
named and described.
Glossary Configuration
Procedure 1. Select either B Y WORD or B Y SENTENCE modality;
2. select the desired word from the right list with the trackball.
The word can be selected either by scrolling the list with the
trackball or by entering searching criteria in the SEARCH field;
3. by keeping EN TER pressed, drag and drop the word in the
desired position of the touchscreen;
4. for each modality, words can be organized in different levels:
select first the desired P A G E using the trackball and then
drag and drop the word in the desired page. Words organized
in more pages (or levels) can be scrolled swiping left/right on
the touchscreen. Repeat the procedure to add other words.
5. ADD WORD field allows to add new words into the glossary.
Using the alphanumeric keyboard enter the desired word and
press Enter  to confirm: the system automatically adds the

ANNOTATIONS
new word to the C U S T O M list. To delete a customized word,

place the cursor on the word to be removed and, by keeping
EN TER pressed, drop it into the waste bin.
Glossary Organization in the Touchscreen

Words can be freely positioned within the touchscreen.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Moving a Word Select the word with the trackball and by keeping the EN TER key pressed,
move it in the desired position. Release EN TER to confirm.
Deleting a Word Place the cursor on the word to be removed and by keeping the EN TER key
pressed drop it into the waste bin.

ANNOTATIONS

2
Chapter
2 - Bodymarks
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Bodymarks are schematic drawings of anatomical sections. A vector overlays
the mark to indicate the probe position. Active bodymarks with probe
markers are displayed at the bottom left of the screen.
Bodymarks are organized in groups: each application has its specific set of
bodymarks.
Bodymark Activation
Bodymarks can be activated both in real time, in Exam review and in Archive
review by pressing M ARK . Once activated, the touchscreen displays the group
of marks associated to the active application and preset while on the
Navigation Bar other anatomical districts are listed when available.
Tap on each tab to browse the marks available for other districts, rotate
APPLICATIONS (i.e. VASCULAR) knob at the bottom-right of the touchscreen
to browse the marks available with other applications.
Procedure 1. Press M ARK .
2. If necessary, change application and/or select the desired
bodymark library.
3. Select the bodymark on the touchscreen: the mark is
displayed on the screen. You can also rotate M ARK to change
selection.
4. If in Dual format, use the LEFT or RIGHT button to correctly
match the mark to the corresponding image.
5. Increase/decrease the dimensions of the bodymark rotating
SIZE.
6. The arrow on the bodymark indicates the probe marker. Use

the trackball to position it.
7. Use the ROTATE button to rotate the arrow. Alternatively
you can also press M ARK ; the arrow becomes green and can
be rotated by rotating M ARK .
8. Press OK or EN TER to confirm.

BODYMARKS
Once confirmed, bodymark can be moved in any position on the image by

selecting it and dragging it to the new position. Bodymarks can be moved
over annotations and measurements; when this happens the label is
maintained below the bodymark itself.
The following controls are available:
SET HOME once the bodymark is selected to be moved on the image, this key sets the
default position (HOME) for the bodymark based on the current position.
SIZE increases/decreases the size of the bodymark.
DELETE BODYMARK exits without displaying any bodymark. The same button has to be pressed to
cancel the displayed mark.
Bodymarks can be added on archived images and sequences, but they are not
saved on retrieved images or clips.

BODYMARKS
Bodymarks Configuration
Refer to the “Getting Press M EN U then B O D Y M A R K S to enter in the Bodymarks Configuration
Started” manual for Menu. It is organized in two main areas: the left side shows the list of all saved
information on the bodymark libraries, organized by applications, and the right side the bodymark
configuration procedure. configuration menu.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
NOTE When an application is selected, F A C T O R Y retrieves all factory bodymark
libraries and deletes all user customized bodymarks saved for that
application.
Settings for a specific Application

When an application/customized bodymark library has been selected for
editing, the configuration menu is organized with internal folders, selectable
using the tabs displayed on the top of the menu.
Fig. 2-1: Bodymark Configuration Menu
The bodymark configuration menu shows:
 in the center the touchscreen layout;

 on the right, the selected application and the lists of all the
available bodymarks grouped by application;
 on the bottom the fields where customized bodymark
libraries are named and described;

BODYMARKS
Bodymark Configuration
To create a customized bodymark library, follow this procedure:
Procedure 1. using the trackball scroll the application list displayed on the
right and click on the desired combo to access the single
bodymark;
2. select the desired bodymark from the list on the right;
3. by keeping EN TER pressed, drag and drop the bodymark in the
desired position of the touchscreen;
4. bodymarks can be organized in different levels: select first
the desired P A G E using the trackball and then drag and drop
the bodymark in the desired page. Bodymarks organized in
more pages (or levels) can be scrolled swiping left/right on
the touchscreen.
5. Repeat the procedure to add other bodymarks.
Bodymark Organization in the Touchscreen
Bodymarks can be freely positioned within the touchscreen.
Moving a Bodymark Select the bodymark with the trackball and by keeping the EN TER key pressed
move it in the desired position. Release EN TER to confirm.
Deleting a Place the cursor on the bodymark to be removed and by keeping the EN TER
Bodymark key pressed drop it into the waste bin.

3
Chapter
3 - Acquisition Protocols
ADVANCED
FEATURES
This chapter explains how to create and configure protocols.
Configuration Menu
A protocol is a sequence of actions that can be defined by the user to support
procedures. A protocol is useful to:
 make it easier the usage of the MyLab;
 comply with clinical guidelines;
 provide standard examination even if performed by different
operators.
A protocol is made of several sessions where each session is made of one or
more steps. Each step can be configured to do different actions.
The A C Q U I S I T I O N P R O T O C O L S option of the M EN U allows to access the
Acquisition Protocol Configuration menu.
The menu is organized in two main areas. The left side shows the list of
applications while the right side shows the list of protocols.
All saved protocols are organized by application.
Configuration To create a protocol, follow this procedure:
 to create a completely new Acquisition Protocol, select the
desired application from the left list and press the N E W
button;
 to create a new Acquisition Protocol starting from an existing
one, select the desired protocol from the left list and press
the C L O N E button. When no protocol is selected, this button
is replaced by the N E W button.
When a protocol is selected, also the following buttons can be pressed:
 E D I T to modify the selected protocol. Alternatively position the
cursor on the desired option and press EN TER twice to select it;
 REMOVE deletes the selected protocol.

ACQUISITION PROTOCOLS
How to create an Acquisition Protocol
Once N E W or CLONE buttons have been pressed, the following menu is

displayed:
Fig. 3-1: Acquisition Protocols Menu
SESSIONS
Actions
AP NAME
The Acquisition Protocols menu is organized in three main areas:

 on the left the list of all the sessions;
 on the right the list of configured actions organized by steps;
 on the bottom the fields where customized protocols are
named and described.
A session is a self consistent section of a protocol (typically devoted to a
specific anatomical district).
Groundwork Before creating a protocol, it is suggested to:
 list all the required steps;
 decide how to split actions into sessions;
 order by priority mandatory and optional actions within each
session;
 create custom measurements if needed.

Configuration After N E W or C L O N E have been pressed, follow this procedure to create a

protocol:
1. press the N E W button to create a new session. Several
sessions can be defined for a protocol;
2. place the cursor on the SESSION NAME field and using the
alphanumeric keyboard enter the desired name;
ADVANCED
FEATURES
3. place the cursor on the STEP NAME field and using the
alphanumeric keyboard insert the desired step name;
4. select the desired action from the curtain menu. The first
step of every section is always SET ACQUISITION and only its
details can be modified (see next point);
5. press the D E T A I L S button to configure the proper parameters
for the selected action;
6. press the N E W S T E P button to create a new step. One or
more steps can be defined for each session;
7. once all steps and sessions have been defined, press V E R I F Y
P R O T O C O L to validate the protocol consistency from a
syntactic point of view. A feedback dialog will inform the result;
8. place the cursor on the NAME field and using the
alphanumeric keyboard enter the desired name for the
protocol and its description (N O T E S field);
9. press S A V E to save the protocol. Before saving, a protocol
verification is automatically done.
CANCEL exits the menu without saving the new protocol.
NOTE Use short strings both for session and step name since they are shown on
the main display as “Session name - Step name”.
Actions and steps order is important creating a protocol.

Once selected, each step can be moved up/down with the proper button on
the right to modify.
Once selected, each session can be moved up/down with the proper button
on the bottom.

Available Actions
Set Acquisition
This action allows to set the desired acquisition mode and its typical setting.
Fig. 3-2: Set Acquisition Windows
The S U M M A R Y field allows to input a description for the action under

definition. This description is the one used in the summary column of the
main editor screen.
ACQUISITION M O D E allows to set the desired acquisition mode.
Depending to the selected acquisition mode, different parameters can be set.
As additional option the ACQUISITION TAG field allows to add an annotation
or remove all previous annotations from screen.
When completed, press O K to save the changes or C A N C E L to discard them.
Select Frame & Store
This action allows to select the desired frame and save it in the archive.
Only the SUMMARY field is present. No other controls are available.

Select Frame & Measurement

This action allows to select the desired frame and runs the selected measure
on it.
Fig. 3-3: Select Frame & Measurement Windows
ADVANCED
FEATURES
The desired measure can be selected from the list of measures available for
the current application. The measure list is divided in two main branches:
FACTORY and CUSTOM.
The ADD NEW MEAS ON SAME IMAGE allows to run other measures on the same
image.
When STORE IMAGE and MEASUREMENT are selected, the measured image is
automatically saved in the archive (no click needed).

Manage Annotations
This action allows to write on the image the selected text.
Fig. 3-4: Manage Annotation Windows
Fill the ANNOTATIONS TO BE ADDED field with the text to be displayed on the
screen. POSITION allows to specify where to add the previously defined
annotation (default is home).
When REMOVE ALL PREVIOUS ANNOTATIONS is selected, the annotations are
removed from the screen.
Save Clip
This action allows to save a clip in the archive.
Only the SUMMARY field is present. No other controls are available.

Working with Protocols

Refer to the “General When protocols have been created and associated to the eTouch button, you
Setup” chapter in this can work with them using the following procedure:
section for further
1. Start a new exam inserting patient data, selecting probe,
information on how to
application and preset;
configure eTouch.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
2. Press ETO UCH button;
3. Select the desired protocol on the touchscreen, the protocol
automatically starts.
On the bottom left of the screen are displayed both the actual session and
step (on the first row) and the next session (on the second row).
Pressing EN TER you can go ahead through the steps of the current session
while pressing UN DO you can skip to the next session.


4
Chapter
4 - Security
ADVANCED
FEATURES
The access to the system, particularly to protect the archive, can be reserved
to authorized users. In this case all users have to enter a password to use the
system and to access the archive data. The access under password allows a
secure management of the archive: its data can be reviewed and modified only
by authorized personnel.
This chapter provides information on the security features offered by MyLab
and how to define the list of the authorized users.
This chapter also describes the precautions implemented on MyLab and
suggested by Esaote to avoid attacks from viruses.
You can assign different accessing profiles to different system configurations.
If the security login described below is not enabled on your MyLab, at every
boot a reminder is displayed on the screen. The message can be disabled
selecting the related check-box avoiding further notifications.
Security Configuration Menu

Two different accounts are available: administrator and user.
The system administrator can decide whether to activate the access security
management. When enabled, he/she can access to the configuration menu to
create, add, delete users and define their profiles. The administrator can set
the emergency access to the system (access without password). More
administrators can be defined.
To access the Security Configuration Menu press M EN U than S E C U R I T Y , the
system will prompt the Login screen where to insert the administrator USER
NAME and PASSWORD. Insert them and press L O G I N to enter the
configuration menu.
NOTE The default administrator user name and password are:

ADMINISTRATOR and MYLAB. Change this account if the security
management is activated.
The configuration menu is organized in two tabs: Settings and Users.

SAVE saves and activates the settings.

SECURITY
CANCEL exits the menu without saving the new settings.
Settings Tab
Only administrators can access this option.
Table 4-1: Settings available in Settings Tab
Field Action
INACTIVITY TIME Sets the inactivity time (in days) after which
DISABLING LOGIN (DAYS) the account automatically expires.
PASSWORD MINIMUM Sets the minimum number of characters for
LENGTH the password (maximum 20).
PASSWORD EXPIRATION Sets the time (in days) after which the
(DAYS) password expires.
LOCKING TIMEOUT Sets the time-out, after which the system is
(MINUTES) locked.
DISABLE EMERGENCY Disables the emergency access when
ACCESS checked.
DISABLE ACCESS Disables the security access when checked.
CONTROL
NOTE MyLab is case sensitive.
When security access has been enabled, the user authentication can be local
(LOCAL USER check-box selected) or centralized (LOCAL USER check-box not
selected).
For centralized authentication of the users it is mandatory to define a LDAP
(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Server: the user password and
permissions can be received from the LDAP server.
Fill the AD SERVER NAME with the desired server name or IP address.
Export Log EXPORT SECURITY LOG button saves on an external medium the security
log files. All configurations (Settings and Users) and the access security log
(see below) in the MYLABUSERMANAGEMENT folder are saved in the USB
medium. This procedure can be used to backup the security configuration, or
to copy it to another MyLab system with a compatible software release.

SECURITY
Users Tab
To access to the configuration menu press:
 EDIT to modify the selected user profile;
 NEW USER to add a new profile;
 REMOVE to delete the selected user profile.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Table 4-2: Settings available in User Tab
Field Action
USER NAME Sets the user name.

FIRST NAME Sets the user first name.
MIDDLE NAME Sets the user middle name.
LAST NAME Sets the user last name.
ASSIGN PASSWORD Sets the user password.
CONFIRM NEW Confirms the set user password.
PASSWORD
ENABLED TO MODIFY THE When checked, the user has full capabilities.
CONFIGURATION
CHANGE PASSWORD AT When checked, it requires the user to enter a

NEXT LOGON new password at the first login.
ADMINISTRATOR When checked, it sets the user as administrator.
ENABLED When checked, it makes the users able to
access the system.
A user account is identified by USER NAME, LAST NAME, FIRST NAME and
MIDDLE NAME.
NOTE The Last Name will be required by the system at the log in.
User Accounts
Two different user’s profiles can be defined:
 user with full capabilities (ENABLED TO MODIFY THE
CONFIGURATION field checked);
 user with limited capabilities (ENABLED TO MODIFY THE

CONFIGURATION field unchecked).

SECURITY
In the first case the user can change all clinical and system settings; in the
latter case the user can NOT modify the following presets:
 clinical settings (P R E S E T MANAGER button is not active);
 real time settings (the option REAL TIME PRESETS of the
M EN U key is not displayed);
 printer settings (the option PRINTER of the M EN U key is not

displayed);
 import/export settings (the corresponding option of the
key is not displayed);
M EN U
 DICOM settings (the corresponding option of the M EN U key

is not displayed);
 3D settings (the corresponding option of the M EN U key is not
displayed).
Both administrator and users can access the archive, both in Exam Review
and in Archive Review.
Table 4-3: Types of user
User type Password needed User authorization
EMERGENCY NO Can only archive locally; can review

only the data of the current exam
(EXAM REVIEW); cannot export.
NORMAL YES Can review and export all the data

(EXAM and ARCHIVE REVIEW).
Cannot change configurations.
NORMAL with rights YES Can review and export all the data
to change configuration (EXAM and ARCHIVE REVIEW).
ADMINISTRATOR YES Like NORMAL, plus can create and

delete NORMAL and
ADMINISTRATOR users, can disable
the access control and the
EMERGENCY access, etc.
ESAOTE NO (dongle) Like ADMINISTRATOR

SECURITY
Security Access to the System

When security is enabled, a password is required to access the system. When
starting up, the system requires to enter user name and password.
Emergency Access When the Emergency option is active, exams can be performed
(E M E R G E N C Y button) without entering any user name and password. The
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Emergency access allows to perform exams and review saved images in Exam
Review, but won’t allow to access the Archive (ARCHIVE key).
NOTE Emergency exams are automatically saved on the local archive. Only
authorized users can access these exams.
Log Out and Lock LOGOUT button is displayed in the Start Exam window. The system is set in
standby by pressing this key and can be reactivated by inserting user name and
password again.
LOCK button is displayed in real time, Exam Review and Archive Review
allowing to lock the system. The password is required to unlock the system.
User Menu The option CHANGE PASSWORD of the M EN U key allows the user to change
the user account.

SECURITY
Access Security Control

When enabled, the security access management produces a log file (called
UserManagementLog.txt) tracing every access to the unit (access log). This
allows the system administrator to fulfill the security regulations requiring this
kind of log.
The log file can be considered to have adequate completeness, inalterability
and integrity.
Completeness The log file is automatically produced and internally archived by the MyLab
system: this file can be then considered complete and can be exported into a
USB medium.
Inalterability MyLab can be considered a closed system: the normal user (including the
system administrator) can not modify the contents of the log file: this
guarantees its inalterability.
Integrity Moreover it is always possible to export again the log file to verify its integrity.
Protection from Viruses

Like every other computer-based system, MyLab can be exposed to malware
attacks. The term “malware” indicates a software (sometimes called virus,
trojan horse, worm) designed to infiltrate or damage a computer system
without the owner knowing. Theoretically malware can affect the operations
of a computer system in different ways: it could delete its system files, thus
stopping its functioning; it could also compromise the security of the
machine, allowing unwanted exposure of the data contained in it. In a medical
imaging system, like the MyLab system, this could compromise the privacy of
the examined patients or damage the exam database.
Unfortunately, as for any other computer-based system, internal security
measures cannot ensure a complete protection of MyLab against malware. For
this reason the user must be aware of Esaote countermeasures and must
know which is the best approach to work with MyLab in the best possible
security conditions.

SECURITY
Malware Infection
Malware can enter into a computer system when executing a program with a
viral payload. Such a program could be either intentionally or accidentally
executed. Normally MyLab does not allow to intentionally execute other
software programs than the pre-loaded ones: only exception occurs when
installing a printer.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
While installing the printer, the MyLab system could require specific printer
drivers, if these are not already present, they should be requested to Esaote.
Besides these operations, MyLab can be considered a closed system. To ensure
the maximum level of security, auto-running software from removable
devices is disabled.
CAUTION Always and only use removable devices (USB, CD or DVD) with a safe
content (media produced and used only on systems protected by malware).
NOTE Any operation different from the ones described in the Operator manuals is
not authorized by Esaote. Any system malfunctioning caused by
unauthorized operations is considered as falling under the user’s
responsibility.
MyLab Operating System Patches Policy

Malware can also enter a computer system through the data network,
exploiting a failure of the operating system. For this reason it is very
important to install as soon as possible the relevant security patches released
from the manufacturer of the operating system.
The operating system is Windows 10. Esaote includes the manufacturer
operating system patches into the MyLab regularly scheduled software
releases: this will ensure that the patches do not affect the system functioning
and are validated by Esaote.
Between regularly scheduled releases, if a patch for the Operating System is
made to solve known vulnerabilities with impact on MyLab, a corrective
software version is released and provided to the user by the Esaote service or
authorized service partner.
Firewall
It is anyway advisable to close to the malware any possible access from the
data network: for this reason all unused network ports are closed in the MyLab.

SECURITY
To minimize the exposition to the threats coming from the network, medical
devices based on a networked computer system, like MyLab, should be
connected only to a properly managed data network, i.e. a network that is
carefully isolated from external networks through suitable firewalls and that
is not used to connect extraneous devices (such as laptops coming from
outside the department, etc.)1.
CAUTION Always verify that the network is protected from malware.
To ensure a complete protection of MyLab from any network attack, Esaote

suggests to use a complete agentless intrusion-prevention system: this is a
system that acts like a firewall protecting the network against malware from
outside, but it also checks the internal network traffic, without requiring any
additional software installation in the MyLab system2.
The internal Windows 10 firewall can be enabled by the Esaote Service
personnel.
Should further information be needed, please contact Esaote personnel.
Correct management and privacy of

patient data
Esaote develops its products, including MyLab, with the aim of providing its
customers with enhanced security capabilities and is committed to cooperate
with customers in their efforts to comply with security and privacy laws and
regulations (such as HIPAA in the U.S.A., GDPR in Europe and PRC
Cybersecurity Law in China).
Modifications to personal data of patients are highly critical operations as they
may constitute a breach of patient privacy or lead to an incorrect diagnosis of
images.
WARNING Modifications to personal patient data may lead to incorrect diagnosis of

images, caused by:
- inconsistency of images and related personal data (for example, wrong
replacement of patient data with those of another person);
1. Refer for example to the USA Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Device Isola-
tion Architecture Guide, April 30, 2004, available at the HIMSS website: http://
www.himss.org/ASP/topics_FocusDynamic.asp?faid=101.
2. Refer for example to Trend Micro Network VirusWall Enforcer or Firebox X Core
Unified Threat Management products or SonicWALL TZ products, or similar.

SECURITY
- inconsistency between patient data stored on images – and modified – on

the system and data present on the same printed images, sent via the
network, saved on removable media and/or stored on PACS prior to data
modifications.
The operation of exporting images acquired with MyLab onto removable

media (see Archive section further in this manual), also enables the user to
ADVANCED
FEATURES
save a file containing the patient data related to the exported examinations.
This file can then be shared, displayed and modified by other users.
WARNING It is the exclusive responsibility of the user to conserve file containing

patient data, guarantee correct management of these data and respect of
patient privacy.
It is important to take into account a number of rules in managing removable

media used to store images: observance of these rules enables the correct
creation and storage of a copy of the patient database.
Check the condition of the media used for storage: for example a scratched
CD or DVD will become unusable.
 Use good quality removable media.
 Ensure correct care and storage as specified by product
manufacturers.
CAUTION It is the user’s responsibility to protect removable media on which images

have been saved or exported, against the intrusion and/or improper use by
third parties, for reasons of data security and privacy.
Saving images on removable media at regular intervals from initial use of the
system, enables the user to create a copy of the images produced with the
system and stored in the hard disk database.
NOTE Saving images on removable media can be used as backup but cannot be
considered a long-term archiving procedure, which requires a different
procedure and suitable means.

SECURITY
Data interface and transmission protocol

Wired network
Transmission protocol: TCP/IP
Interface: Ethernet 10Base-T, 100Base-T, 1000Base-T, self-adaptive
Bandwidth: 10-100-1000 MbPs, self-adaptive
Wireless network
The integrated WiFi and Bluetooth adapter supports IEEE 802.11 ac/a/b/
g/n dual-band (2.4 and 5 GHz) transmission standards (automatically
selected), with WPA Personal or PSK (TKIP, AES) and WPA2 Personal or
PSK (AES) encryption schemes; Open and WEP networks are allowed but a
disclaimer suggests to use a more secure network, WPA Enterprise (Radius)
is not supported. The Bluetooth capability is not used by the software, and it
is disabled.
Bandwidth: according to the selected transmission standard, up to 300 Mbps.
The integrated WiFi adapter is the Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. QCNFA364A
and follows the China radio regulation, see the enclosed certificate.
Storage media
 CD-R and DVD-R can be read;
 CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW can be read and written;
 USB memory devices can be read and written.
All the formats supported by Windows 10 are admitted.
Storage format
Exam Data are available in the following formats:
 DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications in
Medicine): international standard for medical images and
related information (ISO 12052)
 Esaote proprietary format UAF
The exam data can be exported in the following formats:
 Report:
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 4 - 10

SECURITY
• PDF format
 Images:
• Bitmap (.bmp)
• Portable Network Graphics (.png)
• Joint Photographic Expert (.jpg)
ADVANCED
FEATURES
 Clips:
• Audio Video Interleave (.avi)

SECURITY

5
Chapter
5 - Remote Service
ADVANCED
FEATURES
This chapter describes how to access to the Remote Service offered by
Esaote.
How to Access to Remote Service

The R E M O T E S E R V I C E option of the M EN U key allows the Service personnel
to access to MyLab in remote.
Fig. 5-1: Remote Service Menu
When active, the Service personnel can remotely interact with the user and
with the system looking at the screen and at the files.
Pre Conditions
MyLab can be connected to the Remote Service only when:
 the network has been configured (refer to the corresponding
chapter of this section for further information),
 the system is connected to the network.
NOTE It is suggested to contact the network administrator since network

characteristics will be required to establish the remote connection.

REMOTE SERVICE
Network Connection
Before contacting the Service personnel, it is recommended to verify the
connection following the procedure below:
Procedure 1. Configure the network.
2. Connect the system to the network.
3. Select the R E M O T E SERVICE option of the M EN U key.
4. Press C H E C K C O N N E C T button. If the connection is
established the system will display the message:
Connection available.
Remote Service Connection

Only after having verified the network connection, contact the Service
personnel for the Remote assistance. The Service personnel will provide with
two PIN numbers that have to be entered in the menu.
NOTE The PIN numbers have a limited time validity: contact the personnel only
after having connected the system to the network.
The PIN numbers can be used one time only.
Procedure 1. Verify the connection by pressing C H E C K C O N N E C T.
2. Enter the two PIN numbers in the two central fields using
the alphanumeric keyboard.
NOTE The fields are not case sensitive.
3. Press C O N N E C T .
The system displays the following menu:

REMOTE SERVICE
Fig. 5-2: Remote Service Connection
ADVANCED
FEATURES
This menu allows to chat with the Service personnel: the bottom field can be
used to exchange information with the Service personnel.
Press either D I S C O N N E C T button or place the cursor on the Cross icon and
press EN TER to quit the Remote Service.
WARNING During the Remote Service session, the device MUST NOT BE USED for
diagnoses or for live scanning but for testing purposes only when requested
by the service personnel.

REMOTE SERVICE

6
Chapter
6 - Using the Needle Guides
ADVANCED
FEATURES
A wide range of Esaote probes can be equipped with optional kits for needle
guided insertion procedures.
WARNING Use only Esaote approved Needle Guides and accessories. Refer to the
“Probes and Consumables” manual for the complete list and for mounting
instructions. Not approved Needle Guides may not properly fit Esaote
probes thus compromising the patient’s safety and resulting in patient
injury.
MyLab, through the BIOPSY key, is able to display a guideline on the real-time
ultrasound image that shows the anticipated path of the needle. You can use
these guidelines to ensure that the needle is following the correct path.
BIOPSY is active only in B-Mode, in CFM and if the active probe is compatible
with an attachment kit.
When the probe in use supports a needle guide, BIOPSY key is enabled and
pressing it the biopsy procedure can be activated.
 PC Carefully read the “Probe and Consumables” manual for detailed
information on how to properly and safely handle the probes, for
detailed instruction on how to properly and safely mount the Needle
Guide Adaptors and for detailed instruction for reprocessing of Needle
Guides.
Displaying the Needle Guide

Display of needle guide can be activated on B-Mode and CFM images, in
Dual, Dual-CFM and simultaneous formats.
NOTE Biopsy procedure is enabled in B-Mode and in CFM only.
NOTE To use the biopsy procedure in CnTI and in Elastography modalities,

activate the procedure before enter one of these modalities.
WARNING Biopsy procedures must be performed only on real time images. Do not
perform biopsy procedure if the needle is not visible. Never move the
needle when the image is frozen.

USING THE NEEDLE GUIDES
WARNING Mount the adaptor, following the instruction provided by the manufacturer
of the biopsy kit. Before inserting biopsy needle, ensure orientation groove
on bracket is aligned with orientation rib on probe handle.
WARNING Before performing the biopsy procedure, check for the correct assembly
and positioning of the biopsy kit. Also check that the insertion angle is
equal to the angle selected using the user interface software. Needle
insertion into a guide with an insertion angle other than the one of the
selected angle involves risks to the patient’s safety.
Procedure 1. If necessary, protect the probe with a cover mounting it

according to the instruction provided by the manufacturer.
2. Assemble the needle guide on the probe, following the pro-
vided instructions.
3. Connect the probe to the system.
4. Start a new exam setting the image parameters for the opti-
mal view of the examination area and needle path.
5. Press BIOPSY, then, according to the probe and guide being
used, select, when necessary, the guide tapping the corre-
sponding button with the name of the kit (GUIDE NAME but-
ton, i.e. ABS424).
6. When more that one insertion angle is available for the
selected needle guide, the available insertion angles will be
displayed beside the GUIDE NAME button (through ANGLE
DEGREE button indicating the angle values in degrees, i.e.
25°).
7. As soon as the selection has been done, MyLab displays the

forecast needle path (through a channel, a line or both
according to the settings - see further on this chapter). Dots
are stepped every 0,5 cm. The selected angle is shown on the
screen beside the needle insertion point.

Fig. 6-3: Superimposed needle guide line.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
WARNING The guideline displayed on the image only provides an indication of the
expected needle path, according to the selected guide. Always watch the
ultrasound live image while inserting the needle into the patient’s body so
that any deviation from the desired path of the needle tip can be corrected.
8. Tap OK to display the mode commands; the system tempo-

rarily disables all modes, except B-Mode or CFM, in Dual,
Dual-CFM and simultaneous formats; tap CANCEL to come
back to real time without displaying any line.
9. Select a new, sterile, straight needle that matches the needle-
gauge size on the biopsy guide clip you are using (if applica-
ble).
10. Insert the needle into the needle guide groove and perform
the biopsy by sliding the needle through the groove in the
guide until the needle intercepts the target.
WARNING Always verify that the whole needle working area, from its insertion point
up to target, doesn’t include anatomical structures that could be touched
and damaged, thus compromising the patient’s safety.
WARNING If the needle is not following the expected path, discontinue the procedure
and contact your Esaote representative.

WARNING Thin needles can bend when entering tissue.
WARNING Reverberation and tissue artifacts may produce false needle images which
can be mixed-up with the real needle image. Be sure the needle path
follows the guideline and that you are not using a false needle image to
locate the needle.
WARNING At certain scanning depths the needle insertion point or the needle itself
may not be displayed. In Dual formats the area where the needle is not
visible is larger. Always use scanning depths and displaying formats that
make the needle visible.
WARNING When scanning vascularized structures, display the needle guide working
area keeping the CFM mode active so that vessel can be detected and
avoided when inserting the needle. Once identified the optimal zone for
biopsy, turn CFM off to gain the maximum needle visibility.
11. Tap BIOPSY again to set the guide line to off and exit the pro-
cedure.
12. Remove the needle guide after use.
For linear probes, when displaying the needle guide, REF LINE is available to
display, once tapped, a line in the center of the probe. At the same time the depth
measurement function is enabled.
Needle Length
As soon as the needle biopsy is displayed, the trackball is linked to a yellow
spot displayed in the middle of the needle working area.
The spot position provides the distance from the needle guide exit point to
the spot itself. The distance value is displayed above the image sector, on the
opposite site of the needle insertion point.
The trackball moves the cursor along the forecast needle path and the
distance value is automatically updated.
WARNING The displayed value indicates the distance from the kit exit point and the
spot itself. The kit length has to be added up to this distance to evaluate the
needle length required for biopsy.

Press ACTIO N to change trackball function as usual.
After the Examination

 PC When the biopsy procedure has been completed, remove the needle and the
guide from the probe. Clean the items following the instructions provided in
ADVANCED
FEATURES
the “Probes and Consumables” manual and by the manufacturer and, when
applicable, dispose of the items according to the local regulations.
Checking the Guide Alignment

Perform the alignment verification before the first use of the biopsy guide.
The procedure verifies the system, the probe and biopsy guide relationships.
Procedure 1. Assemble the needle guide on the probe, following the pro-
vided instructions.
2. Connect the probe to the system.
3. Start a new exam setting the image parameters for the opti-
mal view of the examination area and needle path.
4. Immerse the probe to the allowed limit (refer to the “Probe
and Consumables” manual) in a water tank.
5. Press BIOPSY, then, according to the probe and guide being
used, select, when necessary, the guide tapping the corre-
sponding button with the name of the kit (GUIDE NAME but-
ton).
6. When more that one insertion angle is available for the
selected needle guide, the available insertion angles will be
displayed beside the GUIDE NAME button (through ANGLE
DEGREE button indicating the angle values in degrees).
7. As soon as the selection has been done, MyLab displays the

forecast needle path (through a channel, a line or both
according to the settings - see further on this chapter).
8. Tap OK to display the mode commands; the system tempo-
rarily disables all modes, except B-Mode or CFM, in Dual,
Dual-CFM and simultaneous formats; tap CANCEL to come
back to real time without displaying any line.

9. Select a new, straight needle that matches the needle-gauge

size on the biopsy guide clip you are using (if applicable).
WARNING Before proceeding, be sure the kit has been correctly assembled and the
needle has been inserted into the guide corresponding to the selected
angle.
10. Insert the needle into the needle guide groove and move it
down into the water bath until its ultrasound image is visible
on screen.
11. Check that the needle, during insertion, follows the guideline
superimposed on the screen along the entire depth of the
image.
WARNING If the needle is not following the expected path, discontinue the procedure
and contact your Esaote representative.
Needle Enhanced Imaging

The Needle Enhanced Imaging provides a better visualization of the needle
in the real time image. The displayed image is the composition of a standard
B-Mode image plus a steered image where the needle brightness is increased.
The feature is available in B-Mode for L 3-11, L 4-15 and L 8-24 probes (in
all applications with exception of the Cardiac one).
The Needle Enhanced Imaging is activated/deactivated pressing NEEDLE
ENHANCE; when active, a yellow reference line is displayed on the image and
additional buttons are present on the touchscreen.
OVERLAP activates/deactivates the overlapping of the steered needle of the enhanced

image.
N° Tap the key to set the entry side of the needle (LEFT or RIGHT) and, according
LEFT/RIGHT with its inclination, rotate the knob to define the related steering angle (10°,
20°...).
NOTE For the correct algorithm functionality it is mandatory to set the proper side
and angle before the needle insertion. Wrong settings of these parameters
can lead to emphasize anatomical structures and not the needle.
WARNING Please verify that when Needle Enhancement Imaging feature is active, the
anatomical structure and the biopsy target remain visible.

WARNING The enhanced needle algorithm works in a portion of the entire B-mode
image. The needle enhancement is intended to get evidence of the needle
trajectory once in tissue. This does not include the needle tip portion since,
due to different reasons, it can be outside of the enhanced image.
Hyperechogenic structure oriented in the needle direction can be wrongly
ADVANCED
FEATURES
enhanced. Enable and disable the function (overlap control) to verify the
proper structure enhancement.
Biopsy Configuration
Refer to the “Getting Press M EN U then G E N E R A L SETUP then access the B I O P S Y folder.
Started” manual for
The BIOPSY VIEW TYPE curtain menu allows to set the type of needle guide line
information on the
to be superimposed on the image during biopsy procedures. The selection is
configuration procedure.
among a channel (BIOPSY CHANNEL VIEW), a single line (BIOPSY NEEDLE VIEW)
or both (BIOPSY CHANNEL/NEEDLE VIEW).
After selection you can confirm and save the settings (S A V E ) or exit the menu
without saving the settings (C A N C E L ).


7
Chapter
7 - QPack
ADVANCED
FEATURES
QPack (Quantification Curves) provides capabilities to evaluate time/
intensity curves of Doppler or CnTI signals within the organ under
examination.
CnTI (Contrast Tuned Imaging) is a technology dedicated to ultrasound
Contrast Media (CA). Refer to the dedicated section of Advanced Operation
manual for further information.
QPack Activation
QPack can be activated both on:
 frozen clips,
 archived clips saved in raw data format,
 dual mode.
QPack analysis on frozen clips

Procedure 1. Scan the patient during a Contrast or a Doppler examination,
2. Press FREEZE,
3. If necessary, tap STOP to stop the cine loop,
4. Tap TOOLS then QPACK to enable the analysis,
5. Rotate CHANGE LOOP to select the loop you want to analyze,
6. Select a frame where the contrast effect or Doppler signal is
visible,
7. Define a ROI on the portion of the image to be analyzed;
you can draw the ROI by ELLIPSE, by TRACE or by VERTEX,
just follow the instruction on the screen,

QPACK
8. Tap CALCULATE to start the processing; the system calculates

the mean signal intensity within the defined ROI for all
frames in the loop.
9. If necessary, repeat points 7 and 8 to add and analyze new
ROIs.
Patient breathing If you want to compensate for the movement of the lesion under
compensation investigation due to patient breathing, you can continue from point 6 of the
previous procedure as follows:
7. Tap MOTION CORRECTION to select the cine-loop you want
to analyze,
8. Define the motion correction ROI on the portion of the
image within which the lesion you want to analyze is assumed
to move due to breathing,
9. Tap PROCESS to start the motion compensation algorithm;
compensation will be applied to the entire clip. If
compensation fails, a message is displayed. In this case,
define the correction ROI again,
10. Define the calculation ROI on the portion of the image to be
analyzed within the correction ROI; you can draw the ROI
by ELLIPSE, by TRACE or by VERTEX, just follow the
instruction on the screen,
frames in the loop,
ROIs.
QPack analysis on archived clips

Procedure 1. Select from the archive a clip saved in raw data format (those
clips are identified as thumbnails with green counter),
2. Press EDIT,
3. If necessary, tap STOP to stop the cine loop,
4. Tap QPACK to enable the analysis,
5. Rotate CHANGE LOOP to select the loop you want to analyze,

QPACK
6. Select a frame where the contrast effect or Doppler signal is

visible,
7. Define a ROI on the portion of the image to be analyzed;
you can draw the ROI by ELLIPSE, by TRACE or by VERTEX,
just follow the instruction on the screen,
ADVANCED
FEATURES
frames in the loop.
ROIs.
Patient breathing If you want to compensate for the movement of the lesion under
compensation investigation due to patient breathing, you can continue from point 6 of the
previous procedure as follows:
7. Tap MOTION CORRECTION to select the cine-loop you want
to analyze,
8. Define the motion correction ROI on the portion of the
image within which the lesion you want to analyze is assumed
to move due to breathing,
9. Tap PROCESS to start the motion compensation algorithm;
compensation will be applied to the entire clip. If
compensation fails, a message is displayed. In this case,
define the correction ROI again,
10. Define the calculation ROI on the portion of the image to be
analyzed within the correction ROI; you can draw the ROI
by ELLIPSE, by TRACE or by VERTEX, just follow the
instruction on the screen,
frames in the loop,
ROIs.
Touchscreen controls in QPack
ADD TO REPORT adds the QPack analysis to the report.

QPACK
LEFT TRIM changes the left and right extremes of the selected loop.
RIGHT TRIM
CHANGE LOOP At QPack activation, the clip is automatically segmented in loops each of
them consistent in term of depth, frequency and other image parameters.
Rotate the knob to select the loop you want to analyze.
SESSION Rotate the knob to change session; for each clip till five sessions can be
analyzed. Sessions can be enabled and renamed by accessing the QPack
Configuration Menu pressing M EN U then Q P A C K . Each session has its own
identity when added to the report.
ZOOM changes the scale factor of ultrasound image: ultrasound image only (FULL),
both ultrasound image and intensity curve where ultrasound image size can
be set to LARGE, MEDIUM or SMALL.
PLAY PLAY and STOP share the same key. PLAY shows the sequence of stored
STOP images in cine mode while STOP stops the cine presentation of the clip.
Intensity Curve
When the QPack analysis has been processed, the system displays a curve
representing the mean signal intensity within the defined ROI for all frames
in the loop. X axis represents the elapsed time from previous frame while Y
axis the intensity itself.
Once the ROI has been placed, it can be modified moving the blue arrow cursor
with the trackball and clicking on each anchor point.

QPACK
Fig. 7-1: Intensity curve during QPack analysis.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
On top-left of the screen, information on ROI and intensity curve are displayed, as
well as measurements made automatically on the curve:
 AUC Area Under the Curve
 TTP Time To Peak
 WOT Wash Out Time
A vertical cursor moves on the curve along the X axis by rotating the trackball
indicating the position in time of the frame displayed and its intensity value.
When more than one ROI has been drawn, more than one curve is displayed
and each curve color corresponds to the related ROI. In the same way, the
values displayed on top-left are grouped and identified with the same color.
Press IM AGE to save a screenshoot.
QPack deactivation
Tap QPACK to exit the QPack environment.

QPACK

8
Chapter
8 - Screen sharing and

MyLab Remote
ADVANCED
FEATURES
The screen content of MyLab can be replicated on external devices to be
shared with observers. Screen sharing can be done:
 connecting an external second monitor to MyLab;
 streaming the video on any device connected to the same
network;
Also MyLab keyboard can be duplicated on an external device (i.e. a PC or a
tablet) for remote controls purposes.
Second monitor
MyLab systems have a mini display port allowing the connection of a
secondary external HDMI or digital DVI monitor.
WARNING The external monitor cannot be used for diagnosis.
NOTE Refer to the safety requirements detailed on Getting Started manual before
connecting any external monitor and any peripheral device.
Depending on the resolution of the second monitor, MyLab monitor can be

replicated as PHYSICAL CLONE or SMART CLONE; these settings can be
reached tapping the gear icon in the advanced level of the touchscreen.

SCREEN SHARING AND MYLAB REMOTE
Fig. 8-1: Monitor Settings
Physical clone
When the external monitor supports the same resolution of MyLab systems
(1920x1080), the image on the external monitor is displayed exactly as it
appears on MyLab monitor. This means that what you can see on MyLab can
be seen exactly on the external monitor.
Smart clone
If the external monitor supports a resolution different (higher or lower) from
the MyLab systems, the image is adapted to the different resolution. When this
happens, a message on MyLab screen will inform you, and, depending on the
resolution of the external monitor, horizontal and/or vertical black bars
could be added to the image.
NOTE When in smart clone, the pop-up messages displayed on MyLab screen
cannot be displayed on the external monitor.
Video streaming and MyLab Remote

Through an internal web portal, MyLab can provide both video streaming and
remote control capabilities.
Streaming capabilities allow to share in real-time the ultrasound exam through
a network toward remote computers, smart-phones and tablets.
WARNING The streamed image cannot be used for diagnosis.

MyLab Remote provides an external remote controller for MyLab ultrasound

scanner duplicating the keyboard and touchscreen controls on a remote
device like a computer or a tablet connected to the same network of MyLab.
NOTE MyLab Remote requires a dedicated licence.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Streaming video and MyLab Remote settings can be accessed by pressing M EN U
then E P O R T A L where three tabs are available: W E B P O R T A L , S T R E A M I N G
and M Y L A B R E M O T E .
Web Portal tab

Fig. 8-2: Web Portal tab
The first two rows show the ADDRESS of MyLab in two ways: as IP address
(first row) and as computer name (second row). At the right side the same
information is displayed as QR code. Use one of them to access the remote
content in your browser both streaming and MyLab Remote.
STREAMING PASSWORD is the password necessary to remotely access the
streaming. It will be required by your browser to start the connection. The
password is randomly generated by each MyLab but it is strongly advised to
modify it on the first access. Keep pressed on the eye on the box to the left
to show the password and edit it. Confirm the password on the box to the
right.
REMOTE PASSWORD is the password necessary to enable remote control of
MyLab through MyLab Remote. The password is randomly generated by each

MyLab but it is strongly advised to modify it on the first access. Keep pressed
on the eye on the box to the left to show the password and edit it. Confirm
the password on the box to the right.
MAX CLIENT NUMBER is the maximum number of connections that can be
established. In order to preserve bandwidth, the maximum available number
is 5, but you can reduce this number if you want.
NOTE A maximum of 5 devices can be connected at the same time to preserve the
bandwidth.
Streaming tab
Fig. 8-3: Streaming tab
When ENABLE STREAMING is checked, you can stream what you can see on
MyLab monitor on the network. Be aware that by enabling the streaming, the
video signal will be replicated on the external devices connected to MyLab.
Take care that on these external devices the examination and the patient data
are visible and they could be digitally recorded. To preserve patient’s privacy
you can check the ENFORCE PRIVACY option to avoid that patient data are
streamed.
When FULL SCREEN STREAMING is checked, both the ultrasound image and
the related information on the screen are streamed, while, when US REGION
STREAMING is checked, only the ultrasound image is streamed.
If your network has a narrow bandwidth, you can decrease the FRAMES PER
SECOND number (15 is the maximum number allowed) and the JPEG QUALITY
to optimize the image flow.

MyLab Remote tab

When ENABLE MYLAB REMOTE is checked, you can remotely control your
MyLab through the controls replicated on an external tablet.
Streaming video activation
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Procedure 1. Check ENABLE STREAMING in Streaming tab,
2. Tap STREAM on the touchscreen, MyLab starts to stream the
ultrasound image,
3. Put the MyLab IP address and the streaming password in the
address bar of the browser of your remote device to begin
the connection.
NOTE Streaming capabilities are supported by the following browsers: Chrome,

Safari, Firefox and Edge.
When enforce privacy is enabled, some particular information (i.e. exam

archive list) will be not shared for privacy reasons. When those specific
windows are displayed on MyLab, on the remote screen will be displayed a
black image and the message “streaming on hold”.
For privacy reasons, when an exam is closed, the streaming is ended, then at
a new exam STREAM needs to be tapped to start the streaming again.
You can disable streaming at any time tapping STREAM again.
NOTE Remember that the streaming flow (images and video) can be recorded.
Preserve privacy of the patient.
NOTE When you switch from cabled network to Wi-Fi or vice versa, you have to
access the Web Portal tab to get the updated IP address to be used on your
web browser for streaming purposes.
MyLab Remote activation

Procedure 1. Check ENABLE MYLAB REMOTE in MyLab Remote tab,
2. Tap REMOTE on the touchscreen, MyLab starts the sharing of
keyboard,

3. Put the MyLab IP address and the remote password in the

address bar of the browser of your remote device to begin
the connection.
When MyLab Remote is active, beside the Esaote logo at top-left of the MyLab
screen, a connection active icon is displayed.
You can always control MyLab by its keyboard also when MyLabRemote is
active, that means when MyLab Remote is active, MyLab can be controlled both
by MyLab Remote itself and by the physical keyboard.
NOTE MyLab Remote capabilities are supported by the following browsers:

Chrome, Safari, Firefox and Edge.
You can disable MyLab Remote at any time tapping REMOTE again.
WARNING Whenever MyLab Remote does not manage the MyLab unit as desired, use
MyLab unit physical keyboard that must be always accessible.
WARNING Do not use tablet with screen size less than 10”.
WARNING Do not use MyLab Remote if the iPad has been jailbreaked.
WARNING The tablet shall be compliant to:

1. the Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU (RED)
2. at least one of these standards:
- EN 55011, Class B
- EN 55032, Class B
- FCC Part 15, Class B
NOTE When you switch from cabled network to Wi-Fi or vice versa, you have to
access the Web Portal tab to get the updated IP address to be used on your
web browser for streaming purposes.
WARNING Any incoming call shall disconnect the equipment with the MyLab.
WARNING Do not contemporary touch:

- the tablet and the MyLab unit, including probes, or
- the tablet and the patient, or
- the tablet and the operator handling the probe.

Use in sterile environment

The tablet can not be disinfected not sterilized.
WARNING Use a protective sterile sheath for tablet when in a sterile environment.
In the case tablet is used in sterile environment, a sterile sheath for tablet is
ADVANCED
FEATURES
provided by Protek (http://www.protekmedical.com/Images/
pdf_brochure_tabletcover.pdf).
WARNING Put your tablet in airplane mode with enabled Wi-Fi when using MyLab
Remote in surgery room or in proximity of lifesaving devices.
WARNING During the use of MyLab Remote, tablet must not be connected nor to its
battery charger nor to USB ports.
WARNING Do not introduce tablet in patient environment as defined in safety

standard IEC 60601-1 3rd Ed.
Maintain at least 15 cm (6 inches) of separation between your pacemaker

(operators included) or defibrillator and tablet; do not use any smart cover,
or smart case.
Camera streaming
When streaming video or MyLab Remote are active, you can overlap on them
a video live streamed by an optional camera connected to MyLab. The buttons
below are available only when a camera is connected to MyLab.
Tap CAMERA STREAM in the Stream tab to start the camera streaming: the
video camera output is sent over the network and you can see it on an external
computer using a web browser. Tap SHOW INFO to know the IP address and
related information for the connection.
Tap CAMERA PIP in the Stream tab to start the camera streaming: the video
camera output is displayed as Picture-in-Picture (PiP).
Rotate PIP SIZE to change the size of the overlapped image.
The position of the camera is fixed, so we recommend that you check the
default position of body mark, measurements and annotations.

WARNING The streamed video contains pictures of the patient that are not
anonymized.
Tap IMAGE or CLIP to save an image or clip with camera image overlapped.

9
Chapter
9 - VPan
ADVANCED
FEATURES
VPan allows to acquire B-Mode images on extended surfaces. The final image
is composed of consecutive frames placed side by side so that the whole
surface can be reconstructed.
NOTE Do not use the VPan acquisition in structures having black areas or in
moving structures.
VPan Acquisition
The panoramic acquisition can be activated in real time at any time by tapping
VPAN in the touchscreen tools section. VPan can be used with all the imaging
probes except the phased array and the transesophageal probes.
Procedure 1. Place the probe on one end of the area to be scanned. The
probe lens should be as parallel as possible to the scanning
surface.
2. Adjust the B-Mode image.
NOTE Adjust the controls so that the image results “filled” with echo signal,
minimizing the empty space.
WARNING During VPan acquisition do not modify the imaging controls.
3. Tap VPAN to activate it. The system displays a ROI on the B-

Mode image: the panoramic image will be composed using
the images acquired within the ROI.
4. Position the ROI with the trackball. If necessary, press
ACTIO N to modify the ROI dimensions and position with the
trackball.
5. Select the type of visualization of the reconstructed VPan
image during the scanning:
OFF LINE It shows the reference frame only.

VPAN
CENTERED Both the reconstructed image and the reference frame are shown and the
reference frame is centered on the screen.
CURVED Both the reconstructed image and the reference frame are shown and the
reconstructed image is centered on the screen.
6. Press ACQ UIRE to start the panoramic acquisition. The system
automatically identifies the probe direction (from left to right
or vice versa).
7. During VPan scanning, move the probe slowly and with a
constant velocity along the scanning area.
Fig. 9-1: Probe movement
WARNING During acquisition on a flat surface the probe must be moved along an axis
which is parallel to the surface itself (as shown in the figure above). If the
probe is moved around a curve surface, be sure that the contact between the
probe and the surface always occurs on the terminal end of the probe. If the
contact changes during the acquisition overlaid images could be produced.
8. Press ACQ UIRE or FREEZE to end the acquisition.
NOTE The panoramic acquisition automatically stops after one minute of

acquisition.
At the end of the acquisition the system automatically freezes and displays the
VPan image: you can immediately check if the image has been correctly
reconstructed and if there are distortions or misalignments. Should this be the
case, repeat the acquisition.
Exam End
To exit the VPan acquisition, press again VPAN in the touchscreen tools
section.

VPAN
Reviewing a VPan Image

Once the acquisition is completed, the system automatically freezes and
shows the VPan image at full screen.
The following controls are displayed on the touchscreen:
ADVANCED
FEATURES
FILTER modifies the filter applied to the panoramic image, increasing or decreasing
the smooth. The selected filter setting is stored: it will be automatically used
for next panoramic image reconstruction.
ORIENTATION flips the image left/right.
REF FRAME allows to change the screen presentation. Tap it then rotate the FORMAT
knob to select the way of visualization of the reference image among:
DUAL the reference frame is displayed to the right of the VPan
image.
SMALL the reference frame is displayed below the VPan image with
small size.
MEDIUM the reference frame is displayed below the VPan image with
medium size.
FULL only the reference frame is displayed with full size.
Unless in full screen, the whole panoramic image is displayed, reduced by the
factor indicated beside the gray scale, and the single reference frame is
displayed into a box. The trackball moves the yellow line on the panoramic
image and allows to scroll it frame by frame.
REVERSE flips the image up/down.
ROTATE rotates the panoramic image.
ZOOM changes the magnified factor. When the zoomed image exceeds the image
area, a box is displayed beside the zoomed image indicating which part of the
panoramic image is displayed on the screen. The trackball pans the image and
allows to scroll it frame by frame.

VPAN
FREEZE exits from VPan image revision activating the real-time.
Measurements
Both generic and specific measurements can be performed on a VPan image.
The frame visualization is suggested to perform measurements.
WARNING A poor image quality can considerably twist and degrade the measure
accuracy: it is strongly suggested not to perform measurements on twisted
and misaligned images.
It is strongly recommended to perform measurements on single frames

only. The VPan image can not match the scanned anatomy because of
misalignments or distortions. Be aware that measurements on single
frames acquired while moving the probe are affected by a systematic error
(less then 10%).
WARNING This symbol is displayed on the screen when in frame visualization. The
symbol indicates that the VPan image may not be optimal for the reporting
functions.
The measurements session is activated by pressing either the +...+ or the

M EASURE key: Refer to “Measurements” section on this manual for detailed
information.
Storing the Reconstructed Image

Both the VPan image and the single frame can be archived (IM AGE key) with
or without measurements.

10
Chapter
10 - HyperDoppler
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Overview
HyperDoppler is a tool intended for the investigation of the intra-cardiac
flows in humans to provide a better understanding of cardiac physiological or
pathological state.
HyperDoppler is able to derive information related to the intra-cardiac flow
formation by processing Color Doppler (CFM) clips and ECG trace.
WARNING This tool is not intended for diagnostic purposes. Therefore, diagnosis
performed relying only on HyperDoppler findings is not allowed.
Each diagnostic statement must be based on the evaluation of the results that
can be obtained with the standard B-Mode, M-Mode, Doppler (CW / PW)
and CFM methods following the guidelines and the current best clinical
practices.
Activation
HyperDoppler can be activated on:
 frozen clips acquired with the ECG trace,
 archived clips acquired with the ECG trace and saved in raw
data format.
Procedure for frozen clips

Procedure 1. Start a new exam in Cardiac application with P 1-5 or P 2-9
probe and ECG connected;
2. Activate CFM (Color Flow Mapping) mode;
3. If necessary, resize the CFM ROI and optimize the image;
4. Acquire a ventricle image with ECG trace;
NOTE Frame rate must be greater than 20Hz.
5. Press FREEZE;

HYPERDOPPLER
6. Select the desired cardiac cycle;

7. Tap HYPERDOPPLER in the touchscreen Tools section, to
start the flows analysis; the system processes the clip and in a
while it displays the results. Additional touchscreen controls
will be displayed too.
NOTE The analysis is performed on a single cardiac cycle.
Procedure for archived clips

Clips must have been acquired in Cardiac application with P 1-5 or P 2-9
probe and ECG trace and saved in raw data format.
Procedure 1. Select from the archive a clip acquired with the ECG trace
and saved in raw data format (those clips are identified as
thumbnails with green counter and heart superimposed);
3. Tap EDIT;
4. Tap STOP;
5. Tap HYPERDOPPLER in the touchscreen Tools section, to
start the flows analysis; the system processes the clip and in a
while it displays the results. Additional touchscreen controls
will be displayed too.

HYPERDOPPLER
Touchscreen controls in HyperDoppler

When HyperDoppler analysis has been performed, the results of processing
are displayed on the image as well as the related calculated parameters.
A HyperDoppler tab with the following controls is displayed on the
touchscreen.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
PLAY PLAY and STOP share the same button.
STOP
PLAY shows the sequence of images belonging to the selected cardiac cycle in
cine mode, while STOP stops the cine presentation of the clip.
FIRST FRAME automatically sets the current position at the begin of the sequence.
LAST FRAME automatically sets the current position at the end of the sequence.
CENTER IMAGE when selected, the ultrasound image with superimposed HyperDoppler
analysis is displayed as shown in the picture below.
Fig. 10-1: HyperDoppler analysis - center image selected
PRESSURE GRADIENT when selected, beside the ultrasound image with HyperDoppler analysis,
IMAGE additional maps are displayed:

HYPERDOPPLER
 Steady Image, top-right, represents the steady vorticity. The

map represents the mean value of the duration of the cycle.
 Polar Plot, bottom-right, is a polar plot of the pressure
gradient.
Fig. 10-2: HyperDoppler analysis - pressure gradient image selected
STEADY IMAGE when selected, the Steady Image is displayed beside the ultrasound image.
STEADY IMAGE MAP selects which map is used for the Steady Image.
SHOW ARROWS when selected, arrows showing blood flow direction and intensity are
displayed on the ultrasound CFM image.
When not selected, the US Image Map is superimposed on the ultrasound
image and two additional touchscreen controls are displayed:
TRANSPARENCY changes the value of transparency for superimposed US
Image Map;
US IMAGE MAP selects which map is superimposed on the ultrasound image.

HYPERDOPPLER
FRAME Rotate the knob to scroll the sequence frame by frame.
ARROW LENGTH Rotate the knob to change the length of the arrows displayed on the
ultrasound image. Arrows on ultrasound image show blood flow direction
and intensity improving the perception of blood motion.
ADVANCED
DUST MODE ON When on, arrow position moves with the local flow to improve the
FEATURES
DUST MODE OFF perception of blood motion.
ATTACH TO REPORT adds the HyperDoppler analysis to the report.
SAVE saves a clip of the duration of a cardiac cycle with vortex data necessary for
HYPERDOPPLER processing in external tools.
DATA
DENSITY Rotate the knob to change the density of the arrows: the lower is the value,
the higher is the number of arrows displayed.
MODIFY CONTOUR allows to modify the ED border without exiting the HyperDoppler.
VELOCITY FILTER activates/deactivates (ON/OFF) filters on velocity to reduce the noise effect.
Press ACQ UIRE to save a screenshot with HyperDoppler analysis.
HyperDoppler Deactivation
Tap HYPERDOPPLER or press FREEZE to exit the HyperDoppler analysis.
HyperDoppler Configuration
To customize the HyperDoppler, press M EN U , then H Y P E R D O P P L E R on the
System Settings area to access the configuration menu, and then E D I T to
modify the settings.
The tables below list the available settings.
The image on the right gives an image preview of the setting changed.
SAVE saves the settings so that they are immediately active.

HYPERDOPPLER
SHOW ARROWS, when checked, lets arrows be displayed on the ultrasound

CFM image as default at HyperDoppler activation.
Table 10-1: Map Selection
Fields Action
ULTRASOUND MAP Here you can select which elaborated parameter is

superimposed on the ultrasound image:
ɯ: vorticity
Psi: streamfunction
Diss: local dissipation
Pres: pressure
KE: kinetic energy
STEADY STREAM MAP Here you can select which elaborated parameter is
displayed on steady stream map:
ɯ: vorticity
Psi: streamfunction
Diss: local dissipation
Pres: pressure
KE: kinetic energy
Table 10-2: Parameters
Fields Action
DENSITY Here you can set the default value for density. The
value can be changed through the knob during an
HyperDoppler analysis.
ARROW LENGTH Here you can set the default value for arrow length.
The value can be changed through the knob during
an HyperDoppler analysis.
TRANSPARENCY Here you can set the default value for transparency.
The value can be changed through the knob during
an HyperDoppler analysis.

HYPERDOPPLER
Appendix
Flux and vorticity
The two-dimensional velocity vector field vx(x,y,t), vy(x,y,t) is evaluated from
Doppler velocity field.
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Vorticity (a scalar function) is defined as the curl of velocity ω(x,y,t)= ∂vx/∂y-
∂vy/∂x; it represents the regions of local rotation (in a loose sense the regions
with higher shear stress).
Streamfunction ψ(x,y,t) is the inverse Laplacian of the vorticity, computed by
the solution of      , and can be considered as a smoother version of the
2
vorticity field. The iso-streamfunction curves are the vortex-induced

streamlines, the streamfunction has maximal/minimal values (an elliptic point
of streamlines) at the centre of vortices.
Kinetic energy is defined as Ek(x,y,t)= ½ρ(vx2+ vy2), where ρ is the density
(ρ=1050Kg/m3).
Rate of energy dissipation is
 v  2  v  2  v  2 1  v v  2 
D( x, y, t )  2  x    y    z    x  y  
 x   y   z  2  y x  
, 
where ν is the kinematic viscosity of blood (ν=3.3×10-6m2/s).
Relative pressure field p(x,y,t) is computed similarly after inversion of the

Poisson equation
2
 v   v y   v x v y 
2
 2 p   x      2 y x 
 x   y  ,  
obtained after taking the divergence of the 2D Navier-Stokes equations. The

pressure field such calculated is defined up to a constant and a bilinear
function a1x+a2y+a3xy. The coefficients of this function are again computed
making use of the 2D Navier-Stokes equations that allow calculation of the
coefficient by least square error.
Shaded functions
The positive/negative vortex is defined as the compact region about the
vortex center (identified by the point where the streamfunction takes its
maximum/minimum value) where the value is larger than 50% of the
maximum value. Its area is normalized with respect to the LV area, its
strength is the circulation, i.e. the integral of the vorticity inside the vortex,
normalized with the total vorticity.

HYPERDOPPLER
The total kinetic energy or dissipation or enstrophy (defined as the square of

vorticity) is the value of the quantity integrated over the whole field. Kinetic
energy and dissipation are normalized with the total steady-streaming kinetic
energy, the enstrophy with the steady-streaming enstrophy.
The force vector is computed from integrating the pressure gradient in the
LV region
p p
Fx   x dxdy;
LV
Fy   y dydx;
LV
normalized with the total steady-streaming kinetic energy.
Steady Streaming
These quantities can also be presented as steady-streaming fields. The steady
streaming (heartbeat average) flow field is computed to evaluate the overall
circulatory pattern in the LV during one heartbeat. This picture can be
considered as a sort of fingerprint of the LV flow.
Every quantity, like the vorticity, for example, can be expressed in time-
Fourier series as
( x, y, t )  0 ( x, y)  1 ( x, y) cos 2T t  1 ( x, y)   k ( x, y) cos 2Tk t   k ( x, y)

k  2, N
The flow field corresponding to the fundamental harmonic is the “steady-

streaming” flow, or the heart-beat-average flow.

A
Appendix
Appendix A - ECG Cables
ADVANCED
FEATURES
Refer to the system The ECG cable supplied by Esaote are 3-Lead ECG Cable (Black, yellow and
documentation for ECG red colors) and includes leads which are equipped with a pliers terminal.
capabilities.
The ECG cables are compliant to both IEC (International Electrotechnical
Commission) and AHA (American Heart Association) standards.
A pediatric version of ECG cable is also available.
Each button electrode can be used with the ECG cable. Esaote recommends
using disposable Ag/AgCl electrodes. Read the manufacturer’s instructions
carefully for the correct use of the electrodes.
Checking the ECG Cable

A check of the ECG cable and leads should be made periodically.
ECG Cable Disconnect the cable from the system and check that there are no breaks or
Inspection slits.
NOTE Esaote recommends to replace the ECG cable if there are breaks or slits.
Cleaning and Disinfecting the ECG Cable

Periodically clean the ECG cable and leads so that they remain in optimal
working order.
WARNING Never clean or disinfect the ECG cable when it is still connected to the
system.
Equipment The equipment listed in the following table will be necessary for periodic
maintenance procedures.
CIDEX OPA® is a
Johnson&Johnson Ltd.
Registered brand. Agent Destined for
Solution of mild soap and water Cleaning the ECG cable and leads
CIDEX OPA Disinfection of the ECG cable and leads
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS A-1

ECG CABLES
Agent Destined for
Indicated by the manufacturer Disinfecting the electrodes
Cleaning Procedure 1. Disconnect the cable from the system.

2. Dust the cable connector with a soft cloth.
3. Clean the cable and the leads by rubbing them gently with a
soft cloth dampened with water and a mild detergent.
4. Rub the cable and the leads gently with a soft cloth slightly
dampened with a mild detergent solution.
5. Dry the cable and the leads by rubbing them gently with a
clean soft, dry cloth.
Disinfection The ECG pliers (that are attached to the electrodes) can be disinfected using
Procedure CIDEX OPA, following the manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Disconnect the cable from the system.
2. Clean the cable and the leads.
3. Immerse the ECG pliers in Cidex OPA. When using the dis-
infectant substance, carefully follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
CAUTION Do not immerse the ECG cable. The ECG cable is not waterproof. To
disinfect the ECG pliers (that are attached to the electrodes) immerse only
the pliers and a part of the leads (closest to the pliers) in the disinfection
solution. Do not allow the connector of the ECG cable to become wet.

IMAGE OPTIMIZATION
OPTIMIZATION
IMAGE
INDEX
Table of Contents
1 B-Mode Controls and Optimization ............................................ 1-1

Activation of B-Mode ................................................................................ 1-1
Controls in B-Mode.................................................................................... 1-1
OPTIMIZATION
Basic Controls .......................................................................................... 1-1
IMAGE
Advanced Controls.................................................................................. 1-6
Controls in Freeze ................................................................................. 1-10
EasyMode ............................................................................................... 1-11
Joystick controls..................................................................................... 1-11
Right Joystick .................................................................................... 1-11
Left Joystick ...................................................................................... 1-12
B-Mode Display Optimization ............................................................... 1-12
2 M-Mode Controls and Optimization ........................................... 2-1

Activation of M-Mode ............................................................................... 2-1
Controls in M-Mode................................................................................... 2-1
Basic Controls .......................................................................................... 2-2
Joystick controls....................................................................................... 2-3
Left Joystick ........................................................................................ 2-3
M-Mode Scanning Optimization .......................................................... 2-3
3 Doppler Controls and Optimization ............................................ 3-1

Activation of Doppler Modes................................................................... 3-1
Controls in Doppler ................................................................................... 3-1
Basic Controls .......................................................................................... 3-2
Left Joystick ........................................................................................ 3-4
Doppler Scanning Optimization .............................................................. 3-4
4 Color Doppler Controls and Optimization .................................. 4-1

Activation of Color Doppler Format ...................................................... 4-1
Controls in CFM and Power Doppler..................................................... 4-1
Basic Controls .......................................................................................... 4-2
Controls in Freeze ................................................................................... 4-4
EasyMode ................................................................................................. 4-4
Left Joystick ........................................................................................ 4-4
Color Doppler Scanning Optimization................................................... 4-4

INDEX
Q-Mode - M CFM Mode ...........................................................................4-5

Activation of Q-Mode Format...............................................................4-5

1
Chapter
1 - B-Mode Controls and

Optimization
OPTIMIZATION
IMAGE
B-Mode provides two-dimensional images of body organs taken by
ultrasound scan.
Activation of B-Mode
The system automatically enters in B-Mode each time a new exam is started.
B-Mode format can be re-displayed from any other mode using the B key.
Controls in B-Mode
When in real time the touchscreen provides two menu levels: Basic Controls
to manage exam flow and Advanced Controls for an advanced image
management. Swipe left/right to switch from Basic to Advanced level. It is
suggested to use Advanced Controls only if you are aware of their functions.
The lower line of control is associated to six knobs. These knobs are usually
shared by two controls: the blue one is the active one, whose value can be
changed rotating the knob, while the other control can be made active by
tapping it.
As an alternative to those two levels, EASYMODE provides controls to manage
the image parameters in a simplified way.
When in freeze, dedicated controls are displayed on the touchscreen.
Additional controls are associated to the Joysticks.
On the left of the touchscreen are listed the available presets.
Basic Controls
BIOPSY This key is displayed if the active probe supports a needle guide. Refer to the
specific section in this manual for detailed information on a correct use of the
needle guides in biopsy procedures.

B-MODE CONTROLS AND OPTIMIZATION
CNTI This key is displayed if the CnTI option has been enabled for examinations
with contrast media. Refer to the specific section in this manual for detailed
information.
ESCAN When active, it allows to automatically adjust imaging parameters without the
need to repetitively press AUTO . When ESCAN is enabled AUTO is disabled.
CVX/LIN selects the transducer (linear or convex) to be used when the transrectal probe
is active.
DYN COMPR DYN RANGE and DYN COMPR share the same knob; tap it to toggle between
DYN RANGE the two controls, rotate it to increase/decrease the value of the selected
control (represented in blue).
DYN COMPR controls the Dynamic Compression darkening the
hypoechogenic areas and changing image contrast. The higher the selected
value, the greater the contrast.
DYN RANGE controls the Dynamic Range changing the overall contrast value.
Decreasing Dynamic Range shows more shades of gray onto the same display
scale reducing the overall contrast. Increasing Dynamic Range reduces the
amount of gray displayed increasing the overall contrast.
These commands are mainly subjective and patient-dependent.
FULLSCREEN enlarges the ultrasound image to full screen.
SCAN CORRELATION SCAN CORRELATION and SIZE share the same knob; tap it to toggle between
SIZE the two controls, rotate it to increase/decrease the value of the selected
control (represented in blue).
SCAN CORRELATION combines the classic frame averaging algorithm with
advanced beam forming and motion detection algorithms to reduce the
dragging effect and improve the image fluidity. Rotate the knob to change the
value. For certain values of Scan Correlation, IMOTION is active. Advanced
controls are available through SCAN CORREL SETTINGS key in the Advanced
Controls level of touchscreen. When MVIEW is activated the knob changes the
MView values.
SIZE widens or narrows image field of view. Rotate the knob to narrow/
widen the angle. Reduce it as much as possible to maximize frame rate; the
smaller the angle, the greater the number of images per second, providing a
better view of rapidly moving structures, such as valves.
EASY TRACE When active, after LIN E and PW pressure, automatically sets the best sample
volume positioning for the vessel under examination.

FREQ FUNDAMENT and TEI share the same knob; tap it to toggle between the two
FUNDAMENT controls, rotate it to increase/decrease the frequency (FREQ) value of the
TEI selected control (represented in blue).
Change the frequency of the transmitted ultrasound signal to optimize for the
patient under exam. Rotate the knob until the desired frequency value is
selected (PEN for optimal penetration, RES for optimal resolution, GEN for the
OPTIMIZATION
best balance between resolution and penetration).
IMAGE
Tissue Enhanced Imaging (TEI) improves the clarity of the image by
reducing the acoustic noise. Because of the non-linear response of tissues to
ultrasound energy, TEI may require higher acoustic emissions
compared with conventional imaging; the use of this mode is
recommended especially for patients with difficult acoustic windows.
IMOTION enables/disables the motion compensation.
MICROV activates/deactivates Micro-Vascularization imaging to enhance the

sensitivity to small vessel and slow flow detection. When pressed, it opens
CFM tab with additional controls; refer to CFM chapter further in this
manual.
MICROE emphasizes small hyperechogenic structures in the image.
MVIEW MView combines three or more images acquired with different steering
angles into a single image. MView is available with Linear and Convex Array
probes. MView enhances contrast resolution with a better tissue
differentiation and a clear visualization of organ borders and structure
margins. Tap the key to activate/deactivate MView. Alternative controls are
available through IMOTION in the Advanced Controls level of the
touchscreen.
WARNING MView may generate artifacts on the sector sides, particularly when
scanning cavities. Place the area under exam in the middle of the scanning
area.
NEEDLE ENHANCE This key is displayed when the biopsy has been activated. Refer to the
specific section in this manual for detailed information on a correct use of
the needle guides in biopsy procedures.
ORIENTATION flips the image left/right. Also available in Freeze.

POWER changes the transmitted power. Tap the key to open the following sub-menu:
FACTORY resets the transmitted power at the default value.
HALF sets the transmitted power at 50% of the maximum value.
MAX sets the transmitted power at maximum.
POWER% Rotate this knob clockwise/counterclockwise to increase/
decrease the transmitted power by steps of 10%.
BACK goes back to main menu keeping the modifications.
WARNING Use the minimum power compatible with a diagnostic level of the images.
If there is insufficient sensitivity, make sure the gain, focal point and probe
frequency have been correctly set before increasing the power.
REVERSE flips the image up/down. Also available in Freeze.
TILT tilts the current field of view left/right.
TPVIEW On selected Convex, Linear Array and Phased Array probes, tapping this key
activates the trapezoidal view, providing a larger field of view in the far field.
NOTE TPView is available only if the selected probe manages the trapezoidal
view.
When TPView is selected with the Phased Array probe, the Continuous
Wave Doppler (CW key) cannot be activated. Deselect the TPView mode to
activate the CW analysis.
WARNING The probe’s field of view is enlarged by steering the ultrasound beam. The
steering might cause some artifacts.
TVM When the cardiac application is active, this key enables Tissue Velocity
Mapping to display heart walls motion. This modality is available with specific
probes. Refer to “Color Doppler Controls and Optimization” chapter further
in this section.

XVIEW The XView algorithm reduces the unwanted effect of speckle in the
ultrasound image due to noise and movement artifacts. Rotate the knob to
activate the XView algorithm and change its value from off (--) to C# values
and then to +# for XView+ values.
Advanced customization is available in the Advanced Controls level of
touchscreen.
OPTIMIZATION
Also available in Freeze.
IMAGE
XFLOW Refer to “Color Doppler Controls and Optimization” chapter further in this
section for detailed information on use.

Advanced Controls
B-STEER steers the sector. Available with Linear Array probes only.
AUTOADJUST OFF deactivates the automatic adjustment.
AUTOADJUST opens a sub-menu where you can enable ESCAN or change the optimization
SETTINGS analysis type rotating AUTOGAIN OFFSET.
AVF makes the focus positioning automatic, improving the focus management.
When pressed, all controls related to focus management are disabled.
CLIP SETTINGS When this key is pressed, the system displays the following sub-menu keys:
Available also in Freeze.
CLIP SEC This knob allows to change the clip duration in real time.
When the duration of the clip is set to unlimited, its
acquisition ends when CLIP is pressed.
CLIP CYCLE When ECG is ON, it allows to change the clip trigger
method into seconds instead of cycles.
COLORIZE This knob changes the gamma of color for the gray scale to enhance the
discrimination capabilities for B-Mode and M-Mode images or Doppler
Spectrum.
Rotate the knob to change its value.
Available also in Freeze.
DENSITY This knob optimizes lateral resolution for the best possible image quality.
ENHANCEMENT This knob enhances the edges of boundaries to emphasize tissues interface.
ESPEED Ultrasound devices assume that sound waves travel at a speed of 1540 m/sec
through the tissue. In realty, the speed of sound is affected by the density and
the elasticity of the medium through which it is traveling and these factors are
not constant for human tissues.
This knob, available with selected probes and applications, changes on-the-
fly the speed of sound providing a better focusing when ultrasound

propagation speed of the tissues under examination is different from

1540 m/sec.
Rotate the knob clockwise/counterclockwise to increase/decrease the speed
of sound.
FOCUSES # This knob changes the number of active focuses in transmission, increasing
OPTIMIZATION
resolution for a specific area. Rotate the knob clockwise/counterclockwise
IMAGE
to increase/decrease the number of focal zones. A graphic caret
corresponding to the focal zone position(s) is displayed on the side of the
image. The frame rate decreases if more than one focal point is active.
NOTE Several transmitting focuses can be activated; in this case, the relative
distance between focuses is pre-established.
GRAY MAP # offers different gray scales for the B-Mode image presentation, ranging from
minimum to maximum contrast. Rotate the knob to change gray map. Define
the gray map before changing other parameters.
Also available in Freeze.
Tapping this key the system displays the following controls:
GRAY M This knob selects the desired post-processing curve: the
number corresponds to the active curve.
CENTER This knob moves the center of the curve to the left or to the
right.
REJECT This knob reduces the noise in the image modifying the
rejection factor that is the level below which echoes will not
be amplified.
SATURATION This knob modifies saturation.
SLOPE This knob changes the curve slope.
PEAK This knob increases or decreases the curve peak.
LVO This key activates the Left Ventricular Opacification (LVO) that is an
optional license available in Cardiac application with Phased Array probes.
LVO enhances Ventricle Structures exploiting the presence of Intravenous
Contrast Agents.

PHYSIO When the ECG is available, this key allows to display the ECG trace and/or
the EDR trace.
ECG trace has no diagnostic purposes but it is used to identify certain points,
such as diastole and systole, where to take measurements. In addition, the R
wave of the ECG QRS complex is used as reference for the 2D and/or
2D+CFM trigger clip acquisition of entire cardiac cycles. On the ECG trace
displayed on the screen, the point where the system identifies the R wave is
pointed with a marker. MyLab can be set to acquire in a perspective or
retrospective way. ECG synchronism is necessary for stress-echo clip
acquisition and XStrain processing.
EDR is a special algorithm retrieving information about patient breathing
detected by the ECG electrodes on minor movements during the inspiration/
expiration phases.
NOTE EDR trace requires a specific license.

The EDR trace is not displayed on archived clips.
NOTE MyLab displays on the screen one of the peripheral leads (I, II, III). The
ECG trace is not intended for diagnostic purposes but it is provided as
temporal reference for the physician or as an automatic synchronization to
acquire clips gated on the ECG’s R wave.
After PHYSIO tapping, ECG and EDR related keys are managed in two
different tabs, PHYSIO and PHYSIO EDR, where the following controls are
displayed:
ECG ON/OFF enables/disables the ECG trace visualization on the screen
and the related additional controls.
EDR ON/OFF enables/disables the breathing trace visualization on the
screen and the related additional controls.
GAIN This knob modifies the amplitude of the signal. Available
both for ECG and EDR.
HEIGHT This knob changes the height of the area to display the trace.
Available both for ECG and EDR.
POSITION This knob moves the trace on the screen. Available both for
ECG and EDR.
INVERT ECG flips the ECG trace up/down.
LEAD This knob exchanges the ECG limb lead electrodes.
BACK goes back to the real time menu.

WARNING Do not use the physiological trace displayed on the screen for diagnosis or
monitoring.
NOTE The breathing trace is not available with ElaXto, Stress-echo, CMM,
QIMT, and 3D/4D.
OPTIMIZATION
SCAN CORREL Tap the key to open the menu for dynamic imaging and MView:
IMAGE
SETTINGS
MVIEW enables/disables MView.
NUMBERS Each key selects a different dynamic imaging or MView
value when MVIEW is activated.
TGC-ABSOLUTE switches from absolute to relative TGC management. In absolute mode

(TGC-ABSOLUTE pressed) all potentiometers affect the maximum probe
scanning depth. In relative mode (TGC-ABSOLUTE not pressed) all
potentiometers affect the scanning depth under analysis. Whenever the
scanning depth is changed, the TGC function is redistributed.
XVIEW Tapping this key opens the menu for XView advanced settings.The menu
displays on the right side of the touchscreen the following controls:
 XVIEW+ changes the menu on the center of the touchscreen
showing the XView+ settings.
 XVIEWC changes the menu on the center of the touchscreen
showing the XView settings.
 OFF disables the active XView
 BACK restores the B-Mode controls menu keeping the

modifications.
While on the center of the touch screen are displayed:
Controls for XView+  XVIEW knob changes the XView filter applied.
 +# selects the XView alghorithm to be set.
 DEFAULT knob restores the default values
Controls for XViewC  XVIEW knob changes the XView filter applied.

 C# selects the XView algorithm to be set.

 IED (available only with specific probes in specific
applications) increases the image definition.
 X BAL knob defines how the XView algorithm affects the
image.
 X SMOOTH knob flattens the noise affecting the image.
 X DETAIL knob enhances details of contours, curves, edges
and structures in the image.
 X ENHAN knob enhances the effects of the other settings.
Controls in Freeze
FRAME FRAME and SPEED share the same knob and are only available in Freeze; tap
SPEED it to toggle between the two controls.
Rotate FRAME to scroll the sequence frame by frame.
Rotate SPEED to increase/decrease the velocity for reviewing the sequence.
FIRST FRAME automatically sets the current position at the begin of the sequence. Only
available in Freeze.
LAST FRAME automatically sets the current position at the end of the sequence. Only
available in Freeze.
PLAY PLAY and STOP share the same button and are only available in Freeze.
STOP
PLAY shows the sequence of stored images in cine mode while STOP stops the
cine presentation of the clip.

EasyMode
EasyMode provides an easy way to optimize image parameters by quickly
operating with three simple sliders.
Tapping EASYMODE opens a menu with three sliders, each of them changes
different image settings that act in opposite manner on the image:
OPTIMIZATION
 Resolution Vs Penetration. Changing the level increases/
IMAGE
decreases the resolution affecting the penetration. It manages
many parameters automatically, mainly the frequencies and
the enhancement.
 Contrast Vs Soft. Changing the level increases/decreases the
contrast of the image. It manages many parameters
automatically, mainly the image dynamics.
 Smooth Vs Sharp. Changing the level increases/reduces the
level of homogeneity of the image. It manages many
parameters automatically, mainly the XView algorithm.
Slide directly the cursor on the touchscreen or rotate the corresponding knob
to change value.
In EasyMode environment tap TEI to enable/disable TEI mode. Sliders can
be set independently when in Fundamental and TEI.
Joystick controls
Each Joystick provides multiple controls to optimize image.
Right Joystick
FO CUS
Moving RIGHT JO YSTICK up and down moves the focal zone(s) increasing the
resolution and sensitivity of a specific area of the 2D.
Focus position can be also moved by trackball.
DEPTH
Rotate RIGHT JO YSTICK clockwise to increase the scanning depth and visualize
deeper structures. Rotate it counterclockwise to decrease the scanning depth
and not display useless part of the image at the bottom.
FRAM E
When in freeze, rotating RIGHT JO YSTICK scrolls the sequence frame by frame
as FRAME.

Left Joystick
ZO O M
Rotate clockwise LEFT JO YSTICK to enlarge the B-Mode Area. For the first two
steps the enlarged image is entirely displayed on the screen, than, due to the
zoom factor, the image is crop; now the image is contoured by a frame and
you can use the trackball to pan the image inside the displaying area. Rotate
counterclockwise LEFT JO YSTICK to decrease zoom factor.
Press LEFT JO YSTICK to activate High Definition Zoom (HD Zoom) that
offers a superior definition of the image to be enlarged.
HD Zoom 1. Position the HD Zoom ROI.
2. To change the size of the ROI, press ACTIO N . Change the size
using the trackball.
3. Rotate clockwise LEFT JO YSTICK to enlarge the area inside the
ROI.
When the zoom is activated, a zoom navigation window can be displayed on
the screen.
The yellow box in the zoom navigation window represents where the part of
the displayed zoomed image is positioned inside the whole image and its
dimension.
Zoom navigation window can be enabled checking SHOW ZOOM REFERENCE
WINDOW in the Application Preset tab within the General Setup of M EN U .
B-Mode Display Optimization

First of all, the gain and TCG must be properly adjusted to clearly display the
structures being examined; fine optimizations can then be performed
interacting with the display commands or with the acoustic parameters of the
probe.
B GAIN
Rotate the knob around the B key clockwise/counterclockwise to increase/
decrease the gain within the entire sector.
TCG SLIDERS
Each TGC slider adjusts the gain in specific areas: move the cursors to the
right to increase and to the left to decrease the gain.

AUTO
Pressing it automatically adjusts both the overall gain and TGC distribution
improving the contrast resolution of the image. The activation is indicated on
the screen by the corresponding icon and it is labeled as “AG”.
AUTOADJUST OFF deactivates the automatic adjustment while AUTOADJUST
SETTINGS allows to change the optimization analysis type.
OPTIMIZATION
IMAGE
NOTE Acoustic parameters and gain interact with each other; it may be necessary
to review the adjustment of gain when an acoustic parameter changes.


2
Chapter
2 - M-Mode Controls and

Optimization
OPTIMIZATION
IMAGE
M-Mode provides information concerning tissue motion occurring over time
along a single vector.
Activation of M-Mode
1. Starting from B-Mode, press LIN E UPDATE to view the M-
Mode cursor.
2. Place the cursor with the trackball on the corresponding B-
Mode line.
3. Press M to activate M-Mode analysis.
4. Press B to return to B-Mode.
During the exam pressing LIN E UPDATE freezes the trace acquisition and the
reference B-Mode image is temporarily re-activated.
Controls in M-Mode
After M-Mode activation, beside the B-MODE tab on the Navigation Bar of
the touchscreen, the M-MODE tab containing additional controls dedicated to
M-Mode is displayed.
shared by two controls: the blue one is the active one whose value can be
changed rotating the knob while the other control can be made active by
tapping it.

M-MODE CONTROLS AND OPTIMIZATION
On the left of the touchscreen the available presets are listed.

Refer to previous chapter to get more information on the controls not
described here.
Basic Controls
B-REF enables/disables the reference B-Mode.
CMM Compass M-Mode (CMM) generates a special M-Mode display allowing the
free positioning of the cursor line. This modality is available for every
application with every probe.
Press CMM to activate Compass M-Mode. Once pressed, the trackball allows
to move the scanning line within the sector and additional controls are displayed:
FREE When pressed, it allows to independently move each line on
the screen. When this button is not pressed, the lines are
locked together in their middle position, indicated by the
circle. In this case the trackball acts on all locked lines.
ANGLE allows to freely orient the active scanning line within the
sector. The corresponding trace is displayed in real time.
LINES changes the number of active scanning lines: the
corresponding traces are displayed in real time on the screen.
MyLab allows to display up to three different lines and traces.
The scanning lines are displayed with different colors and
the ACTIO N key switches among the lines.
PLEX activates and updates the reference B-Mode, while keeping the trace in real
time.
Advanced Controls
FORMAT opens a sub-menu allowing to change the real time display format:
B-REF SMALL splits the screen horizontally, with a small B-Mode reference
image on the upper part.
B-REF MEDIUM splits the screen horizontally, with a medium sized B-Mode
reference image on the upper part.
B-REF LARGE splits the screen horizontally, with a large B-Mode reference
image on the upper part.

DUAL splits the screen vertically, with the B-Mode reference image
on the left and the M-Mode trace on the right.
OPTIMIZATION
SWEEP changes the speed at which the timeline is swept. Rotate the knob to increase/
decrease the value.
IMAGE
Joystick controls
Left Joystick
D-STEER
When the probe allows the cursor orientation, it orients the line.
M-Mode Scanning Optimization

To obtain a good M-Mode trace, it is important to optimize the B-Mode
reference image from which the trace will then be sampled. Normally, further
interactions are not necessary.


3
Chapter
3 - Doppler Controls and

Optimization
OPTIMIZATION
IMAGE
PW (Pulsed Wave) and CW (Continuous Wave) Doppler provide
information concerning the velocity of moving tissues and flows.
In CW Doppler information is sampled along a line through the body, and all
velocities detected at each time point are presented (on a time line).
In PW Doppler information is sampled from only a small region, called
sample volume, defined in 2D image and presented on a timeline.
Activation of Doppler Modes

1. Starting from B-Mode, press LIN E UPDATE to display the
Doppler/M-Mode cursor.
2. Position the line (CW) or the Sample Volume (PW) on the
applicable area.
3. Press PW to activate the Doppler PW or CW for the CW.
4. Press B to return to the full screen B-Mode.
During the exam, pressing LIN E UPDATE freezes the trace acquisition and the
reference B-Mode image is temporarily re-activated.
Controls in Doppler
After PW or CW activation, beside the B-MODE tab on the touchscreen the
DOPPLER tab containing additional controls dedicated to Doppler is
displayed.

DOPPLER CONTROLS AND OPTIMIZATION
tapping it.
Refer to previous chapter to get more information on the controls not
described here.
Basic Controls
ADM activates Automatic Doppler Measurements: refer to “Measurements”

section in this manual for further details on this feature.
ANGLE FINE ADJ and ANGLE share the same knob; tap it to toggle between the two
FINE ADJ controls, rotate it to increase/decrease the value of the selected control
(represented in blue).
ANGLE aligns the angle vector with the flow direction; it changes the angle
with step of 60°.
FINE ADJ provides a fine adjustment: it changes the angle with step of 1°.
AUDIO AUDIO and AUDIO MUTE share the same knob. Rotate it to increase/decrease
AUDIO MUTE the volume. Tap AUDIO MUTE to sets the volume to zero.
BASELINE Rotate this knob to move the baseline up or down to overcome aliasing
problems.
EASY TRACE When active, after LIN E and PW pressure, automatically sets the best sample
volume positioning for the vessel under examination.
FREQUENCY changes the Doppler frequency: lower frequency increases penetration and,
based on Doppler formula, increases the maximum measurable speed.
HPRF activates the Doppler HPRF (High Pulse Repetition Frequency), allowing to
increase the available maximum PRF value to measure higher velocities by
using more sample volumes.
When the HPRF control is activated, by increasing the PRF (SCALE control)
the user displays more sample volumes on the screen. These volumes have to
be positioned so that the resulting Doppler trace is not corrupted.

NOTE Position the sample volumes so that only one of them finds itself in
correspondence of the flow under exam and the other ones on the fixed
structures so that the Doppler signal is not ambiguous.
REVERSE TRACE reverses the velocity scale without affecting the baseline to display receding
flows above the baseline. It vertically inverts the spectral trace without
OPTIMIZATION
affecting the baseline position. The plus and minus signs on the velocity scale
reverse when the spectrum is inverted. Positive velocities display below the
IMAGE
baseline.
SCALE changes the velocity scale and consequently PRF.
SMART DOPPLER Active only with Linear Array probe, when pressed it acts:
 by inverting the Doppler steering with reference to the
vertical line,
 by inverting the Doppler scale,
 by inverting the color scale when triplex is enabled,
 by keeping constant the inclination of the angle correction
factor.
SV SIZE Available in PW Doppler, changes the sizes of the sample volume.
TV activates Tissue Velocity mode for heart walls motion display. Tissue Velocity
mode is available with specific probes.
Advanced Controls
ADM SETTINGS provides a setting menu for Automatic Doppler Measurements: refer to
“Measurements” section in this manual for further details.
FREQUENCY SHIFT changes the trace unit measure in kHz.
NOTE All factory calculation packages are based on velocity measured in cm/s.
When velocity is measured in kHz, no derived parameter is automatically
calculated. Custom measurements and formulas have to be added to
calculate the derived parameters from velocity in kHz.
FFT RESOLUTION affects the trace reconstruction: the higher the value, the more precise and
accurate the reconstruction.

WARNING The Doppler analysis of some pathologies could require low FFT
RESOLUTION values. Set the FFT RESOLUTION on the highest value
compatible with the diagnostic level of the image.
FILTER increases/decreases the wall filter values thus reducing/increasing the noise
level. Use low filter to display low flow velocity.
SWEEP changes the scanning speed: the time scale of the trace changes accordingly.
Joystick controls
Left Joystick
D-STEER
When the probe allows the cursor orientation, it orients the Doppler line.
WARNING When the steering is set to the maximum step, some artifacts might occur
showing color dots. In this case, reduce the steering by one step.
SCALE
As the same touchscreen key, it changes the velocity scale and consequently
PRF.
Doppler Scanning Optimization

The gain must first be optimized using the relative knob until a clear envelope
of the spectral analysis is obtained; the wall filters must be set in order to
eliminate wrong low-speed signals caused by moving structures. Interaction
with other commands or the acoustic parameters further improves the
spectrum quality.
DOPPLER GAIN knob, placed around the PW key, affects the Doppler video
component.
AUTO automatically optimizes the Doppler by adjusting general gain, baseline
and velocity range.
When in freeze, the scrolling memories for B-Mode image and PW or CW
trace can be moved independently to select the best image to be saved. Rotate
the trackball horizontally to scroll through the images one by one. Press the
ACTION key to switch between the B-Mode and PW or CW memories.

4
Chapter
4 - Color Doppler Controls

and Optimization
OPTIMIZATION
IMAGE
Color Flow Mapping (CFM) and Power Doppler (PD) are Doppler Modes
providing information concerning the relative velocity and direction of fluid
motion presented as a color-coded overlay on top of a B-mode image.
Activation of Color Doppler Format

1. Starting from B-Mode, press C or PD/TVM .
2. Position the ROI on the applicable area.
3. To change the area of the color box, activate the ROI by
pressing the ACTIO N key. Change the size of the area using the
trackball. Press ACTIO N again to confirm.
NOTE The width of the CFM ROI and the B-Mode angle (SIZE button in B-MODE
menu) must be as small as possible in order to maximize the CFM frame
rate.
4. Press C or PD/TVM to disable Color Doppler and return to full

screen B-Mode.
Once the Color Doppler is active, the line cursor can be displayed and you
can move to Doppler/M-Mode.
Controls in CFM and Power Doppler

After CFM or PD activation, beside the B-MODE tab on the touchscreen the
CFM tab containing additional controls dedicated to CFM is displayed.

COLOR DOPPLER CONTROLS AND OPTIMIZATION
tapping it.
As an alternative to those two levels, EASYMODE provides controls to manage
the image parameters in a simplified way.
For the controls not described here refer to previous chapters.
Basic Controls
DUAL CFM activates multiple views with B-Mode real time on the left side of the screen
and CFM real time image on the right.
FREQUENCY changes the CFM frequency: higher frequencies help to show low speeds.
REVERSE reverses the color/flow direction inverting the color map.
NOTE Reverse inverts the color map, NOT the color scale.
SCALE changes the velocity scale; it affects color “filling”.
SMART CFM When pressed it acts:

 by inverting the CFM steering with reference to the vertical
line,
 by inverting the CFM scale,
 by inverting the color scale when triplex is enabled,
 by keeping constant the inclination of the angle correction
factor.
XFLOW activates/deactivates a set of more sensible and less saturated color maps.
IMOTION enables or disables the motion compensation.

Advanced Controls
COLOR MAP opens a sub-menu allowing the selection of a different Color Map:
COLOR MAP selects the threshold above which the velocity is displayed.
This command is available only with specific color maps.
OPTIMIZATION
VEL VIS THRES selects the threshold above which the velocity is displayed.
IMAGE
WR PRIOR (Write Priority) assigns priority to the color codification and
B/W scale.
COLOR PRIORITY enables or disables transparency between color and B/W.
DENSITY changes the line density that is the number of image lines in the ultrasound
image. It affects color “filling”.
FILTER reduces the artifacts caused by acoustic decoupling or moving structures

filtering low flow velocity signals.
HD-CFM # HD-CFM # and SENSITIVITY share the same knob; tap it to toggle between the
SENSITIVITY two controls, rotate it to increase/decrease the value of the selected control
(represented in blue).
HD-CFM # adjusts the color spatial resolution.
SENSIT adjusts color sensitivity. Available with specific applications.
PERSISTENCE changes the persistence level. Higher level increase the image perception and
decrease the discrimination of moving structures.
SMOOTH makes the flow representation homogeneous.
TVM When the cardiac application is active, this key enables Tissue Velocity
Mapping to display heart walls motion. This modality is available with specific
probes.
TPVIEW switches from rectangular to trapezoidal color box.

Controls in Freeze
HIDE CFM enables or disables the Color presentation displaying only B-Mode reference
image.
EasyMode
EasyMode provides an easy way to optimize image settings by quickly
operating with three simple sliders.
Tapping EASYMODE opens a menu with three sliders, each of them manages
automatically many image parameters:
 Superficial Vs Deep. Move the slider to optimize
visualization for superficial or deep vessels.
 Fast Vs Slow. Move the slider to optimize visualization for
fast or slow flows.
 Large Vs Small. Move the slider to optimize visualization for
large or small vessels.
Slide directly the cursor on the touchscreen or rotate the corresponding knob
to change value.
Joystick controls
Left Joystick
C-STEER
When the probe allows the cursor orientation, it changes the steering of the
color box.
WARNING When the steering is set to the maximum step, some artifacts might occur
showing color dots. In this case, reduce the steering by one step.
Color Doppler Scanning Optimization

To obtain a good CFM signal, the B-Mode reference image must first be
optimized and B-Mode gain properly adjusted. ROI position and dimension
have to be correctly set.
NOTE Excessive B-Mode gain may “mask” the flow.

NOTE Only one transmitting focal point is active in CFM, regardless of the B-
Mode settings, and it is automatically positioned at the center of the ROI
CFM.
Adjust the color gain rotating CFM GAIN (the knob around C key) to obtain the
most useful signal level.
OPTIMIZATION
Optimize then other parameters so that an appropriate color flow image is
IMAGE
achieved.
AUTO
Depending on the selection in AUTO BUTTON SETUP option (in M EN U -
G E N E R A L S E T U P - A P P L I C A T I O N P R E S E T folder), at AUTO pressure you
can obtain the following actions:
 when AUTOADJUST has been selected, it automatically adjusts
the color to the system default value,
 when EDOPPLER has been selected, it exploits the Color
Doppler Signal to estimate the vessel position and
orientation to automatically set:
• Color Doppler best centering;
• Sample gate vertical position;
• Color Doppler beamline steering angle;
• Doppler correction angle.
 when BOTH has been selected, it adjusts both the above

parameters.
Q-Mode - M CFM Mode

Activation of Q-Mode Format
1. If needed, in CFM or in Power Doppler press LIN E UPDATE to
view the M-Mode cursor.
2. Place the cursor with the trackball on the desired position.
3. Press M to activate Q-Mode analysis.
4. Press B to return to B-Mode.
During the exam pressing LIN E UPDATE freezes the trace acquisition and the
reference 2D image is temporarily re-activated.

NOTE When more modes are active, the navigation tab M-MODE allows you to
access the M-Mode controls menu.

MEASUREMENTS
MEASUREMENTS
INDEX
Table of Contents
1 Measurements .............................................................................. 1-1

Introduction................................................................................................. 1-1
How to Take Measurements..................................................................... 1-2
MEASUREMENTS
Additional Controls during measurements.......................................... 1-3
How to Take the Measurements .............................................................. 1-3
Distance .................................................................................................... 1-3
Vertex ........................................................................................................ 1-4
Trace .......................................................................................................... 1-4
Ellipse........................................................................................................ 1-4
Time........................................................................................................... 1-4
Velocity ..................................................................................................... 1-5
Caliper ....................................................................................................... 1-5
Profile ........................................................................................................ 1-5
Manual Measurement ........................................................................ 1-6
By Cycle Measurement...................................................................... 1-6
Automatic Measurement................................................................... 1-7
ADM - Automatic Doppler Measurements............................................ 1-7
Activation of Automatic Doppler......................................................... 1-7
Controls in Automatic Doppler Measurements............................ 1-8
Freeze and Archive.................................................................................. 1-9
Measurement taken on two modes .......................................................... 1-9
Multi-Modality Measurements.................................................................. 1-9
Measurement on Clip of Trace............................................................... 1-10
Generic Measurements ............................................................................ 1-10
Advanced Measurements......................................................................... 1-13
Application Data.................................................................................... 1-14
Advanced Measurements Organization ............................................. 1-14
Diagnosis Based on Measurements ....................................................... 1-14
2 Measurement Configuration ........................................................ 2-1

Accessing to the Configuration Menu..................................................... 2-1
Configuration for a specific Application................................................. 2-2
Application Measurements Folder........................................................ 2-3
Generic Measurements Folder .............................................................. 2-4
Measure Units Folder.............................................................................. 2-5
Advanced Folder ..................................................................................... 2-5
Configuration for Measurement Folder .................................................. 2-6
How to Create a Measurement Folder .................................................... 2-7
How to create a new group....................................................................... 2-8
Procedure to add a measurement.......................................................... 2-9

INDEX
Procedure to add a formula..................................................................2-10
3 Accuracy........................................................................................3-1
Measurement Accuracy ..............................................................................3-1
Derived Data................................................................................................3-2
4 MyLab Worksheet and Report......................................................4-1

MyLab Worksheet.......................................................................................4-1
MyLab Report..............................................................................................4-2
End of the Report....................................................................................4-3
Configurations .............................................................................................4-3
Report Configuration ..............................................................................4-3
Observations Configuration...................................................................4-6
5 Abdominal Measurements............................................................5-1
Abdominal Advanced Measurements in B-Mode ..................................5-1
Bladder.......................................................................................................5-1
Renal...........................................................................................................5-2
Organ .........................................................................................................5-3
Abdominal Advanced Measurements in Doppler..................................5-5
6 Breast Measurements....................................................................6-1
Breast Advanced Measurements in B-Mode...........................................6-1
Breast Mass ...............................................................................................6-1
Breast Worksheet Organization ................................................................6-1
Structure Evaluation ................................................................................6-1
Breast Measurement Set Up ......................................................................6-4
Advanced Folder......................................................................................6-4
7 Adult Cephalic Measurements......................................................7-1

Adult Cephalic Advanced Measurements in B-Mode ...........................7-1
Adult Cephalic Advanced Measurements in Doppler ...........................7-2
Adult Cephalic Worksheet Organization.................................................7-3
Flow Directions........................................................................................7-3
8 Cardiac and Pediatric Cardiac Measurements .............................8-1

Special behavior of Cardiac advanced Measurements ...........................8-1
Application Data .........................................................................................8-3
Body Surface Area (BSA)........................................................................8-3
Cardiac Advanced Measurements in B-Mode.........................................8-4
Cardiac Advanced Measurements in M-Mode........................................8-8
Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler ........................................8-9
Automatic Ejection Fraction ...................................................................8-14
How to perform an Auto EF calculation...........................................8-15

INDEX
Auto EF calculation on frozen clips ............................................. 8-15

Auto EF calculation on archived clips.......................................... 8-15
After Calculation.................................................................................... 8-16
9 Gynecologic Measurements ......................................................... 9-1

Application Data......................................................................................... 9-1
MEASUREMENTS
Gynecologic Advanced Measurements in B-Mode ............................... 9-2
Gynecologic Advanced Measurements in Doppler............................... 9-2
Gynecology Worksheet Organization ..................................................... 9-3
Structure Evaluation ............................................................................... 9-3
10 Obstetric Measurements ............................................................10-1

Application Data....................................................................................... 10-1
“Gestational Age By” Area .................................................................. 10-2
Formulas for Expected Delivery Date (EDD) ................................. 10-2
Fetal Age and Fetal Growth tables bibliography.............................. 10-3
Estimated Fetal Weight and Growth.................................................. 10-5
Touchscreen Layout in Fetal Age and Fetal Growth ................. 10-5
Obstetric Advanced Measurements in B-Mode................................... 10-6
Fetal Biometry / First Trim Measures.......................................... 10-6
Mother Measurements................................................................... 10-11
Obstetric Advanced Measurements in M-Mode................................ 10-11
Fetal Biometry / First Trim.......................................................... 10-11
Obstetric Advanced Measurements in Doppler ................................ 10-11
Fetal Biometry / First Trim.......................................................... 10-11
Mother Measures............................................................................ 10-12
Obstetric Worksheet Organization...................................................... 10-12
Measure Folder .................................................................................... 10-12
Graphics Folder ................................................................................... 10-13
Fetal Trend...................................................................................... 10-13
Biophysical Profile Folder.................................................................. 10-14
Survey Folder ....................................................................................... 10-15
Obstetric Measurement Set Up ............................................................ 10-16
Application Measurements Folder.................................................... 10-16
Adding and Editing OB custom tables....................................... 10-17
Advanced Folder ................................................................................. 10-19
Measurement Area ......................................................................... 10-21
11 Thyroid Measurements ..............................................................11-1

Thyroid Advanced Measurements in B-Mode ..................................... 11-1
Thyroid Worksheet Organization .......................................................... 11-2
Structure Evaluation ............................................................................. 11-2
Thyroid Measurement Set Up................................................................. 11-3
Advanced Folder ................................................................................... 11-3

INDEX
12 Urologic Measurements............................................................. 12-1

Application Data .......................................................................................12-1
Urologic Advanced Measurements in B-Mode ....................................12-2
Urologic Advanced Measurements in Doppler ....................................12-3
Urologic Worksheet Organization..........................................................12-3
Structure Evaluation ..............................................................................12-4
Urologic Measurement Set Up................................................................12-7
Advanced Folder....................................................................................12-7
13 Vascular Measurements.............................................................. 13-1

Application Data .......................................................................................13-1
Vascular Advanced Measurements in B-Mode.....................................13-2
Vascular Advanced Measurements in Doppler ....................................13-3
Vascular Worksheet Organization....................................................... 13-14
Velocities Ratio and Vessels Evaluation.......................................... 13-14
Vascular Measurement Set Up ............................................................. 13-15
Advanced Folder .................................................................................... 13-15
A Formula and References in B-Mode............................................ A-1

Volume in abdominal and breast..........................................................A-1
Formula ...............................................................................................A-1
Volume in thyroid ...................................................................................A-1
Formula ...............................................................................................A-1
Diameter Reduction ..............................................................................A-1
Length by Vertex ...................................................................................A-2
Area by Ellipse Axes ..............................................................................A-2
Area Reduction .......................................................................................A-2
Volume by Ellipse ..................................................................................A-3
Volume by Trace and by Area-Length ...............................................A-3
Bi-Plane Volume ....................................................................................A-3
Uterus, Fibroma, Ovary and Mass Volumes .....................................A-4
Bladder Volume .....................................................................................A-4
Whole Gland and Transitional Zone Prostate Volume ...................A-5
Kidney and Testicle Volume - Biplane Method ................................A-5
Predicted PSA Level ..............................................................................A-6
Predicted PSA Density ..........................................................................A-7
Stenosis Diameter ..................................................................................A-7
Stenosis Area ..........................................................................................A-8
Cardiology....................................................................................................A-8
Left Ventricle Simpson Volume - Biplane .........................................A-8
Left Ventricle/Left Atrium/Right Atrium Simpson Volume - Single
Plane .........................................................................................................A-9
Left Ventricle/Right Atrium Volume - Area Length .......................A-9
Left Ventricle Diastolic/Systolic and Left Atrium Systolic Volume In-

INDEX
dex .......................................................................................................... A-10

Ejection Fraction (Simpson and Area-Length) ............................... A-10
Stroke Volume ..................................................................................... A-11
Stroke Index ......................................................................................... A-11
Cardiac Output .................................................................................... A-11
Cardiac Index ....................................................................................... A-12
MEASUREMENTS
Left Ventricle/Right Ventricle Area Fractional Shortening ......... A-12
Diameter Fractional Shortening ........................................................ A-12
Ejection Fraction (Left Ventricle) ..................................................... A-13
Left Ventricle Mass ............................................................................. A-13
Outflow Tract Area ............................................................................. A-14
Aortic Area ........................................................................................... A-14
Left Atrium/Aorta Ratio .................................................................... A-14
Right Ventricle Volume ...................................................................... A-15
Pulmonary Artery/RVOT Area ........................................................ A-15
Left Atrium Volume ........................................................................... A-15
Indexed IVC Size ................................................................................ A-16
IVC Collapsibility Index ..................................................................... A-16
Relative Wall Thickness ...................................................................... A-17
B Formula and References in M-Mode .......................................... B-1

Left Ventricle Ejection Fraction ..........................................................B-1
Left Ventricle Volume ...........................................................................B-1
Stroke Volume ........................................................................................B-2
Stroke Index ............................................................................................B-2
Cardiac Output .......................................................................................B-3
Cardiac Index ..........................................................................................B-3
Left Ventricle Fractional Shortening ...................................................B-3
Septum Thickening ................................................................................B-4
Posterior Wall Thickening ....................................................................B-4
Left Ventricle Mass ................................................................................B-5
Left Ventricle Mass Index .....................................................................B-5
LA/Aorta Diameters Ratio ...................................................................B-6
Excentricity Index ..................................................................................B-6
C Formula and References in Doppler ........................................... C-1

Gradient ...................................................................................................C-1
Peak Gradient .........................................................................................C-1
Flow Velocity Integral ............................................................................C-2
Mean Velocity .........................................................................................C-2
Mean Gradient ........................................................................................C-2
Pulsatility Index ......................................................................................C-3
Resistive Index ........................................................................................C-4
Flow by Trace and by Ellipse ...............................................................C-5
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS vii

INDEX
Flow by Diameter ................................................................................... C-5

Pressure Half-Time ................................................................................ C-5
Cardiology.................................................................................................... C-6
Mitral Valve Area ................................................................................... C-6
E Wave/A Wave .................................................................................... C-6
Miocardiac Performance Index ............................................................ C-7
dP/dt Ratio ............................................................................................. C-7
Regurgitation Flow (PISA) ................................................................... C-8
Effective Regurgitation Orefice (PISA) ............................................. C-8
Mitral Regurgitation Volume (PISA) .................................................. C-9
Aortic Regurgitation Volume (PISA) .................................................. C-9
E’ Wave/A’ Wave ................................................................................C-10
E Wave/E’ Wave .................................................................................C-10
Intraventricular Mechanical Delay ....................................................C-10
Effective Aortic Valve Area ...............................................................C-11
Maximal Aortic Valve Area ................................................................C-11
Systolic Pressure ...................................................................................C-12
Systolic Velocity/Diastolic Velocity ..................................................C-12
Heart Rate .............................................................................................C-13
Stroke Volume ......................................................................................C-13
Stroke Index ..........................................................................................C-13
Cardiac Output ......................................................................................C-14
Cardiac Index ........................................................................................C-14
Qp/Qs ...................................................................................................C-15
Coronary Reserve..................................................................................C-15
Pulmonary Capillary Wedge Pressure ................................................C-16
Formulas of Automatic Doppler Measurements .............................C-16
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS viii

1
Chapter
1 - Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
Introduction
Measurements can be taken in all modes and applications both in real time on
frozen images and in archive review.
MyLab provides two types of measurements:
 Generic Measurements, set of measurement related to the
operating mode. Press +… + to activate them;
 Advanced Measurements, set of measurement related to the
active application. Press M EASURE to activate them.
Once activated, the available measurements are displayed on the touchscreen
and listed on the left of the screen. Messages displayed on the screen, guide
you through the different phases, and assist in taking the measurement. The
results are displayed in a box on the screen.
A measurement can include several pieces of measurement data, for example
to calculate a volume you need to measure width, length and height.
You can customize both the Generic Measurement package and the
Advanced Measurement package to adapt them to your work-flow: refer to
the chapter “Measurement Configurations” further on in this section for
detailed information.
WARNING This symbol is displayed on the screen when the image features, compared
to the original one, may not be optimal for the reporting functions.
Ensure that you follow current medical practices when selecting views and
positioning cursors on the image during measurements.
NOTE Always enlarge the format to maximize the structure/signal to be

measured.
If possible, use the full screen formats for M-Mode and Doppler
measurements.

MEASUREMENTS
How to Take Measurements

Procedure 1. Press +… + or M EASURE to activate measurements, the
touchscreen displays the list of available measurements,
which are automatically identified according to the active
mode, application and preset.
2. Tap the desired measurement to begin it or select it from the
list on the left of the screen.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen, position the cursors
with the trackball and confirm the position by pressing
EN TER .
The value being measured is displayed in a box that can be dragged anywhere
within the image.
The measurements taken are marked with the  symbol.
UN DO closes the session, erasing all done measurements.
The table below describes the labels and abbreviation used for measurements while
taking them and on Worksheet and Report. This explanation can be used as
reference for the description in the following of this manual.
Table 1-1: Measurement table description
Measurement Measurement Input Measurement

Input Type Displayed results
Description (Abbreviation) (Label)
This column This column This column lists each For each single This column lists all the
contains a contains the single measurements measurement in performed measurements
description of measurement you have to perform to the column to and calculations.
the measurement name as it appears get the final results and the left, here is Calculation results are
to be taken on the (in brackets the label described the automatically computed by
touchscreen and used to identify it in the type of the system once all the
(in brackets its result box, if different) procedure to Input Measurements have
abbreviation used follow in order to been completed.
in the result box as take the related Calculation values are
title) measurement indicated with bold text
and the formula used for
calculation is described at
the end of the related table

MEASUREMENTS
Additional Controls during measurements

The touchscreen menu depends on the active measurement:
ADD TO REPORT At the end of measure, it adds the Generic Measurement to the exam
worksheet and report. After this key is pressed, the system asks to rename the
MEASUREMENTS
measurement. The renamed measurement will be then available both in the
worksheet (under a dedicated sub-folder) and in the report.
BACK In case of profile measurements, it clears the dotted trace point by point.
CLEAR cancels all measurements from the screen.
LEFT/RIGHT When bilateral measurements are available, it toggles between them.
PAN moves the traced area within the sector.
ROTATE rotates areas.
SKIP skips to next action.
SWAP/SWAP AXIS respectively swaps the caliper or the axis linked to the trackball. Alternatively,
the ACTIO N key can be used to swap start/end calipers when measuring
distances or the axis when drawing an ellipse.
How to Take the Measurements

Here below you can find the description of the procedure to take the
measurement based on Input Type.
As you are taking any measurements, each measurement is given a sequential
number. MyLab can display nine measurements on the screen at one time.
Distance
These measurements require to trace a line on a B-Mode image.
Procedure 1. Using the trackball, place the caliper on the initial point and
press EN TER to confirm.
2. Place now the caliper on the final point and press EN TER to
confirm.

MEASUREMENTS
Vertex
This measurement requires to place vertices on a B-Mode image: the result of
the measurement is obtained connecting all vertices.
Procedure 1. Using the trackball, place the caliper on the first vertex and
2. Place the cursor on the second vertex and press EN TER to
confirm.
3. Place all required vertices. The result is automatically calcu-
lated by pressing EN TER twice on the last vertex.
Trace
This measurement requires to trace a contour on a B-Mode image:
2. Draw the contour with the trackball. Moving back, the traced
contour is deleted.
3. Press EN TER to place the end point and confirm.
Ellipse
These measurements require to trace an ellipse by placing the first axis and
then the second axis on a B-Mode image:
Procedure 1. Using the trackball, place the caliper on the first point and
2. Move the trackball to draw the axis: the system displays the
ellipse that can be adjusted with the trackball.
3. Place the end point of the axis by pressing EN TER .
4. Move the trackball to change the dimension of the ellipse and
Time
These measurements require to trace a line on an M-Mode or a Doppler trace.
confirm.

MEASUREMENTS
Velocity
These measurements require to trace a line on an M-Mode trace.
MEASUREMENTS
confirm.
Caliper
This measurement requires to place a point on a Doppler trace.
Procedure 1. Using the trackball, place the caliper on the velocity to be
measured and press EN TER to confirm.
Profile
Profile can be drawn on a Doppler trace in three different ways: manual, by
cycle and auto (ADM).
When a profile measurement has to be performed, the system displays the
controls to select which modality use to draw the profile: METHOD MANUAL/
BY CYCLE that allows you to select between the two modalities and ADM for
activation of Automatic Doppler Measurements.
At the end of the measurement, regardless of the modality chosen, beside the
measured VTI, the following additional parameters will be calculated by the
system. The number of these parameters changes depending on the type of
measurement, the application and customizations.
Table 1-2: Parameters calculated in Generic Doppler Measurements
Displayed
Description
Results
VTI Velocity Time Integral
PSV Peak Systolic Velocity
EDV End Diastolic Velocity
V Rev Reverse velocity
TAV Time Average Velocity
RI Resistive index
PI Pulsatility index
S/D Systolic Velocity/

Diastolic Velocity

MEASUREMENTS
Displayed
Description
Results
D/S Diastolic Velocity/

Systolic Velocity
HR Heart Rate (for OB

measurements)
Acc Acceleration
Acc T Acceleration Time
Max PG Maximum Peak Gradient
Mn PG Mean Peak Gradient
Any adjustment performed on the velocity scale orientation, on the display

format and on the angle correction will automatically re-calculate the
parameters.
In non-cardiac applications, the system automatically calculates and displays
the following parameters when arterial flows are analyzed:
In venous modality, only the mean and reverse velocities are calculated.
NOTE Press T R A C E to change the modality to detect the Doppler spectrum (for
example positive or negative flow).
Manual Measurement
The MANUAL measurement requires to trace the envelope of the velocity
profile on a Doppler trace:
2. Draw the profile envelope with the trackball. Moving back,
the traced contour is deleted.
3. Press EN TER to place the end point and confirm.
By Cycle Measurement
When BY CYCLE is selected, MyLab automatically detects the envelope of the
velocity profile during a cardiac cycle on a Doppler trace displaying it in
yellow and overlaid on the spectrum itself.
The measurement allows to better define the starting and ending points:

MEASUREMENTS
Procedure 1. Using the trackball move the bar on the first point of the
cycle and press EN TER to confirm.
2. Using the trackball move the bar on the end point of the
cycle and press EN TER to confirm.
The selected cycle of the Doppler spectrum is labeled and displayed in white.
MEASUREMENTS
Automatic Measurement
For ADM, refer to the next paragraph “Automatic Doppler Measurements”.
ADM - Automatic Doppler Measurements

Activation of Automatic Doppler
Automatic Doppler tracings automatically detect the Doppler spectrum
profile, which is based either on the ECG signal, when available, or on the
time intervals defined by CLIP DUR.
The profile of the detected Doppler spectrum can be based:
 on the trace peak values, that means the profile of the
maximum frequency of the spectrum;
 on the trace mean values, that means the profile of the mean
frequency of the spectrum.
In non-cardiac applications automatic measurements are made on the
detected profile and displayed on the left of the screen; measurements are
updated every heart cycle. In cardiac applications the detected Doppler
profile can be associated to specific cardiac flow measurements: refer to next
paragraphs for detailed information.
The automatic measurements are saved in the report only when they are
associated to a specific flow measurement or when they are saved through
ADD TO REP button.
WARNING The determination of the envelope curve requires a clear and low-noise
recording of the Doppler spectrum. Otherwise, the reliability of the
displayed measurement results may not be ensured.

MEASUREMENTS
Activation Automatic Doppler tracings can be activated in real time both in PW and CW
Doppler and in Freeze.
ADM activates the automatic Doppler detection. Once activated, the Doppler
profile is displayed in yellow, overlaid on the spectrum itself.
For additional information, While in automatic Doppler measurement, the system keys and controls are
please refer to the “Image available to optimize the profile display (B-MODE, DOPPLER tabs).
Optimization” section.
NOTE Use the controls (such as BASELINE, SCALE) to display the whole profile and
spectrum within the Doppler trace so that aliasing does not occur.
Controls in Automatic Doppler Measurements

Button with sub-menu Upon mode activation, ADM SETTINGS button is displayed. Once pressed,
the sub-menu shows the following controls:
ALL When INVERT CFM SCALE WITH STEERING is enabled in APPLICATION

UPPER PRESET menu (pressing M EN U , then G E N E R A L S E T U P ) these keys
LOWER respectively select whether to detect the whole flow, the flow above the
baseline only or the flow below the baseline only.
ALL When INVERT CFM SCALE WITH STEERING is not enabled, these keys
ADM POSITIVE respectively select whether to detect the whole velocity profile, the positive
ADM NEGATIVE velocities only or the negative velocities only.
CYCLE sets the number of cycles to be selected automatically.
PEAK MEAN respectively set whether to detect the profile on peak or on mean frequency
values.
ARTERIAL/VENOUS selects the type of flow under analysis. In the first case the period of analysis
for each measurement corresponds to the detected heart cycle; in the other
case the value of the toggle sets the period of analysis for each measurement.
AVERAGE sets the number of cycles to be averaged.
THRESHOLD sets the minimum level of signal to be used for the profile detection.
BACK exits from the settings menu.
NOTE For a correct diagnostic evaluation, it is recommended to use the angle

correction factor, in order to obtain the right flow alignment.

MEASUREMENTS
Make sure that the profile of the automatically detected Doppler flow
(yellow line) corresponds to the real profile.
Bibliographic formulas and Freeze and Archive
MEASUREMENTS
references in appendix
In Freeze the Doppler sequence can be seen by scrolling the frames: the
marker on the automatic Doppler profile moves accordingly. The displayed
parameters values refer to the period/heart cycle selected with the marker.
ADM button displays the detected profile when pressed.
ANGLE FINE ADJ toggles change the angle vector: the measured values are automatically re-
calculated.
Automatic Doppler tracing and measurements are automatically saved with
the image (IM AGE key).
NOTE Automatic Doppler measurements are not available in exam review and
archive review.
Measurement taken on two modes

Some measurements need to be taken in two different modes. To do that:
1. Take the first measurement in the current mode;
2. If necessary, press FREEZE to return in real time and acquire
the desired image, then press FREEZE again;
3. Press +....+ or M EASURE to take the second measurement.
Multi-Modality Measurements
Multi-modality measurements (for example B-Mode and Doppler) can be
performed on Dual and Split formats. On a dual format with linear probes,
measurements can be taken on both images, for example a distance
measurement can be activated by positioning the first cursor on one image
and the last cursor on the other image. This measurement can be performed

MEASUREMENTS
only when images are acquired at the same depth, with the same orientation,
without steering and zoom.
WARNING Before performing measurements on the two frames of a Dual format,

check that the whole image (for example both side by side frames) is
consistent with the structure under exam. If necessary, reacquire both
images.
When activated, the average is based on up to three measurements.
Measurement on Clip of Trace

When a saved trace clip (M-Mode, Q-
Mode, Compass M-Mode and Doppler)
is reviewed, either in cine mode or frame
by frame, a vertical black line is displayed
on the trace. This line separates the
frames belonging to the same
continuous time interval (on the right of
the line) from the frames belonging to
another continuous time interval (on the
left of the line).
Both generic and advanced measurements can be taken on the single frame
composing the trace clip.
WARNING Any measurement that is based on time interval (such as slope, flow and
flow integral, time interval) has to be taken only on continuous time
interval. This kind of measurement has to be performed without crossing
the vertical black line.
Generic Measurements
Once +… + is pressed, Generic Measurements are activated and, depending on
the active mode, a specific list of measurement is displayed.
Refer to the following tables for the list of Generic Measurements available
in each mode.
Refer to Appendixes for formulas and bibliographic references.

MEASUREMENTS
Table 1-3: Generic Measurements available in B-Mode
Measurement Measurement Input Measurement Displayed

Input Type
Description (Abbreviation) (Label) results
MEASUREMENTS
Distance Distance Distance (D) Distance D#
(D)
Distance Ratio Distance Ratio Distance1 (D1) Distance D1

(Distance Ratio) Distance2 (D2) Distance D2
D/D
Percentage of % Diam Reduction Distance1 (D1) Distance D1

Diameter Reduction (% Diam Reduction) Distance2 (D2) Distance D2
%Diam
Length by Vertex Length (Vertex) Length (Vertex) (L#) Vertex L#

(L)
Length by Trace Length (Trace) Length (Trace) (L#) Trace L#

(L)
Area by Ellipse axes Area (Ellipse axes) Area Ellipse Area#

(Area) Perimeter
Area by Vertex) Area (Vertex) Area Vertex Area#

(Area) Perimeter
Area by Trace Area (Trace) Area Trace Area#

(Area) Perimeter
Area Ratio Area Ratio Area1 Trace Area1

(A/A) Area2 Trace Area2
A/A
Percentage of Area % Area Reduction Area1 Trace Area1

Reduction (% Area) Area2 Trace Area2
%A
Volume by Ellipse Volume (Ellipse) Area Ellipse Area#

(El-Volume) Volume
Volume by Trace Volume (Trace) Area (A) Trace Area#

(Volume (Trace)) Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam
Volume
Biplane Volume Biplane Volume Diameter (Diam1) Distance Diam1

(Biplane Volume) Diameter (Diam2) Distance Diam2
Diameter (Diam3) Distance Diam3
Vol
Ellipse Ratio Ellipse Ratio Area1 Ellipse Area#

(Ellipse Ratio) Area2 Ellipse Area#
E/E
Hip Angle Hip Angle Hip Baseline (Basel) Distance 

Alfa Angle () Distance 
Beta Angle ( Distance
Angle (2 lines) Hip Angle - Distance Angle

Distance

MEASUREMENTS

Input Type
Angle (3 points) Hip Angle  Distance Angle
Table 1-4: Generic Measurements available in M-Mode

Input Type
Distance Distance Distance (D) Distance D#

(D)
Distance Ratio Distance Ratio Distance1 (D1) Distance D1

(Distance Ratio) Distance2 (D2) Distance D2
D/D
Time Time Time Time Time#

(Time)
Time Ratio Time Ratio Time1 Time Time1

(Time Ratio) Time2 Time Time2
T/T
Heart Rate HR R-R (R-R) Time R-R#

(HR) HR
Velocity Velocity Velocity (Vel#) Velocity Vel#

(Vel) Time
D
Velocity Ratio Velocity Ratio Velocity1 (Vel1) Velocity Vel#

(Velocity Ratio) Velocity2 (Vel2) Velocity Vel#
V/V
Table 1-5: Generic Measurements available in Doppler

Input Type
Time Time (Time) Time (Time#) Time Time#
Time Ratio Time ratio Time1 (Time#) Time Time#

(Time ratio) Time2 (Time#) Time Time#
T/T
Velocity Velocity Velocity (Vel#) Caliper V

(Vel)
Cardiac Velocity Cardiac Velocity Cardiac Velocity (V) Caliper Vel#

PG
Velocity Ratio Velocity Ratio Velocity1 (Vel#) Caliper Vel#

(Velocity Ratio) Velocity2 (Vel#) Caliper Vel#
V/V

MEASUREMENTS

Input Type
Heart Rate HR (HR) R-R1 Time R-R#

HR
Systolic velocity to S/D PSVa Caliper PSV
MEASUREMENTS
Diastolic velocity (S/D) b Caliper EDV
EDV
Ratio S/D
Cardiac VTIc Cardiac VTI Cardiac VTI (VTI) Profile VTI
Vascular VTIc Vascular VTI VTI Profile VTI

(VTI)
Pulsatility Index PI (PI) VTI Profile VTI
Resistive Index RI (RI) PSV Caliper PSV

EDV Caliper EDV
RI
Flow by Traced Flow (Trace) TAVe Profile TAV#

(Flow) Area Trace Area#
Flow
Flow by Ellipsed Flow (Ellipse) TAVe Profile TAV#

(Flow) Area Ellipse Area#
Flow
Flow by Diameterd Flow (Diam) TAVe Profile TAV#

(D-Flow) Diameter Distance Diam#
Area(D)
Flow
Slope Slope (Slope) Pressure Half-Time Time Acc

PHT
Velocity (Hz)f Velocity Velocity (Vel) Caliper Vel
a. PSV = Peak Systolic Velocity

b. EDV = End Diastolic Velocity
c. VTI = Velocity Time Integral
d. The measurement needs to be taken on two different modes
e. TAV = Time Average Velocity
f. Available only when the trace is displayed in kHz. When velocity is measured in kHz, no derived
parameter is automatically calculated.
Advanced Measurements
Once M EASURE is pressed, Advanced Measurements are activated and,
depending on the active application, a specific list of measurement is
displayed.
Advanced Measurements are organized in groups corresponding to specific
anatomic structures, the touchscreen displays the available measurements of

MEASUREMENTS
the selected group and the other available groups as tab on the Navigation
bar. If you want to select a different group, tap on the related tab.
Refer to the following chapters for the Advance Measurements available in
each application.
Application Data
To correctly perform Advanced Measurements some applications need
additional patient information that can be inserted in the Patient ID page.
Refer to next chapters for information on specific data to be entered in
Cardiac, Vascular, Gynecology, OB-Fetal and Pediatric cardiac applications.
Advanced Measurements Organization

For some anatomical district, Advanced Measurements are bilateral, this
means measurements are grouped for the right side (indicated as “R”) and for
the left side (indicated as “L”): the LEFT/RIGHT key selects the desired side.
When sides are applicable, the label will correspond to the measurement
abbreviation plus the “R” or “L” character, according to the active side.
In the next chapters bilateral measurements will be indicated by a note and
Right (R label) will be used for the side indication.
Diagnosis Based on Measurements

MyLab measurement packages have to be used by qualified personnel as a
diagnostic tool. The diagnosis has not to be based on the measurements only,
but these are to be integrated with other clinical data.
All formulas of MyLab advanced measurements packages refer to a number of
clinical bibliographic references that are listed for each application and
advanced features in the corresponding section. Users are kindly encouraged
to consult the original references to draw their conclusions on clinical
consistency of the measurements
NOTE The user is the only responsible for customized measurements and
formulas.
WARNING Clips are compressed for digital storage. Compressed files involve a
minimal loss of information. Be careful while diagnosing over lossy
compressed images.

2
Chapter
2 - Measurement Configuration
MEASUREMENTS
Accessing to the Configuration Menu
To access the measurement configuration menu press M EN U then select
M E A S U R E , the list of configurable items will be displayed on the left of the
screen.
Fig. 2-1: List of configurable items
The measurement configuration menu depends on which item is selected on

the left list and it can act on three levels:
 at _All Applications level, to ENLARGE FONT FOR GENERIC
MEASUREMENTS;
 at single application level, when a specific application is

selected;
 at Measurement Folder level, when a measurement folder is
selected. To show the measurement folders, click on the +
beside the application name.
When an item from the list has been selected, a subset of the following
buttons is available:

MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION
 EDIT to access the configuration menu of the selected item and

modify it.
 NEW to create a new customized Measurement Folder. Refer
to the paragraph “How to create a Measurement Folder”
further in this chapter.
 CLONE to create a copy of an already existing and selected
Measurement Folder and then modify it.
 REMOVE to delete the selected customized Measurement
Folder.
 F A C T O R Y to restore the default measurement folders of the
selected item.
NOTE Pressing F A C T O R Y retrieves all factory Measurement Folders and deletes

all user customized Measurement Folders saved for that application.
When a Measurement Folder is selected you can change its position by the up
and down arrow of the keyboard.
Measurement Folder will be displayed as tab on the touchscreen after
Advanced Measurements activation.
 GS You can assign specific measurement configurations to a preset (or clinical
setting). Refer to the “Getting Started” manual for further information on
clinical settings.
Configuration for a specific Application

Select a specific application from the list and press E D I T or double click on
it to enter the related configuration menu.
The Application Measurement configuration menu is organized in four
internal folders:
 Application Measurements,
 Generic Measurements,
 Measure Unit,
 Advanced.
SAVE saves the new settings; they will be activated at the next exam.

Application Measurements Folder

Fig. 2-2: Configuration of Application Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
Check ENABLE APPLICATION AVERAGE to activate the average for all
application measurements (except generic measurements).
Check ENABLE ABSOLUTE VELOCITIES to activate the display of the absolute
velocities values in Doppler measurements. When absolute velocities are
enabled:
 velocity and acceleration measurements are always positive,
regardless the position of the cursor on the trace (up or
below the baseline),
 derived parameters, such as Resistive Index and Pulsatility
Index, are not affected by this setting,
 averaged measurements are evaluated using the positive
values.
The box on the right lists all groups available for the selected application
grouped in F A C T O R Y and C U S T O M folders.
A group can be selected either by scrolling the right list or by entering
searching criteria in the SEARCH field.
Once a group is selected, its own customization is displayed in the center of
the screen. You can enable/disable the group selecting ON/OFF respectively
in the column MODE beside the group name. When enabled, the group is
available at M EASURE pressure.
For each single measure belonging to the group your can define the activation
mode:

 AUTO: the measure is included in the automatic measurement

sequence.
 OFF: the measure is disabled.
 ON: the measure should be manually activated.
NOTE AUTO for a derived parameter (that is not calculated but derived from a
formula) means that this parameter will automatically be calculated and
updated on the report page as soon as basic measurements have been
performed.
“WS” and “PL” boxes The group and the each single measurement are included in the worksheet
and can be printed when the corresponding boxes (WS and PL) are checked.
NEW GROUP opens a sub-menu allowing to create a custom group. Refer to

the paragraph “How to create a new group” further in this chapter.
EDIT allows to modify the selected custom group.
DELETE cancels the selected custom group.
Generic Measurements Folder

In this folder you can customize the Generic Measurements (available by
pressing +...+) for each mode belonging to the selected application.
Fig. 2-3: Customization of Generic Measurements
The configuration window shows:

 in the center the touchscreen layout. Each mode (selectable

by the corresponding tab) has its dedicated touchscreen.
 on the right the list of all available measurements for the
selected mode.
To customize the generic measurement, follow this procedure:
MEASUREMENTS
Procedure 1. Select the desired mode by clicking on the corresponding tab:
the list of available measurements on the right is updated;
2. To add a measurement on the touchscreen, drag and drop it
from the list on the right to an empty box on the touchscreen
layout. All measurements already moved to the touchscreen
are displayed in gray in the right list;
3. To change position within the touchscreen, drag and drop
from current position to the new one;
4. To remove a measurement from the touchscreen, drag and
drop it in the trash bin.
By DEFAULT MEASURE you can decide which measurement will be active at
+...+ pressure. If NONE is chosen, no measurement will be automatically active.
Checking ENABLE AUTO-REPEAT enables the automatic repetition of distance
measurement in B-Mode and of velocity measurement when in Doppler.
Measure Units Folder

In this folder you can set the desired measure units for each type of measure
and the cursor shape to be used both in Doppler and M-Mode.
You can also set which fields to show during ADM and VTI measurements.
CURSOR SIZE can be defined here as STANDARD, SMALL or MEDIUM-SMALL.
Advanced Folder
In this folder you can set the printing configuration of the report (REPORT
PRINT) selecting the desired option from the drop-down menu.
Table 2-1: Report Print options
Report Print Action
FACTORY The measurements in the report are factory-organized.

BY GROUP The measurements in the report are organized by group.
BY MODE The measurements in the report are organized by mode.

Additional dedicated settings are available for some applications. Refer to

next chapters for further information about it.
Configuration for Measurement Folder

Select a Measurement Folder and press E D I T or double click on it to enter
the related configuration menu. Press N E W or C L O N E if you want create a
new Measurement Folder.
In this folder you can customize the measurement folder (available by
pressing M EASURE) for each application.
The configuration window shows:
 in the center the touchscreen layout. Each mode (selectable
by the corresponding tab) has its dedicated touchscreen;
 on the right the list of all available measurement groups for
the selected mode;
 on the bottom the NAME and NOTES fields used to define the
customized measurement folder.
To customize a measurement folder, follow this procedure:
Procedure 1. Select the desired mode by clicking on the corresponding tab:
the list of available groups on the right is updated;
2. To add a group on the touchscreen, drag and drop it from the
list on the right to an empty box on the touchscreen layout.
All measurements already moved to the touchscreen are
displayed in gray in the right list;
3. To change position within the touchscreen, drag and drop
from current position to the new one;
4. To remove a measurement from the touchscreen, drag and
drop it in the trash bin.
NOTE Measurement Folder can be customized by adding or removing groups of

measurements. Single measurements cannot be added or removed from
the customized Measurement Folder.
SAVE saves the settings so that they are immediately active.


How to Create a Measurement Folder

When accessed the measurement configuration menu, to create a customized
Measurement Folder follow the procedure below:
Procedure 1. select the desired application from the list on the left and
MEASUREMENTS
press N E W to create a completely new folder, otherwise
select an existing Measurement Folder and press C L O N E to
create a new folder starting from an existing one,
2. fill the NAME field with the desired name for the new
Measurement Folder and add an optional description in the
NOTES field,
3. using the trackball select the desired mode by clicking on the

corresponding tab: the list of the available groups is updated,
4. drag and drop the desired groups from the list on the right to
the desired position of the touchscreen layout. The group can
be selected either by scrolling the list with the trackball or by
entering searching criteria in the SEARCH field. All groups
already moved in the touchscreen are displayed in gray,
5. for each mode, the groups can be organized in different
levels: select first the desired page (P A G E # button) using the
trackball and then drag and drop the group into the desired
position.
6. SAVE or C A N C E L .
NOTE When a group is bilateral, it is shown with the right (R) suffix: when
selected, it will be automatically activated also for the left side.
When a multi-mode group (group requiring measurements in different

modes, such as the PISA group in cardiac application) is selected, it is
automatically shown in the touchscreen of each required mode.
WARNING The user is the only responsible when using customized measurements
and formulas.

How to create a new group

When accessed the measurement configuration menu, to create a custom
measurement group double click on the desired application, then press N E W
G R O U P , the window below is displayed.
Fig. 2-4: New Group of Custom Measurement
Table 2-2: New Group of Custom Measurement option
Field Action
MODE Sets in which mode the custom group is available.

NAME Sets the name of the custom group.
ABBREV Sets the abbreviation of the custom group.
LATERALITY Sets if the custom group is bilateral; in this case two
different labels have to be set for the left and right
group.a
a. It is strongly suggested to use self-explanatory names and abbrevia-
tions for lateral group (for example using the suffixes “L” and “R”
respectively for left and right groups).
Once all the fields have been set, press O K ; the system displays the following
menu:

Fig. 2-5: Custom Measurement Creation
MEASUREMENTS
The configuration menu shows:
 on the left the list of the available generic measurements in
each mode. For Cardiac application two tabs are displayed
allowing the selection of both generic and advanced
measurements.
 on the bottom left side the buttons to add a new
measurement and a new formula,
 in the center the menu to configure the custom group.
The group can be composed of up to twenty different measurements
(indicated by the counter displayed on the upper right side) that can be chosen
from the list of available generic measurements by A D D M E A S U R E M E N T or
created using a custom formula by A D D F O R M U L A .
Procedure to add a measurement

To add measurements to the custom group, follow the procedure below:
Procedure 1. Select the desired measurement from the left list and press
A D D M E A S U R E M E N T or double click on it.
2. Assign a name, an abbreviation and a label to any item

composing the custom measurement.
NOTE If the measurement is bilateral, it strongly suggested to use self-explanatory

names and abbreviations (for example using the suffixes “L” and “R”
respectively for left and right measurement).

3. If the measurement requires suspension (that is a temporarily

stop to execution for the selection either of a different frame
or of a different mode), set the desired modality:
Table 2-3: Measurement modality
Modality Action
NONE No suspension is required.

FRAME The custom measurement is suspended
for the selection of another frame of the
same loop. The system prompts a
message for the selection of a different
frame.
MODE The custom measurement is suspended
for activating a different mode. The
system prompts a message for the
activation of a different mode.
RESUME The custom measurement is activated in a
mode not valid for the custom
measurement. The system resumes real
time to activate the correct mode.
4. Existing formula can be modified pressing E D I T FORMULA.
OK saves the settings.
NOTE The custom group will be available for measurements only after it has been
added in a Measurement Folder (refer to previous chapter for information
on how to configure a Measurement Folder).
CANCEL exits the menu without saving the settings.
Procedure to add a formula

To add a custom formula to the custom group, follow the procedure below:
Procedure 1. Press A D D FORMULA.
2. A new row (F#) is added to custom measurements list, as

shown in the image below.

Fig. 2-6: Adding Formula
MEASUREMENTS
3. Assign a name, an abbreviation and a label to any item
composing the custom measurement.
4. Press E D I T F O R M U L A to access the page to enter the
desired formula.
Fig. 2-7: Editing Formula
5. Type the formula selecting the desired digit or mathematical

operator; the formula is displayed on the custom formula
field.

Table 2-4: List of the available mathematical operators
Operator Action
SIN and ASIN Sinus and Arc Sine
COS and ACOS Cosine and Arc Cosine
TAN and ATAN Tangent and Arc Tangent
LOG and LN Logarithm and Natural Logarithm
EXP en
X^Y XY
SQRT Square root
 Pi
e Euler number
RND UP Rounding up the number
RND DOWN Rounding down the number
ABS Absolute value
BACK and DEL Respectively delete what is before or after the cursor.
 and  They allow to scroll the formula.
NOTE Digit and mathematical operator can be added to the formula only through
the numeric and mathematical operator keyboard.
6. If required, select the desired custom measurement from the
list and either press A D D M E A S U R E M E N T button or press
EN TER twice to display it on the FORMULA field.
7. If required, select the desired patient and application data and

press EN TER twice to display them on the FORMULA field.
8. When necessary, set the unit measure of the parameters
composing the formula, selecting it from the combo box
displayed beside the single parameter.
9. Set whether the result of the formula has a dimension or not.
10. Press V E R I F I C A T I O N button to verify the formula
congruence. When a formula modification is required, the
part to be changed is highlighted.
OK saves the settings. C A N C E L exits the menu without saving the settings.

3
Chapter
3 - Accuracy
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter is intended to provide information to evaluate the error that
should be considered when performing both Generic and Advanced
Measurements with MyLab.
Please be advised that measurements in ultrasound are dependent upon the
propagation velocity of sound through tissue. The propagation velocity
usually varies with the type of tissue, but an average velocity of 1540 m/s is
assumed, so the accuracy of the system is based on this assumption.
MyLab is designed for an assumed average velocity of 1540 m/s and the
accuracy statements listed below are based on this value.
The accuracy of measurements is not only affected by the system accuracy but
errors may result from improper use of techniques and protocols. To reduce
as much as possible the potential operator errors, it is advised to follow
measurement instructions and refer to the formulas and methods behind the
measurements to prevent possible limitations of them.
In any case measurements on ultrasound images are intended as supplement
to information coming from other clinical procedures.
Measurement Accuracy
The table below reports each measurement accuracy as function of scales
(column “Accuracy”) and the worst case values (column “%”).
Table 3-1: Measurement Accuracy
Mode Measurement Units Accuracy %
B-Mode Distance mm ±[1.5%Depth(mm)+0.1]mm ±5
Perimeter mm ±[6%Depth(mm)+1]mm ±5
Area mm2 ±[1.5%(D1+D2)Depth(mm)+ ±8

0.025%Depth(mm) +1]mm2
M-Mode full screen Distance mm ±[1%Depth(mm)+0.1]mm ±3
Time s ±[1%Time(s)+0.005]s ±3

ACCURACY
Mode Measurement Units Accuracy %
M-Mode split and Distance mm ±[1.6%Depth(mm)+0.1]mm ±5

dual screen
Time s ±[1%Time(s)+0.005]s ±3
Doppler full screen Inst.velocity m/s ±[2%VR(m/s)+0.01]m/s ±6
Time s ±[1%Time(s)+0.005]s ±3
Doppler split and Inst.velocity m/s ±[2.5%VR(m/s)+0.01]m/s ±8

dual screen
Time s ±[1%Time(s)+0.005]s ±3
VR stands for Doppler velocity range.
NOTE If angle correction is used, a computation error of 0,1% must be added to

the accuracy of the Doppler measurements.
Worst case values are calculated with the following assumptions:

 measurement values equal to one third of the analysis depth
(for example: with a depth of 18 cm, a distance measurement
of 6 cm).
 ultrasound speed constant at 1540m/s.
Derived Data
Derived data can be calculated through the law of error propagation; worst
case accuracy, based on the above mentioned assumptions, is reported
together with the formulas.
To minimize the measurement uncertainty:
1. select the optimal probe for the active application,
2. optimize image quality,
3. whenever possible, use the zoom function for maximum res-
olution,
4. optimize the probe alignment with the Doppler flow,
5. position the measurement markers as much accurate as pos-
sible.

4
Chapter
4 - MyLab Worksheet and

Report
MEASUREMENTS
MyLab Worksheet
The WORKSHEET button can be pressed at any time to display all performed
measurements both generic and advanced.
Fig. 4-1: MyLab Worksheet
The worksheet is organized in pages, one page for each application indicated
by the corresponding tab.
Each application page is then organized in sub-folders, corresponding to the
measured modes and groups, identified by corresponding sub-tabs.
To navigate through modes (for example from Doppler calculations to
Cardiac application) or through groups of measurements (for example within
the Vascular application) select the corresponding tab. Alternatively tap the
related buttons on the touchscreen.
Measurements can be scrolled by the lateral bar: place the cursor on the bar
or on the up/down arrows to scroll the worksheet.
Measurements can be selectively deleted clicking on the red cross displayed
beside the group or the single parameter.

MYLAB WORKSHEET AND REPORT
Averaged measurements When average is enabled on measurement configuration menu (refer to

previous chapter for further details), the worksheet shows the average value
in the first column and the values of the individual measurements in the
following columns. Single measurements can be excluded from the average
computation. Click on the measurement to be excluded, its value is displayed
on a dark background and the average is automatically recalculated; click again
to reinsert the measurement.
Average criteria The average is done using the parameters directly measured; the average of
derived parameters is based on the average of the direct measurements.
For example the heart rate is calculated by measuring the R-R interval: the
direct measurement is the time (that is the R-R interval), the heart rate is the
derived parameter. When the average is enabled, the mean heart rate will be
calculated by averaging the measured R-R intervals.
Deleting measurements To delete single measurements or measurement groups, place the cursor on
the cross displayed beside the single measurement a/o group and press EN TER
to confirm.
Bilateral Measurements LEFT/RIGHT displays lateral measurements, when available.
Press the WORKSHEET button again or, alternatively, press FREEZE to exit.
MyLab Report
REPORT can be pressed at any time to display the report print preview containing the
patient data and all measurements performed during the exam.
If the average is enabled, the report contains the average value.
The touchscreen menu displays the following controls:
PAGE scrolls the report print preview.
ZOOM increases or decreases the report print preview zoom factor by rotating it
clockwise/counterclockwise respectively.
END REPORT closes the report when pressed.
PREVIOUS REPORTS allows to review the previous reports: once pressed, MyLab displays the closed
reports that can be browsed one by one through the upper combo box.
If the system is configured with a PC printer, use the printer key to print the
report. The report can be printed by 1, 2, 3, 4 when associated to a printer.

Observations Additional text can be inserted in this section of the report.

Place the cursor on the desired field and:
 Press EN TER to edit text: a window will be displayed, where
comments may be entered with the alphanumeric keyboard.
MEASUREMENTS
 Press UN DO to display the list of the available observations for
this field. With the trackball select the desired one and press
EN TER to confirm. Refer to the “Observations
Configuration” paragraph further on this chapter to know
how to add fields and sentences for observations.
To exit the report, press REPORT again or E X I T .
End of the Report

At the end of the exam the report is automatically closed. When the exam is
reviewed from the archive, a new report is created with the same patient data
and the measurements performed in archive review.
The status of the new report stays open when exiting from archive review.
This means that the report is updated with new measurements whenever the
same exam is reviewed from the archive. When a parameter is measured more
times, the old value is overwritten.
Configurations
Report Configuration
Report Configuration allows to customize the report style, changing its sections,
fonts and colors.
Press M EN U then R E P O R T to enter in the Report Configuration page where:
 on the left side are listed all the configured profiles; only
Factory profile is listed if no new profiles have been configured;
 in the center the Report Styles for the profile selected on the
left list;
 on the right side the main sections of the Report Styles with
the controls to change each single item;

Fig. 4-2: Report Configuration Page
Once a profile has been selected from the list on the left, here you can modify
it (pressing E D I T ), delete it (R E M O V E ) or create a new profile starting from
it (C L O N E ).
Once pressed E D I T or C L O N E , the system displays the configuration page
where you can edit each single item on the right and see the modifications
effect on the main windows.
This window allows to the assignment of the desired font to each report field, the
preferred size and color. For each section, the desired background and text
alignment can be chosen.
Place the cursor in the NAME field and using the alphanumeric keyboard enter the
desired name and description (NOTES field) for the profile.
Enter in editing mode selecting the item to be modified on the list on the left
and pressing E D I T (or N E W if none).

Fig. 4-3: Profile configuration page
MEASUREMENTS
When in edit mode, on the right are listed all the report elements that can be
modified.
Procedure 1. The curtain menu at top-right provides a list of predefined

templates for the report page. Select the desired one.
2. Press E D I T beside each report element to change its settings.
3. A window displays the parameters that can be set; they can
differ among elements:
• the color of the foreground and background,
• the border color and thickness,
• the desired font, weight and size of the character,
• the text alignment;
4. Change the parameters you want, then press O K to confirm

or C A N C E L to close the window without saving the
modifications.
5. Repeat the above steps to change the style of each report
element.
6. Press S A V E to save and activate the new settings or C A N C E L
to exit without saving the modifications.
The arrow beside each E D I T button shows the current configurations for the
related element.

Observations Configuration
Observations Configuration allows to create groups of words and sentences to
be used in the report for each application.
Press M EN U then O B S E R V A T I O N S to enter in the Observation
Configuration page where:
 on the left side are listed the customized groups; only Factory
groups is listed if no new groups have been created;
 on the right side the observations available for the group and
application selected on the left list.
Fig. 4-4: Observations Configuration Page
Each set of observations is organized for groups, applications and fields.

Each Field may include the desired number of words and sentences.
Once an application belonging to a group is selected from the list on the left,
you can see the related Fields and Sentences on the right.
Once a group is selected from the list on the left, you can modify it (pressing
E D I T ), delete it (R E M O V E ) or create a new group starting from it (C L O N E ).
Once an application is selected inside a group, from the list on the left, you
can modify the related list of observation (pressing E D I T ) adding Fields and
Sentences.

Fig. 4-5: Observations Configuration Menu
MEASUREMENTS
Once E D I T is pressed, the following is displayed:
 in the first column the list of the fields for the selected
application;
 in the second column the list of words and sentences for the
selected field;
 on the right the buttons to add a new field in the application
report (A D D F I E L D ) and to A D D S E N T E N C E in each field.
NOTE The ALL APPLICATIONS option contains the list of the observations available
for the default “Conclusions” field, that is present in the report of all
applications. This option is modifiable, as the other options, following the
procedure below.
Procedure 1. Press A D D FIELD or A D D SENTENCE:
• a new row, contoured by a frame, is automatically added

in the related list;
• the frame contouring the row indicates that it can be
immediately edited: change the field or sentence name
using the alphanumeric keyboard.
2. If necessary, repeat the procedure to add a new field and/or
sentence.
NOTE Each added field corresponds to a new part in the Observation section of
the report having the same name.

NOTE Each added sentence will be listed when the UN DO key is pressed by
entering comments in the corresponding field.
Moving fields and Drag and drop up or down any sentence to change its position in the list.
sentences
Deleting fields and Drag and drop the field or sentence to be removed it into the waste bin.
sentences
Changing field name Select the field or sentence to be modified and type the text inside the box
and sentence with the keyboard.

5
Chapter
5 - Abdominal Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter lists all the Advanced Measurements available for the
Abdominal application.
The listed measurements are organized in groups. You can customize the
Advanced Measurements package to adapt it to your work-flow: the
touchscreen will display only the set measurements.
Abdominal Advanced Measurements in

B-Mode
Bladder
Table 5-1: Bladder Advanced Measurements group in B-Mode
Input
Measurement Displayed
Measurement Description Measurement Input Type
(Abbreviation) Results
(Label)
Urinary Bladder Volume Urinary Bladder Length (L) Distance L

Height (H) Distance H
Width (W) Distance W
Volume
Urinary Bladder Wall Urinary Bladder Wall Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Post-Void Bladder Volume Post-Void Bladder Volume Length (L) Distance L

(PV Bladder Volume) Height (H) Distance H
Volume
Urinary Bladder Calculi Urinary Bladder Calc# Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam
Urinary Bladder Mass Urinary Bladder Mass# Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Prostate Volume Prostate Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Prostate Right Lobe Transverse Prostate Right Lobe Transv Height (H) Distance H
(Prostate R Lobe Trnsv) Width (W) Distance W
Prostate Left Lobe Transverse Prostate Left Lobe Transv Height (H) Distance H
(Prostate L Lobe Trnsv) Width (W) Distance W

ABDOMINAL MEASUREMENTS
Renal
Table 5-2: Renal Advanced Measurements group in B-Mode
Measurement Input Measurement Displayed

Measurement Description Input Type
(Abbreviation) (Label) Results
Righta Kidney Volume Right Kidney Length (L) Distance L

(R Kidn) Height (H) Distance H
Volume
Righta Kidney Mass R Kidney Mass# Length (L) Distance L

(R Kidn M#) Height (H) Distance H
Volume
Righta Kidney Cyst Volume Right Kidn Cyst # Length (L) Distance L
(R Kidn Cyst #) Height (H) Distance H
Volume
Righta Kidney Calculi Right Kidn Calculi # Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam
(R Kidn Calc #)
Righta Kidney Pelvis R Kidney Pelvis Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam

(R Kidn Pelv)
Righta Cortex/Medulla Ratio R Cortex/Medulla RT R Cortex (R Crtx) Distance R Crtx

(R Cort/Med) R Medulla (R Med) Distance R Med
R C/M
Righta Ureter R Ureter Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam
Righta Ureter Wall R Ureter Wall Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn

(R Ur Wall)
Righta Ureter Calculi R Ureter Calculi# Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam

(R Uret Cal#)
Righta Adrenal Cranial Pole Right Adrenal Cranial Pole Length (L) Distance L
(R Adr Cran Pole) Height (H) Distance H
Volume
Righta Adrenal Gland Mass Right Ad Gland Mass# Length (L) Distance L
(R Ad Gland M#) Height (H) Distance H
Volume
a. The measurement is bilateral.

Organ
Table 5-3: Organ Advanced Measurements group in B-Mode

Input Type
Description (Abbreviation) (Label) Results
MEASUREMENTS
Pancreas Body Pancreas Body Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Pancreas Right Lobe Pancreas Right Lobe Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Pancreas Left Lobe Pancreas Left Lobe Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Right Pancreas Duct Right Panc Duct Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam
(R Pancr Duct)
Left Pancreas Duct Left Panc Duct Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam
(L Pancr Duct)
Pancreas Mass Pancreas Mass # Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Pancreas Cyst Volume Pancreas Cyst # Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Spleen Volume Spleen Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Spleen Mass Spleen Mass # Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Stomach Body Stomach Body Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Stomach Fundus Stomach Fundus Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn

(St Fundus)
Stomach Pylorus Stomach Pylorus Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Stomach Pylorus Pyl Mucosa/Musc Stomach Pylorus Distance Muco

Mucosa/Muscularis (Pyl M/M) Mucosa (Muco) Muscul
Ratio Stomach Pylorus Distance PyIM/M
Muscularis (Muscul)
Liver Longitudinal Liver Longit Distance Distance (D) Distance D

Distance (Liver Long Dist)
Liver Transversal Liver Transv Distance Distance (D) Distance D

Distance
Liver Mass Liver Mass # Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Gallbladder Volume Gallbladder Length (L) Distance L

(Gallbladd) Height (H) Distance H
Volume
Gallbladder Wall Gallbladder Wall Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn

(Gallbl Wall)


Input Type
Common Bile Duct Common Bile Duct Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam
Gallbladder Calculi Gallbladder Calculi# Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam

(GB Calc#)
Portal Vein Transverse Portal V Transv Diameter (Diam) Distance Diam

Area (Area) Trace Area

Abdominal Advanced Measurements in

Doppler
Abdomen
Table 5-4: Abdomen Advanced Measurements group in Doppler
MEASUREMENTS
Hepatic Artery Hepatic A PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Rightd Renal Artery Origin R Renal A Origin PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Rightd Renal Vein R Renal Vein PSVa Caliper PSV

(R RV) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Rightd Renal Artery R Renal A PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Aorta Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Infra-renal Aorta Infra-renal Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Supra-renal Aorta Supra-renal Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Distal Aorta Dist Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

(Dist Ao) Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Middle Aorta Mid Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

(Mid Ao) Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Proximal Aorta Prox Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

(Prox Ao) Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Post Prandial Celiac Post Prandial Celiac PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Inferior Mesenteric Artery Inf Mesenteric A PSVa Caliper PSV

(Inf Mesent A) Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Gastroduodenal Artery Gastroduodenal A PSVa Caliper PSV

(Gastroduod A) Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Proximal Superior Prox Sup Mesenteric A PSVa Caliper PSV

Mesenteric Artery Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc


Middle Superior Mesenteric Mid Sup Mesenteric A PSVa Caliper PSV

Artery Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Distal Superior Mesenteric Dist Sup Mesenteric A PSVa Caliper PSV

Artery Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Rightd Hilar Artery R Hilar A PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Splenic Artery Splenic A PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
RIc
Splenic Vein Splenic Vein PSVa Caliper PSV

(Splenic V) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Superior Mesenteric Vein Sup Mesenteric V PSVa Caliper PSV

(Sup Mesent V) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Inferior Mesenteric Vein Inf Mesenteric V PSVa Caliper PSV

(Inf Mesent V) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Proximal Inferior Vena Cava Prox Inf Vena Cava PSVa Caliper PSV
(Prox IVC) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Distal Inferior Vena Cava Dist Inf Vena Cava PSVa Caliper PSV
(Dist IVC) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Left Portal Vein Left Portal V PSVa Caliper PSV

(L Portal V) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Right Portal Vein R Portal V PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Main Portal Vein Main Portal V PSVa Caliper PSV

(M Portal V) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Left Hepatic Vein L Hepatic V PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Right Hepatic Vein R Hepatic V PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Main Hepatic Vein Main Hepatic V PSVa Caliper PSV

(M Hepatic V) Caliper EDV
EDVb

c. RI = Resistive Index
d. The measurement is bilateral.

6
Chapter
6 - Breast Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter lists all the Advanced Measurements available for the Breast
application.
Breast Advanced Measurements in B-

Mode
Breast Mass
Table 6-1: Breast Mass Advanced Measurements group in B-Mode
Input
Measurement Displayed
Measurement Description Measurement Input Type
(Abbreviation) Results
(Label)
Righta Mass Volume R Mass # Length (L) Distance L

(R Mass #) Height (H) Distance H
Volume
Righta Breast R Breast - - -
a. The measurement is bilateral. Till six lesions can be calculated both left and right side.
Breast Worksheet Organization

Here are described the additional fields dedicated to the Breast Worksheet.
Structure Evaluation
The worksheet, besides displaying the single measurements, also allows the
insertion of an evaluation of the structures under exam. The following
evaluations are available with the measurements.

BREAST MEASUREMENTS
Table 6-2: Evaluations in Breast when Mass measurement is selected
Parameter Evaluation
Location O’clock: from 1 to 12

Region: Nipple, Areolar, Subareolar, Axillary
Quadrants: Upper Inner, Lower Inner, Upper
Outer, Lower Outer
Profile: Posterior, Middle, Anterior
Masses Shape: Oval, Round, Irregular

Orientation: Not Parallel, Parallel
Echo Pattern: Anechoic, Hyperechoic, Complex
Cystic and Solid, Hypoechoic, Isoechoic,
Heterogeneous
Posterior Features: No posterior features,
Enhancement, Shadowing, Combined Pattern
Margin Circumscribed: Yes, No

Not circumscribed - Indistinct: Yes, No
Not circumscribed - Angular: Yes, No
Not circumscribed - Microlobulated: Yes, No
Not circumscribed - Spiculated: Yes, No
Elasticity Soft, Intermediate, Hard

Assessment
BI-RADS Refer to the assessment categories table below

Category
Table 6-3: Evaluations 1 in Breast when Breast measurement is selected
Tissue Homogeneous background echotexture - fat,

Composition Homogeneous background echotexture -
fibroglandular, Heterogeneous background
echotexture
Calcifications Calcifications in a mass: Yes, No

Calcifications outside of a mass: Yes, No
Intraductal calcifications: Yes, No
Not detectable calcifications: Yes, No
1. Available when RADS is enabled (refer to Breast Measurement Set Up paragraph)

BREAST MEASUREMENTS
Associated Architectural Distortion: Yes, No

Features Duct Changes: Yes, No
Skin Changes: Absent, Skin Thickening, Skin
Retraction
MEASUREMENTS
Edema: Yes, No
Vascularity: Absent, Internal Vascularity, Vessels
in Rim
Special Cases 1 Simple Cyst: Yes, No

Clustered Microcyst: Yes, No
Complicated Cyst: Yes, No
Mass in or on skin: Yes, No
Foreign body including implants: Yes, No
Special Cases 2 Lymph nodes - intramammary: Yes, No

Lymph nodes - axillary: Yes, No
Vascular abnormalities - AVMs: Yes, No
Vascular abnormalities - Mondor disease: Yes,
No
Postsurgical fluid collection: Yes, No
Special Cases 3 Fat Necrosis: Yes, No
BI-RADS Refer to the assessment categories table below

Category
Table 6-4: Assessment categories (based on BI-RADS lesion classification)
Category 0; Incomplete - Need Additional Imaging Evaluation
Category 1; Negative
Category 2; Benign
Category 3; Probably Benign
Category 4; Suspicious
Category 4A; Low suspicion for malignancy
Category 4B; Moderate suspicion for malignancy
Category 4C; High suspicion for malignancy
Category 5; Highly Suggestive of Malignancy
Category 6; Known Biopsy-Proven Malignancy
Evaluations can also be added from Measurement environment tapping

EVALUATE and then selecting the group.

BREAST MEASUREMENTS
NOTE This product incorporates the Breast Imaging Reporting and Data System
(BI-RADS®) ATLAS of the American College of Radiology, Copyright
1992, 1993, 1995, 1998, 2003, and 2013. The developer of this product is
independently owned and operated, and is not an affiliate of the American
College of Radiology. The American College of Radiology is not
responsible for the contents or operation of this product or its associated
software, and expressly disclaims any and all warranties and liabilities,
expressed or implied, in connection therewith.
Breast Measurement Set Up

To access the Breast Measurement configuration menu press M EN U then
select M E A S U R E , and then B R E A S T . The A P P L I C A T I O N
M E A S U R E M E N T S and A D V A N C E D tabs provide specific options for the
selected application.
Advanced Folder
Here you can set the parameters described in the table below.
Table 6-5: Advanced fields
Field Action
ENABLE RADS Enables the BI-RADS evaluation

7
Chapter
7 - Adult Cephalic
Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter lists all the Advanced Measurements available for the Adult
Cephalic application.
Adult Cephalic Advanced Measurements

in B-Mode
Table 7-1: Adult Cephalic Advanced Measurements in B-Mode

Righta middle cerebral artery R MCA 1st Segm R MCA 1 Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
depth - segment 1
Righta middle cerebral artery R MCA 2nd Segm R MCA 2 Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
depth - segment 2
Righta anterior cerebral artery R Ant Cerebral A R ACA Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
depth
Righta posterior cerebral R PCA 1st Segm R PCA 1 Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
artery depth - segment 1
Righta posterior cerebral R PCA 2nd Segm R PCA 2 Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
artery depth - segment 2
Basilar artery depth Basilar A Basilar A Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
Anterior communicant artery Ant Communic A ACoA Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
depth
Righta bifurcation depth R Bifurcation R Bif Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
Righta terminal internal R Terminal ICA R Term ICA Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
cerebral artery depth
Righta vertebral artery depth R Vertebral A R Vert A Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
Righta posterior R Post Communic A R PCoA Depth (Depth) Distance Depth

communicant artery depth

ADULT CEPHALIC MEASUREMENTS

Righta internal carotid artery R Dist ICA R Dist ICA Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
distal depth
Righta C5 depth R C5 R C5 Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
Righta C6 depth R C6 R C6 Depth (Depth) Distance Depth
a. The measurement is bilateral
Adult Cephalic Advanced Measurements

in Doppler
Table 7-2: Adult Cephalic Advanced Measurements in Doppler

Righta middle cerebral artery R MCA 1st Segm VTIb Profile VTI
depth - segment 1 VTI
Righta middle cerebral artery R MCA 2nd Segm VTIb Profile VTI
Righta anterior cerebral artery R Ant Cerebral A VTIb Profile VTI

depth VTI
Righta posterior cerebral artery R PCA 1st Segm VTIb Profile VTI
Righta posterior cerebral artery R PCA 2nd Segm VTIb Profile VTI
Basilar artery depth VTI Basilar A VTIb Profile VTI
Anterior communicant artery Ant Communic A VTIb Profile VTI

depth VTI
Righta bifurcation depth VTI R Bifurcation VTIb Profile VTI
Righta terminal internal cerebral R Terminal ICA VTIb Profile VTI

artery depth VTI
Righta vertebral artery depth R Vertebral A VTIb Profile VTI

VTI
Righta posterior communicant R Post Communic A VTIb Profile VTI

artery depth VTI
Righta internal carotid artery R Dist ICA VTIb Profile VTI

distal depth VTI
Righta C5 depth VTI R C5 VTIb Profile VTI


Righta C6 depth VTI R C6 VTIb Profile VTI

b. VTI = Velocity Time Integral
MEASUREMENTS
Adult Cephalic Worksheet Organization
Here are described the additional fields dedicated to the Adult Cephalic
worksheet.
Flow Directions
The worksheet, beside displaying the single measurements, also allows the
insertion of an evaluation and notes of any performed measurement of flow.
Field Evaluation
FLOW DIRECTION Free text, +, -
Free text can be edited in the blank field using the alphanumeric keyboard:
place the cursor on the field and press EN TER to activate the editing session.


8
Chapter
8 - Cardiac and Pediatric

Cardiac Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter lists all the Advanced Measurements available for the Cardiac
and Pediatric Cardiac applications.
Table 8-1: Available Factory Groups for Cardiac and Pediatric Cardiac
Cardiac Groups
Dimensions
Area
Volume (LVEF)
Mass
LV Dimensions
LA/Ao
MV
Aortic Valve
Tricuspid Valve
Pulmonic Valve
Pulmonary Vein
PISA
Qp/Qs
Event Timing
Special behavior of Cardiac advanced

Measurements
For Cardiac and Pediatric Cardiac applications, simple measurements
belonging to a macro-measurement can be ungrouped and executed
individually. When the system detects that all the measurements belonging to

CARDIAC AND PEDIATRIC CARDIAC MEASUREMENTS
the same macro-measurement have been executed, MyLab displays calculation

results for this macro-measurement.
Some cardiac measurements require to be taken on two cardiac views or on
two different modes.
At any time, it is possible to return to real time with B to complete the
acquisition. FREEZE the image and press M EASURE again to complete the
measurement.
Table 8-2: Legenda
Acronym Meaning
EF Ejection fraction
CI Cardiac index
CO Cardiac output
HR Heart rate
SI Stroke index
SV Stroke volume
A4C Apical Four Chambers
A2C Apical Two Chambers
d Diastole
s Systole
LV Left Ventricle

Application Data
Fig. 8-1: Cardiac Patient ID page
MEASUREMENTS
Table 8-3: Additional data in Cardiac Patient ID page
Field
BSA Body Surface Area

SYSTOLIC PRESSURE in mmHg
DIASTOLIC PRESSURE in mmHg
Body Surface Area (BSA)

The Body Surface Area (BSA) can be either automatically calculated or
manually entered.
In the first case, when both height and weight data are inserted, the BSA is
calculated using the following formulas1:
Standard BSA
0 725 0 425
W  71 84-
BSA  Adult Cardiac  = H
-------------------------------------------------------
10000
1. DuBois D, DuBois EF., “A formula to estimate the approximate surface area if

height and weight be known” In: Arch Intern Medicine, 1916; 17:863-71; Reading et
al.,”Simple Formula for the Surface Area of the Body and a Simple Model for
Anthropometry” In: Clinical Anatomy, n.18 pp 126-130, 2005;
Sluysmans, “Theoretical and Empirical Derivation of Cardiovascular Allometric
Relationship in Children” In: J Appl Physiol, November n.19, 2004

Pediatric BSA
0 3964 0 5378
H W  242 65
BSA  Pediatric Cardiac  = ---------------------------------------------------------------
10000
where height is in cm and weight in kg.

Custom BSA To customize the BSA place the cursor on the field, press EN TER and use the
alphanumeric keyboard to enter the desired value. The use of customized
BSA is clearly indicated both in the worksheet and in the report.
NOTE Any change both on height and on weight parameters does not affect the
customized BSA.
If the customized BSA is deleted, MyLab works as if no BSA was calculated.
Cardiac Advanced Measurements in B-

Mode
Table 8-4: Cardiac and Pediatric Cardiac Measurements in B-Mode

Input Type
Ejection Fraction EF Biplane Diastolic area 4C (LVAd A4C) Trace + Distance LVAd4C
(Simpson-Biplane) Systolic area 4C (LVAs A4C) Trace + Distance LVAs4C
Diastolic area 2C (LVAd A2C) Trace + Distance LVAd2C
Systolic area 4C (LVAs A2C) Trace + Distance LVAs2C
LVVd
LVVs
LVdi
LVVs i
EF BP
SV BP
SV i BP
HR(BP)
CO BP
CI BP
Ejection Fraction EF SP (Simpson) Diastolic area 4C (LVAd A4C) Trace + Distance LVAd4C
(Simpson-Single Systolic area 4C (LVAs A4C) Trace + Distance LVAs4C
Plane) LVVd4C
LVVs4C
LVV di 4
LVV si 4
EF4C
SV 4C
SV i 4C
HR (SP)
CO A4C
CI A4C


Input Type
Ejection Fraction EF MOD (Simpson) Diastolic area 4C (LVAd A4C) Trace + Distance LVAd4C
(Simpson)a Systolic area 4C (LVAs A4C) Trace + Distance Ad i 4C
Diastolic area 2C (LVAd A2C) Trace + Distance LVAs4C
Systolic area 4C (LVAs A2C) Trace + Distance LVAd2C
Ad i 2C
MEASUREMENTS
LVAs2C
LVVd4C
LVVs4C
LVVd2C
LVVs2C
LVVd bi
LVVs bi
LVVdi 4
LVVdi b
EF4C
EF2C
EF BP
SV 4C
SV 2C
SV Bipl
SV i 4C
SV i 2C
SI Bipl
LVLd4c
LVLs4c
LVLd2c
LVLs2c
LVESV index
(MOD A4C)
LVESV index
(MOD BP)
Ejection Fraction EF (A-L) Diastolic area 4C (LVAd A4C) Trace + Distance LVAd4C
(Area-Lenght) Systolic area 4C (LVAs A4C) Trace + Distance LVAs4C
LVLd4c
LVVd
LVLs4c
LVVs
LVVdi
LVVs i
EF A-L
SV A-L
SVi A-L
HR A-L
CO A-L
CI A-L
Left Ventricle % LVFAC LV diastolic area (LVAd) Trace LVAd

Fractional Area LV systolic area (LVAs) Trace LVAs
Changes %LVfaC
Left Ventricle Mass Left Ventricle Inteventricular septum - Diastole (IVSd) Distance IVSd
(LV) LV diameter - Diastole (LVIDd) Distance LVIDd
Posterior wall - Diastole (LVPWd) Distance LVPWd
LV Diameter - Systole (LVIDs) Distance LVIDs
Mitral valve tenting area (MV Tent Area) Trace MVTA
Mitral valve coaptation depth (MV Coapt Depth) Distance MVCDp
EF LV
%LV FS
LVMass
Left Ventricle Mass LV Mass (A-L) LVAd sax Endo Trace LVAend
(A-L) LVAd sax Epi Trace LVAepi
LVLd Apical Distance LVLd Al
LVm a-l
Left Ventricle LVOT LV outflow tract diameter (LVOT Diam) Distance LVOT D
Outflow Tract LVOT A


Input Type
Aorta and Left Aorta/LA Aortic diameter (AO Diam) Distance AO D

Atrium Aortic planimetry (AV Planimetry) Distance AVplan
Aortic valve opening (AV Open) Distance AV Op
Diameter of Sinus of Valsava (Sin Val Diam) Distance SValDi
Sinotubular junction diameter (Sinotub Junct Diam) Distance StJunD
Ascending aorta diameter (Asc Ao Diam) Distance AsAoD
Aortic arch diameter (Ao Arch Diam) Distance AoArD
Ascending aorta inner edge (Asc Ao Inner Edge) Distance AsAoIE
Left atrium diameter (LA Diam) Distance LAdiam
AVA (D)
AVA i
LA/Ao
Right Ventricle Right Ventricle Basal RVb diameter - Diastole (RV Diam basal d) Distance RVDbd
(RV) Medium RV diameter - Diastole (RV Diam mid d) Distance RVDmd
Maximum RV axis in 4 AC - Diastole (RV L Axis d) Distance RVlaxd
RV area - Diastole (RV Area d) Trace RVAd
RV area - Systole (RV Area s) Trace RVAs
RV diameter - Diastole (RVIDd) Distance RVIDd
RV area (RV Area) Trace RVarea
RV long axis (RV Length) Distance RV lgth
% RVfac
RV/LVd
RV Vol
RVOT and RVOT/PA Pulmonary artery diameter (PA Diam) Distance PAdiam
Pulmonary Artery Pulmonary valve annulus diameter (PV Ann Diam) Distance PVanD
Diameter RVOT diameter (RVOT Diam) Distance RVOTD
PAarea
PVA(D)
RVOTA
Mitral Valve MV Mitral annulus diameter (MV An Diam) Distance MVanD

Mitral annulus area (MV An Area) Trace MVanA
Mitral Planimetry (MV Planimetry) Trace MVplan
Mitral Valve Area MVA (VTI) Refer to Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler - -
Left Atrium Volume LA Volume (BP) Left atrium area - 4AC (LA Area A4C) Trace LAA4C
(Simpson - Biplane) (LA Vol (BP)) Left atrium area - A2C (LA Area A2C) Trace LAA2C
Left atrium length (LA Length) Distance LA Lng
LA Vol
LAsVi
LA Maj
LA Min
Left Atrium Volume LA Volume (SP) Left atrium area - 4AC (LA Area A4C) Trace LAA4C
(Simpson - Single (LA Vol (SP)) Left atrium length (LA Length) Distance LA Lng
Biplane) LA Vol
LAsV i
LA Maj
LA Min
PISA (Mitral) PISA MR Refer to Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler - -
PISA (Aorta) PISA AR Refer to Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler - -
Cardiac Output - CO (Ao) Refer to Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler - -

Aorta
AO Effective Valve AVA (VTI) Refer to Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler - -

Area
Cardiac Output - CO (LVOT) Refer to Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler - -

LVOT
Cardiac Output - CO (Pulm Flow) Refer to Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler - -

Pulm
Qp/Qs Qp/Qs Refer to Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler - -


Input Type
Inferior Vena Cava IVC Inferior vena cava - Maximum diameter (IVC max Diam) Distance IVCmax
Inferior vena cava - Minimum diameter (IVC min Diam) Distance IVCmin
IVC S i
IVC C i
MEASUREMENTS
Right Atrium RA Volume (SP) Right atrium area (RAA (SP)) Trace RAA sp
(Simpson - Single (RA Vol (SP)) Right atrium length (RAL (SP)) Distance RAL sp
Plane) RAV sp
Right Atrium (Area- RA Volume (A-L) Right atrium area (RA Area AL) Trace RAA AL
Lenght) (RA Vol (A-L)) Right atrium length (RA Leng AL) Distance RAL AL
RAV AL
Relative Wall Relative Wall Interventricular septum - Diastole (IVSd) Distance IVSd
Thickness Thickness LV diameter - Diastole (LVIDd) Distance LVIDd
(RWT) Posterior wall - Diastole (LVPWd) Distance LVPWd
RWT
Left Atrium Volume LA Volume MOD Left atrium area - 4AC (LAAreaA4C) Trace LAA4C
(Simpson - Biplane BP Left atrium area - A2C (LAAreaA2C) Trace LAA2C
MOD) (LAV BP) Left atrium major axis (LA Major Ax) Distance LA Maj
Left atrium minor axis (LA Minor Ax) Distance LA Min
LA Length
LA i A4C
LA i A2C
LA Vol 4C
LA Vol 2C
LA Vol BP
LA Vol i 4C
LA Vol i 2C
LA Vol i BP
PISA Tricuspid PISA TR Refer to Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler - -

Regurgitation (PISA TR)
a. On the contrary of the Simpson Biplane and Simpson Single Plane methods, the results are calculated gradually when the measurements are
taken for each cardiac view without the need to complete all measurements.
b. RV: Right Ventricle

Cardiac Advanced Measurements in M-

Mode
Table 8-5: Cardiac and Pediatric Cardiac Advanced Measurements in M-Mode

Input Type
Left Ventricle Left Ventricle RVa Diameter - Diastole (RVIDd) Distance RVIDd
(LV) Distance IVSd
IVb Septum - Diastole (IVSd)
Distance LVIDd
LVc Diameter - Diastole (LVIDd) Distance LVPWd
Post wall - Diastole (LVPWd) Distance IVSs
IV Septum - Systole (IVSs) Distance LVIDs
LV Diameter - Systole (LVIDs) Distance LVPWs
Post wall - Systole (LVPWs) Distance S-PWD
Septum-Posterior Wall delay (Sept-PW Delay) Velocity FloPrV
Flow Propagation Velocity (Flow Prop Vel) Time EF
%LV FS
LVEDV
LVESV
SV
SI
HR
HR ecg
CO
CI
%IVS
%PW
LVMass
LVM i
E/Vp
Aorta and Left Aorta/LA Aortic diameter (Ao Diam) Distance Ao D

Atrium Left atrium diameter (LA) Distance LA
Aortic valve opening (AV Open) Distance AV Op
Ejection time (LVET) Time LVET
Ao PEP Time Ao PEP
PEP/ET Distance PEP/ET
R-R interval (R-R) R-R
AO Coaptation line (AV Coapt Line) AVcoap
LA/Ao
AV E i
Mitral Valve MV E Septum (EPSS) Distance EPSS

EF Slope (E-F Slope) Velocity E-F Slp
Displacement of the mitral annulus (MAPSE) Distance MAPSE
Tricuspid TV Displacement of the tricuspid annulus (TAPSE) Distance TAPSE
Inferior Vena IVC IVC max Diam (IVC max Diam) Distance IVCmax
Cava IVC min Diam (IVC min Diam) Distance IVCmin
IVC S i
IVC C i
Valve Event Event timing Mitral valve - Opening (MV Open) Distance MV Op
Markers Mitral valve - Closure (MV Close) Distance MV Cls
Aortic valve - Opening (AV Open) Distance AV Op
Aortic valve- Closure (AV Close) Distance AV Cls
a. RV: Right Ventricle

b. IV: Intravascular Septum
c. LV: Left Ventricle

Cardiac Advanced Measurements in

Doppler
Table 8-6: Cardiac and Pediatric Cardiac Advanced Measurements in Doppler
MEASUREMENTS
Input Type
Mitral Valve MV Mitral flow profile (MV VTI) Profile MV VTI

Mitral peak velocity - E wave (MV E Vel) Caliper MVEVp
Mitral peak velocity - A wave (MV A Vel) Caliper MVAVp
Mitral PHT (MV PHT) Caliper MV Pht
Mitral E wave acceleration time (MV Acc Time) Time MV AT
Mitral E wave deceleration time (MV Dec Time) Time MV DT
Mitral isovolumetric relaxation time (IVRT) Time IVRT
Mitral isovolumetric contraction time (IVCT) Time IVCT
A wave duration (A Duration) Time A Dur
Ejection time (LVET) Time LVET
MVEGp
MVAGp
MVVmx
MVGmx
MVVmn
MGmn
MVApht
MV E/A
LIMP
Mitral MR Mitral regurgitation velocity (MR Vmax) Caliper MR Vp

Regurgitation dP/dt (MR dP/dt) Time dP/dt
MR Gp
Mitral PISA MR Mitral aliasing velocity (MR Alias Vel) Distance MRalsV
Regurgitation Mitral regurgitations radius (MR Radius) Distance MR rad
(PISA) Regurgitation profile (MR VTI) Profile MR VTI
MR Vp
MRflow
MR ero
MR Vol
Mitral TV Mitral TDI Mitral peak velocity - E’ wave (e’) Caliper e’

(MA TDI) Mitral peak velocity - A’ wave (a’) Caliper a’
Septal E’ Wave (e’ Sept) Caliper e’ Sept
Septal A’ Wave (a’ Sept) Caliper a’ Sept
Lateral E’ Wave (e’ Lat) Caliper e’ Lat
Lateral A’ Wave (a’ Lat) Caliper a’ Lat
Mitral isovolumetric relaxation time (IVRT_tdi) Time IVRTtdi
Mitral isovolumetric contraction time (IVCT_tdi) Time IVCTtdi
Time to onset – 4AC septum (T to Onset A4C-S) Time TO4C-S
Time to onset – 4AC posterior wall (T to Onset A4C-LW) Time TO4clw
Time to peak – 4AC septum (T to Peak A4C-S) Time TP4-S
Time to peak – 4AC lateral wall (T to Peak A4C-LW) Time TP4-lw
Time to onset – 2AC anterior wall (T to Onset A2C AW) Time TO2AW
Time to onset – 2AC inferior wall (T to Onset A2C-IW) Time TO2IW
Time to peak – 2AC anterior wall (T to Peak A2C-AW) Time TP2AW
Time to peak – 2AC Inferior wall (T to Peak A2C-IW) Time TP2IW
Ejection time (LVET_tdi) Time LVETtdi
e’/a’
E/e’
e’/a’ Se
e’/a’ lat
E/e’ spt
E/e’ Lat
LIMPtdi


Input Type
Mitral Annulus Mitral Annulus Lateral S’ Wave (s’ Lat) Caliper s’ Lat
Tissue Doppler TDI Lateral E’ Wave (e’ Lat) Caliper e’ Lat
Septal S’ Wave (s’ Sept) Caliper s’ Sept
LVET flow profile (LVET_tdi) Time LVETtdi
Time to peak – 4AC septum (T to Peak A4C-S) Time TP4-lw
Time to peak – 4AC lateral wall (T to Peak A4C-LW) Time TP4C-S
LIMPtdi
e’/a’ lat
E/e’ Lat
E/e’ spt
e’/a’ Se
e’ Avg
a’ Avg
e’/a’ Av
E/e’ Av
Mitral Valve Area MVA (VTI) Mitral Valve flow profile (MV VTI) Profile LVOT D
LVOT flow profile (LVOT VTI) Profile MV VTI
LVOT diameter (LVOT Diam) Distance LVotVTI
MVmxV
LVotVp
LVOT A
MV Pe i
MVA vti
MVAivti
MVAmx
MVA i m
Aorta Aorta Aortic Valve AV VTI Profile AV VTI

AVVmx
AVVmn
AVGmx
AVGmn
AR Vp
Ao AT
LVET
Ao PEP
LVotVp
PA PEP
DV i
IVMD
Aortic Effective AVA (VTI) Aortic flow profile (AV VTI) Profile AV VTI
Valve Area Aortic peak velocity (AV Vmax) Caliper AV Vp
LVOT flow profile (LVOT VTI) Profile LVotVTI
LVOT peak velocity (LVOT Vmax) Caliper LVotVp
LVOT diameter (LVOT Diam) Distance LVOT D
LVOT A
Ao Pe i
AVA vti
AVAi vt
AVAmx
AVAi m
Aortic AR AO regurgitation PHT (AR PHT) Caliper AR PHT

Regurgitation
Descending Ao desc Descending aorta systolic peak velocity (Ao desc Vmax) Caliper AoDVp
Aorta Patent ductus artery (Pat Duct A) Caliper PDA
AoDGp


Input Type
PISA (Aorta) PISA AR Aorta aliasing velocity (AR Aliass Vel) - ARalsV
Aorta regurgitation radius (AR Flow) Distance ARflow
Aorta regurgitation profile (AR VTI) Profile AR VTI
AR Rad
AR Vp
MEASUREMENTS
AR ero
AR Vol
LVOT VTI LVOT VTI LVOT peak velocity (LVOT Vmax) Profile LVotVp
LVOT flow profile (LVOT VTI) Caliper LVotVTI
LVVmn
LvotGp
LVGmn
Tricuspid Valve TV Tricuspid flow profile (TV VTI) Profile TV VTI

Tricuspid velocity E wave (TV E Vel) Caliper TVEVp
Tricuspid velocity A wave (TV A Vel) Caliper TVAVp
TVEDT
TV IRT
TVEGp
TVAGp
TVVmx
TVGmx
TVVmn
TVGmn
TV E/A
Tricuspid TR Tricuspid regurgitation velocity (TR Vmax) Caliper TR Vp

Regurgitation TR Gp
RAP
RVSP
Pulmonary Vein Pulmonary Vein Pulmonary veins systolic velocity (PVein S Vel) Caliper PVe Vs
(P Vein) Pulmonary veins diastolic velocity (PVein D Vel) Caliper PVe Vd
Pulmonary veins atrial velocity (PVe Atrial V) Caliper PVe Vat
A wave duration (A Duration) Time A Dur
PVe s/d
AP-AM
Pulmonary Aa Pulmonary A Pulmonary flow profile (PA VTI) Profile PA VTI

Pulmonary peak velocity (PA Vmax) Caliper PA Vp
Aortic pre-ejection time (Ao PEP) Time Ao PEP
Pulmonary pre-ejection time (PA PEP) Time PA PEP
PAVmn
PA Gm
PAGp
PAsP
PA AT
IVMD
Pulmonary PR Pulmonary regurgitation PHT (PR PHT) Caliper PR PHT

Regurgitation Pulmonary protodiastolic velocity (PR Vmax) Caliper PR Vp
Pulmonary end-diastolic velocity (PR end diast Vmax) Caliper PR edV
PR Gp
PR Ged
Cardiac Output - CO (LVOT) LVOT flow profile (LVOT VTI) Profile LVotVTI
LVOT R-R interval (R-R) Time R-R
HR
LVOT A
SV
SI
CO
CI


Input Type
Cardiac Output - CO (Ao) Aortic flow profile (AV VTI) Profile AV VTI
Aorta R-R interval (R-R) Time R-R
AO diameter (Ao Diam) Distance Ao D
HR
AVA (D)
SV
SI
CO
CI
Cardiac Output - CO (Pulm flow) Pulmonary flow profile (PA VTI) Profile PA VTI
Pulmonary R-R interval (R-R) Time R-R
Pulmonary diameter (PA Diam) Distance PAdiam
HR
PAarea
SV
SI
CO
CI
Qp/Qs Qp/Qs Pulmonary flow profile (PA VTI) Profile PA VTI

R-R interval (R-R) Time R-R
Pulmonary diameter (PA Diam) Distance PAdiam
LVOT flow profile (LVOT VTI) Profile LVotVTI
R-R interval (R-R) Time R-R
HR
PAarea
SV
SI
CO
CI
Qp/Qs
LVOT A
Valve Event Event timing Mitral valve opening (MV Open) Time MV Op
Markers Mitral valve closure (MV Close) Time MV Cls
Aortic valve opening (AV Open) Time AV Op
Aortic valve closure (AV Close) Time AV Cls
Coronary Cardiac Coronary Proximal left anterior descending coronary artery - Rest Distance RLADP
Cardiac (Rest LAD Prox)
(Cor Card) Medial left anterior descending coronary artery - Rest (Rest Distance RLADM
LAD Mid)
Distal left anterior descending coronary artery - Rest (Rest Distance RLADD
LAD Dist)
Proximal left anterior descending coronary artery - Post Distance PLADP
(Post LAD Prox)
Medial left anterior descending coronary artery - Post (Post Distance PLADM
LAD Mid)
Distal left anterior descending coronary artery - Post (Post Distance PLADD
LAD Dist)
CFR Pr
CFR Mi
CFR Di
Tricuspid Tricuspid TV s’ Caliper TV s’

Annulus Doppler Annulus TDI TV e’ Caliper TV e’
(Tric-TDI) TV a’ Caliper TV a’
TV e’/a’
TV E/e’
PISA Tricuspid PISA TR Tricuspid Regurgitation Alias Velocity (TR Alias Vel) Caliper TRalsV
Regurgitation Tricuspid Regurgitation Radius (TR Radius) Distance TR Rad
Tricuspid Regurgitation profile (TR VTI) Profile TR VTI
TR Vp
TRflow
TR ERO
TR Vol


Input Type
Pulmonary PCWP Mitral peak velocity - E wave (MV E Vel) Caliper MVEVp
Capillary Wedge Lateral E’ Wave (e’ Lat) Caliper e’ Lat
Pressure PCWP
Mitral Annulus Mitral Annulus Lateral S’ Wave (s’ Lat) Caliper s’ Lat
MEASUREMENTS
Tissue Doppler TDI Lateral E’ Wave (e’ Lat) Caliper e’ Lat
Septal S’ Wave (s’ Sept) Caliper s’ Sept
LVET flow profile (LVET_tdi) Time LVEtdi
Time to peak – 4AC septum (T to Peak A4C-S) Time TP4-lw
Time to peak – 4AC lateral wall (T to Peak A4C-LW) Time TP4-S
LIMPtdi
e’/a’ lat
E/e’ Lat
E/e’ spt
e’/a’ Se
e’ Avg
a’ Avg
s’ Avg
e’/a’ Av
E/e’ Av
a. The group requires to enter the pressure gradient (5, 10 or 15): refer further in this section for the formula of pres-
sure.
* means that the measurement is not directly measured, but it is derived from RVPs measurement performed in Tri-
cuspid Regurgitation group.

Automatic Ejection Fraction

Automatic Ejection Fraction (Auto EF) is an automatic tool to calculate the
Ejection Fraction on:
 frozen clips acquired with the ECG trace,
 archived clips acquired with the ECG trace and saved in raw
data format.
NOTE The Automatic Ejection Fraction calculation is available in Adult Cardiac

application and it requires a specific licence (Auto EF licence).
NOTE The Automatic Ejection Fraction calculation strongly depends on the

quality of the 2D images and on their temporal resolution (frame rate).
WARNING Values of ejection fraction obtained by automatic measurements are

intended as a suggestion and should not be considered sufficient to make
a diagnosis.
NOTE Improper or suboptimal acquisition of apical four chamber (A4C) and

apical two chamber (A2C) views might lead to significant underestimation
of the Left Ventricular End Diastolic and End Systolic Volumes.
NOTE During imaging acquisition make sure to avoid plane positioning errors,
which can lead to chamber foreshortening.
NOTE Please refer to Tab.1 Recommendation for the echocardiographic

assessment of LV size and function “Recommendations for Cardiac
Chamber Quantification by Echocardiography in Adults: An Update from
the American Society of Echocardiography and the European Association
of Cardiovascular Imaging” Roberto M. Lang et al, J Am Soc Echocardiogr
2015; 28:1-39.

How to perform an Auto EF calculation

The Automatic Ejection Fraction calculation can be performed both on frozen
and on archived clips.
The Automatic Ejection Fraction calculation can be performed only on apical
four chamber (A4C) and two chamber (A2C) views.
MEASUREMENTS
Auto EF calculation on frozen clips
Procedure 1. Acquire a Cardiac image with ECG trace;
2. Press FREEZE;
4. Press M EASURE;
5. Select the tab VOLUME (LVEF) on the touchscreen;
6. Select AUTO EF - BIPLANE as measurement;
7. Tap A4C or A2C to select the correct projection;
8. After a short processing time the Automatic Ejection
Fraction calculation is done. Refer to the paragraph “After
Calculation” for information on how to correctly manage the
results.
Auto EF calculation on archived clips
Procedure 1. Select from the archive a clip acquired with the ECG trace
and saved in raw data format (those clips are identified as
thumbnails with green counter and heart superimposed);
3. Press EDIT;
4. Press M EASURE;
5. Select the tab VOLUME (LVEF) on the touchscreen;
6. Select AUTO EF - BIPLANE as measurement;
7. Tap A4C or A2C to select the correct projection;
8. After a short processing time the Automatic Ejection
Fraction calculation is done. Refer to the paragraph “After
Calculation” for information on how to correctly manage the
results.

After Calculation
When the Ejection Fraction has been automatically calculated, the results are
displayed on the left side of the screen, the End Diastolic frame automatically
contoured is also displayed and the touchscreen provides the following
controls.
Fig. 8-2: Automatic Ejection Fraction calculation
NOTE The End Diastolic frame has to be selected carefully before activating Auto
EF. An inadequate selection of the End Diastolic frame can lead to
underestimation of End Diastolic volumes and EF.
NOTE Carefully verify the endocardial border tracking and make sure that
papillary muscles are excluded from the cavity in the tracing. In case of
incorrect or suboptimal endocardial border tracking, adjust the tracking
point and process again the data.
A4C Tap the key to update the calculation for apical four chamber (A4C) or two
A2C chamber (A2C) views.
ED moves the clip to the End Diastolic frame.
ES moves the clip to the End Systolic frame.
MANUAL CONTOUR allows to trace the contour manually.

MODIFY CONTOUR- If the contour automatically traced by the system for End Diastolic and End
ED Systolic is not satisfying, you can modify it. Tap ED to move to the End
MODIFY CONTOUR- Diastolic frame then tap MODIFY CONTOUR-ED to modify the End Diastolic
ES
contour. Tap ES to move to the End Systolic frame then tap MODIFY
CONTOUR-ES to modify the End Systolic contour. With the trackball as
pointer select an anchor point on the edge of the wall (small squares) and drag
MEASUREMENTS
it in the new position. Calculation is immediately updated.
MODIFY FRAME-ED If the frames automatically selected by the system for End Diastolic and End
MODIFY FRAME-ES Systolic are not satisfying, you can change them. Tap ED then move to the
End Diastolic frame you want to select and tap MODIFY FRAME-ED to set it
as End Diastolic. Tap ES then move to the End Systolic frame you want to
select and tap MODIFY FRAME-ES to set it as End Systolic. Calculation is
updated in real-time discharging frames not included in the new defined clip.
Tap A4C or A2C to repeat the calculation including them again.
DUAL displays both End Diastolic and End Systolic frames side by side.
PLAY PLAY and STOP share the same button. PLAY shows the sequence of stored
STOP images in cine mode while STOP stops the cine presentation of the clip.
FRAME Rotate the knob to move the clips frame by frame. You can scroll the frame
with the trackball.
APPROVE exits the calculation attaching the calculated parameters to the report.
DISCARD resets the calculation.


Chapter
9 - Gynecologic
9
Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter lists all the Advanced Measurements available for the
Gynecology application.
Application Data
Fig. 9-1: Gynecology Patient ID Page
Table 9-1: Additional data in Gynecology Patient ID page
Field Description
LMP Last Menstrual Period (date of the last menstruation)

Once input, the system automatically calculates the
cycle’s day.
POST MENO-PAUSE If in menopause.

GYNECOLOGIC MEASUREMENTS
Gynecologic Advanced Measurements in

B-Mode
Table 9-2: Gynecologic Advanced Measurements in B-Mode

Input Type
Uterus Volume Uterus Volume Length (L) Vertex L

Volume
Endometrium length Endometrium Endometrium (Endom) Distance Endom
Cervix Length Cervix Length Cervix Length (Cerv L) Vertex Cerv L
Fibroma Mass Fibroma # Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Righta Ovary Volume R Ovary Volume Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Righta Follicles Diameter R Follicles Diam RAb (RA) Distance RA
Righta Mass R Mass # Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Bladder Volume Bladder Volume Diameter 1 (Diam1) Distance Diam1

Diameter 2 (Diam2) Distance Diam2
Volume

b. Many diameters can be measured at the same time, each of them is labeled with a different letter
Gynecologic Advanced Measurements in

Doppler
Table 9-3: Gynecologic Advanced Measurements for the lower limbs in Doppler

Input Type
Righta Uterine Artery R Uterine A VTI VTIb Profile VTI

VTI
Righta Ovarian Artery R Ovary A VTI VTIb Profile VTI

VTI


Input Type
Righta Uterine Artery R Uterine A PSVc Velocity PSV

Peak Velocity Velocity EDV
EDVd
Righta Ovarian Artery R Ovary A PSVc Velocity PSV
MEASUREMENTS
Peak Velocity Velocity EDV
EDVd

b. VTI = Velocity Time Integral
c. PSV = Peak Systolic Velocity
d. EDV = End Diastolic Velocity
Gynecology Worksheet Organization

Here are described the additional fields dedicated to the Gynecology
Worksheet.
Table 9-4: Evaluations in Gynecology
Group Parameter Evaluation
UTERUS VOLUME Uterus position Median, L Lateroflexed, R Lateroflexed
Uterus version Normoflexed, Retroflexed, Movable
FIBROMA Mass kind Fibroma, Adenomyosis, Endometrial polyp,

Sarcoma
Characteristics Intramural, Subserous, Submucous, Pediculate,

Intracavitary, Intramural-subserous, Intramural-
submucous, Subserous -submucous
Site Anterior, Posterior, L Lateral, R Lateral, Fundus,

Istmic
OVARY VOLUME Corpus Luteum Yes, No
OVARY MASS Characteristics Unilocular, Unilocular-solid, Multilocular,

Multilocular-solid, Solid



Chapter
10 - Obstetric
10
Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter lists all the Advanced Measurements available for the Obstetric
application.
Refer to “Obstetrics and Gynecology Section” for tables and formula used in
Obstetric advanced measurements.
Application Data
Fig. 10-1: Obstetrics Patient ID Page
Table 10-1: Additional data in Obstetric Patient ID page
Field
LMP Last Menstrual Period (date of the last menstruation)

DOC Date of conception. It can be set as an alternative to LMP by
checking the corresponding radio button
DATE OF FIRST DGA Date when the first DGA has been estimated

OBSTETRIC MEASUREMENTS
Field
FIRST DGA Diagnostic gestational age estimated at the first exam

EDD Expected Delivery Date based on LMP or DGA values
GA Gestational Age based on LMP or DGA values
GRAVIDA Number of pregnancies
PARA Number of births
ABORTA Number of aborta
ECTOPIC Ectopic pregnancies
“Gestational Age By” Area

The Expected Delivery Date and Gestational Age can be automatically
estimated either from LMP/DOC date or from First DGA: the two radio
buttons, displayed on the left side of this area, alternatively enable one of two
criteria.
Once selected the criteria and input the data, the system automatically
calculates both the expected delivery date and the diagnostic gestational age.
When the LMP/DOC criteria is selected, both EDD and DGA parameters
can be directly entered: MyLab accordingly updates the LMP/DOC date.
When the First DGA criteria is selected, LMP/DOC date can be directly
entered by the operator: this date is shown in the report but not used for the
estimation of both EDD and GA parameters.
Formulas for Expected Delivery Date (EDD)

From LMP EDD = LMP (date) + 280 days (or 290 days depending on the setting)
GA = Exam date - LMP (date)
From DOC EDD = DOC (date) + 280 days (or 290 days depending on the setting) - 14
days
GA = Exam date - DOC (date) + 14 days
From DGA GA = Exam date - First DGA date + First DGA

EDD = Exam date + 280 days (or 290 days depending on the setting)
- First DGA

Fetal Age and Fetal Growth tables bibliography

Both fetal age (FA) and fetal growth (FG) can be estimated basing on
different bibliographic references that can be selected in the obstetrics
measurement configuration menu. MyLab provides the following references
for the listed parameters:
MEASUREMENTS
Table 10-2: FG and FA Table bibliography for B-Mode measurements
FG Table FA Table
Measurement
Bibliography Bibliography
BPD Hadlock84 Hadlock 84

Biparietal Diam CFEF Hadlock
Jeanty Jeanty
Chitty O-O Hansmann
Nicolaides Chitty O-O
JSUM 2001 Rempen
Osaka U Osaka U
Merz JSUM 2001
Paladini Merz
CFEF 06
HC Chitty Hadlock 84
Head Circumference Hadlock84 Hansmann
CFEF Chitty
Jeanty Merz
Nicolaides
Merz
Paladini
CFEF 06
AC Hadlock84 Hadlock 84
Abdominal Circumf CFEF Hansmann
Jeanty JSUM 2001
Chitty Merz
Nicolaides
JSUM 2001
Merz
Paladini
CFEF 06
FL Hadlock84 Hadlock 84
Femur Length CFEF Jeanty
Jeanty Hansmann
Nicolaides Chitty
Chitty JSUM 2001
JSUM 2001 Osaka U
Osaka U Merz
Merz
Paladini
CFEF 06
OFD Jeanty Hansmann

Occipit Frontal Diam Nicolaides
Chitty
Merz

FG Table FA Table
Measurement
Bibliography Bibliography
CRL Hadlock Hadlock

Crown-Rump Length Osaka U Osaka U
Hansmann Hansmann
JSUM 2001 JSUM 2001
Robinson Rempen
Robinson
GS Rempen Hansmann
Gest Sac Diam Rempen
HL Jeanty Jeanty
Humerus Length Osaka U Osaka U
Merz
Paladini
UL Jeanty Jeanty
Ulna Length Merz
Paladini
TL Jeanty Jeanty
Tibia Length Merz
Paladini
TCD Goldstein Goldstein

Trnsv cereb Diam Nicolaides Hill
AFI Moore Cayle -

Amniotic Fluid Index
FTA Osaka U Osaka U

Fetal Trunk Sect A
Table 10-3: FG Table bibliography for Doppler measurements
FG Table
Measurement Parameter
Bibliography
PI Bahlmann
Ebbing
Mid Cerebral A JSUM
Middle Cerebral Artery
RI Bahlmann
JSUM 2001
PI Merz
JSUM 2001
Umbilical A Ebbing
Umbilical Artery
RI JSUM 2001
Kurmanavicius
Merz
Aorta PSV Rizzo
Pulmunary A PSV Rizzo

Pulmunary Artery

FG Table
Measurement Parameter
Bibliography
PI Merz
Uterine Gomez
Uterine Artery
RI Merz
MEASUREMENTS
Estimated Fetal Weight and Growth
Fetal Weight can be automatically estimated by the system when at least two
parameters are measured.
The table below lists the parameters that can be used for the estimation of the
fetal weight and the corresponding bibliographic reference
Parameter Bibliography
AC, FL Hadlock 1
HC, AC, FL Hadlock 2
BPD, AC, FL Hadlock 3
AC, FL, HC, BPD Hadlock 4
BPD, TTD Hansmann 86
BPD, MAD, FL Persson 1
BPD, MAD Persson 2
AC, BPD Shepard 82
The estimated fetal weight growth is calculated basing on Hadlock reference.

Touchscreen Layout in Fetal Age and Fetal Growth
The touchscreen displays the list of measurable parameters, correlated to their
bibliographic references.
The bibliographic references associated to a
parameter are indicated on the touchscreen button,
below the parameter name: the first reference is for
fetal growth, the second for fetal age.
Once the measurement has been completed, MyLab shows on the left side of
the screen the following values:
 the Estimated Fetal Weight (EFW), when the required
parameters have been measured.

 the diagnostic gestational age (GA) estimated according to

the criteria set on the Patient ID page.
 the parameter under measure.
 when available, the gestational age based on the set reference.
 when available, the ranking (RK) based on the set reference.
FETUS allows the user to associate the measurement to different fetus.
SIDE selects the desired side.
Obstetric Advanced Measurements in B-

Mode
Fetal Biometry / First Trim Measures
The gestational age can be estimated basing on different bibliographic
references that can be selected in the obstetrics measurement configuration
menu. MyLab provides the following references for the listed parameters:
Table 10-4: Obstetric Advanced Measurements in B-Mode

Biparietal Diameter Biparietal Diam BPDa Distance BPD

(BPD) GA
%RK
Head Circumference Head Circumference HCa Ellipse HC

(HC) GA
%RK
Abdominal Circumference Abdominal Circumf ACa Ellipse AC

(AC) GA
%RK
Femur Length Femur Length FLa Distance FL

(FL) GA
%RK
Occipit Frontal Diameter Occipit Frontal Diam OFD Distance OFD

(OFD) GA
%RK
Crown-Rump Length Crown-Rump Length CRLa Distance CRL

(CRL) GA
%RK
Gestational Sac Diameter Gest Sac Diam GS Distance GS

(GS) GA
Humerus Length Humerus Length HLa Distance HL

(HL) GA
%RK


Ulna Length Ulna Length ULa Distance UL

(UL) GA
%RK
Tibia Length Tibia Length TLa Distance TL
MEASUREMENTS
(TL) GA
%RK
Transverse Cerebellum Diameter Transv Cereb Diam TCD Distance TCD

(TCD) GA
%RK
Amniotic Fluid Index Amniotic Fluid Index Quadrant 1 (Q1) Distance Q1

(AFI) Quadrant 2 (Q2) Distance Q2
Quadrant 3 (Q3) Distance Q3
Quadrant 4 (Q4) Distance Q4
AFI
%RK
Fibula Length Fibula Length Fib La Distance Fib L

(Fib L)
Radio Length Radio Length RLa Distance RL

(RL)
Transverse Adbominal Diameter Transv Adb Diam TAD Distance TAD

(TAD)
Cisterna Magna Cisterna Magna CM Distance CM

(CM)
APTDxTTD APTDxTTD APTD Distance APTD

TTD Distance TTD
APxT
Fetal Trunk Sect A Fetal Trunk Sect A FTA Ellipse FTA

(FTA) GA
%RK
Binocular Distance Binocular Distance BOD Distance BOD

(BOD)
Transverse Trunk Diameter Transv Trunk Diam TTD Distance TTD

(TTD)
Anterior Posterior Trunk Ant Post Trunk Diam APTD Distance APTD
Diameter (APTD)
Nuchal Translucency - manual Nuchal Translucency NT Distance NT

(NT)
Nuchal Translucency - automatic Auto NT AutoNT - AutoNT
Intracranial Translucency - Intracranial IT Distance IT

manual Translucency
(IT)
Intracranial Translucency - Auto IT AutoIT - AutoIT

automatic
Anterior-Posterior Adbominal Ant-Post Abd Diam APAD Distance APAD

Diameter (APAD)
Clavicula Length Clavicula Length Clav L Distance Clav L

(Clav L)
Vertebra Length Length of Vertebra Vert L Distance Vert L

(Vert L)


Foot Length Foot Length Foot L Distance Foot L

(Foot L)
Nose Bone Length Nose Bone Length NBL Distance NBL

(NB)
Thoracic Circumference Thoracic TC Ellipse TC

Circumference
(TC)
Nuchal Fold Nuchal Fold NF Distance NF

(NF)
Lateral Ventricle Lateral Ventricle Lat V Distance Lat V

(Lat V)
Interorbital Diameter Interorbital Diam IOD Distance IOD

(IOD)
Outer Orbital Diameter Outer Orbital Diam OOD Distance OOD

(OOD)
Maximum Amniotic Diameter Max Amniotic Diam Max AD Distance Max AD

(Max AD)
Ear Length Ear Length Ear L Distance Ear L

(Ear L)
a. The input can be automatic or manual, refer to the Obstetric Measurement Set Up paragraph further in this chapter
Ratios Both in fetal age and in fetal growth MyLab automatically calculates the
following ratios, if the required parameters have been previously measured.
Ratio
BPD/OFD (Cephalic Index)
FL/BPD
BPD/FL
FL/AC
HC/AC
Amniotic Fluid In fetal growth MyLab allows the user to calculate the Amniotic Fluid Index
Index (AFI) that requires four quadrants to be measured. The system provides the
following reference:
Parameter Bibliography
AFI Moore

APxT If both APTD and TTD distances are performed, the APxT is calculated
using the following formula:
APxT = APTD  TTD
Nuchal Both in fetal age and in fetal growth MyLab allows to measure the Nuchal
Translucency Translucency (NT) both in manual and automatic way.
MEASUREMENTS
While manual NT is a simple measure of distance, the Automatic Nuchal
Translucency (Auto NT) measurement is a semi-automated algorithm able to
detect, in real time, the Nuchal Borders lying inside a Region of Interest (ROI)
and calculate the most suitable maximum vertical distance.
Detected NT borders are highlighted with an orange overlay only when the
system evaluates a good level of confidence in terms of shape (regular,...).
If the automatic detection is good, the measurement can be added to the
report pressing EN TER .
If the automatic detection is difficult, you can switch to the manual NT
measurement pressing MANUAL.
In manual NT measurement two different calipers can be used: +...+ caliper
or >...< caliper. You can select your preference in the advanced section of the
OB measure editor.
The following are the rules to obtain a good Auto NT measurement:
Procedure  Follow AIUM/FMF guidelines: sagittal section, fetus spine
on the far field, NT borders perpendicular to Ultrasound
insonation.
 Try to eliminate gray artifacts in the NT liquid (that must be
as dark as possible).
 Position the ROI only on areas where the NT borders are
well displayed.
 Compensate the effect of noise on border detection by
SENSITIVITY.
A level of the resulting measurement is the average of both diameters.

Auto NT detection method is compliant with the following clinical
guidelines:
 K. Nicolaides. The 11-13+6 weeks scan. (Fetal Medicine
Foundation, London 2004).
 AIUM Practice Guideline for the Performance of Obstetric
Ultrasound Examinations (2013).

and it can be performed following two methods that can be selected at the
start of measurement:
 inner - inner
 inner - middle.
WARNING Auto NT measurement results are intend as a suggestion and should not be
considered sufficient to make a diagnosis.
Intracranial Both in fetal age and in fetal growth MyLab allows to measure the Intracranial
Translucency Translucency (IT) both in manual and automatic way.
The manual IT is a simple measure of the distance between the anterior and
posterior echogenic borders of the fourth cerebral ventricle.
The Automatic Intracranial Translucency (Auto IT) measurement is a semi-
automated algorithm able to detect, in real time, the Intracranial Borders lying
inside a Region of Interest (ROI) and calculate the most suitable maximum
vertical distance.
Detected IT borders are highlighted with an orange overlay only when the
system evaluates a good level of confidence in terms of shape (regular,...).
If the automatic detection is good, the measurement can be added to the
report pressing EN TER .
If the automatic detection is difficult, you can switch to the manual IT
measurement pressing MANUAL.
In manual IT measurement two different calipers can be used: +...+ caliper
or >...< caliper. You can select your preference in the advanced section of the
OB measure editor.
The following are the rules to obtain a good Auto IT measurement:
Procedure  Take an image in mid-sagittal plane with fetus perpendicular
to Ultrasound insonation.
 Try to eliminate gray artifacts in the IT liquid (that must be as
dark as possible).
 Position the ROI only on areas where the IT borders are well
displayed.
 Compensate the effect of noise on border detection by
SENSITIVITY.
A level of the resulting measurement is the average of both diameters.

WARNING Auto IT measurement results are intend as a suggestion and should not be
considered sufficient to make a diagnosis.

Mother Measurements
Refer to the chapter on Gynecological Advanced Measurements for further
information about these measurements.
Obstetric Advanced Measurements in M-
MEASUREMENTS
Mode
Fetal Biometry / First Trim
MyLab allows to measure the fetal heart rate, averaging it on more cycles that
can be set. The calculation is available both in fetal age and in fetal growth.
Table 10-5: Obstetric Advanced Measurements in M-Mode

Fetal Heart Rate Fetal Heart Rate (Fetal Fetal Heart Rate (Fet HR) Point Fet HR
HR)
Obstetric Advanced Measurements in

Doppler
Fetal Biometry / First Trim
Both in fetal age and in fetal growth the following parameters can be
measured:
Table 10-6: Obstetric Advanced Measurements in Doppler.

Input Type
Middle Cerebral Mid Cerebral A VTIa Profile VTI

Artery VTI
Umbilical Artery VTI Umbilical A VTIa Profile VTI
Aorta VTI Aorta VTIa Profile VTI
Tricuspid Vein VTI TV VTIa Profile VTI
Mitral Vein VTI MV VTIa Profile VTI
Pulmunary Artery VTI Pulmonary A VTIa Profile VTI
Rightb Renal Artery R Renal A VTIa Profile VTI

VTI
Fetal Heart Rate Fetal Heart Rate (Fet HR) Distance Fet HR
(Fetal HR)


Input Type
Rightb Middle R Middle Cerebral VTIa Profile VTI

Cerebral Artery VTI A
Ductus Arteriosus Ductus Arteriosus VTIa Profile VTI
Ductus Venosus Ductus Venosus VTIa Profile VTI
Spiral A Spiral A VTIa Profile VTI
a. VTI = Velocity Time Integral

b. The measurement is bilateral
Mother Measures
Measurements belonging to this group are described in the “Gynecologic
Measurements” chapter.
Obstetric Worksheet Organization

Here are described the additional fields dedicated to the Obstetric Worksheet.
The obstetrical worksheet includes four folders: measurements, graphics,
biophysical profile and survey.
FETUS selects the various fetus and displays the pertaining pages.
When COMPARE is set on ON, the data of the different fetuses are displayed
in a grid-based layout in order to be compared.
Measure Folder
The Measure Folder contains the performed measurements and it is
organized in different sub-folders: B-Mode, M-Mode and Doppler (both fetal
and mother) sub-folders, the calculations sub-folder and the mother
measurements sub-folders.
B-Mode The Patient ID data are displayed in the first row followed by the estimated
fetal weight, when available.
Subsequently the worksheet reports the list of measured parameters and the
corresponding measurements. The last columns display the gestational age
with its range of applicability and its reference and the percentage rank values
with their reference.
When crossed, the AUA (Average Ultrasound Age) column includes the
parameter for the computation of the average ultrasound age. The expected

delivery date estimated from the AUA is displayed in the first row. The AUA
value is displayed in the gestational age graph, available in the Graphics folder.
Calculations The parameter ratios are displayed in this folder.
Graphics Folder
MEASUREMENTS
The performed measurements are displayed on graphs.
The left upper list indicates which parameters can be displayed and their
bibliographic references both for gestational age and for fetal growth; you can
select the desired one. The graphics of the selected parameter and the
corresponding values, displayed below the list, are automatically updated.
The tabs displayed above the graphs allow the user to select the desired
graphic, whether in gestational age or in fetal growth.
The weeks are displayed in the X axis and the selected parameter is in the Y
axis. The continuous line indicates the reference average value, the dotted
lines the standard deviation (or the centiles when in fetal growth).
The dotted vertical line represents the gestational age and the continuous
vertical line represents the average ultrasound age, as indicated in the legenda
shown in the lower right part of the screen. The gestational age is calculated
starting from the set parameter (LMP or FDGA).
Fetal Charts can also be displayed on the touchscreen immediately after a
measurement has been performed tapping OB GRAPH without the need to
access the worksheet.
Fetal Trend
Fetal Trend is a graphic representation of the fetal growing along the whole
gestational period by using measurements performed on different
examinations.
Press TREND to activate Fetal Trend, the examinations used for trend and
belonging to the same patient are loaded and displayed to the bottom left of
the screen in the SELECTION box.
The examinations are listed below with the following parameters:
 Patient name,
 Exam Date,
 LMP Date,
 EDD Date.
Each exam reference can be eliminated from the graph deselecting the related
checkbox.

Fig. 10-2: OB Fetal trend
The X axis displays the weeks while the Y axis the parameter selected in the
upper left part of the screen.
The continuous line indicates the reference average value, the dotted lines the
standard deviation (or the percentiles when in fetal growth). The dotted
vertical line represents the gestational age also displayed at the bottom-right;
the gestational age is calculated starting from the set parameter (LMP or
FDGA).
Biophysical Profile Folder

The biophysical profile allows the user to give a numeric evaluation of the
following fetal characteristics:
 Fetal breathing movement,
 Fetal body movements,
 Fetal tone,
 Fetal reactivity,
 Qualitative AFV (amniotic flow volume) assessment.
The evaluation can be based on the Manning method or on the Vintzileos
method.

Survey Folder
The Survey Folder contains a list of predefined observations for both fetuses
and mother:
 Fetal Heart,
MEASUREMENTS
 Fetal Abdomen,
 Fetal Head Anatomy,
 Fetal Description,
 Maternal Anatomy.
Fig. 10-3: OB Fetal Survey
Beside each observation a drop-down menu allows to select among:

 --,means observation field empty; the empty fields are not
sent to the report;
 NORMAL;
 ABNORMAL;
 UNABLE TO EVALUATE.
In addition for each group:

 ALL NORMAL, sets all the observation blocks to normal;
 CLEAR, sets all the observation blocks to empty.

Obstetric Measurement Set Up

To access the Obstetric Measurement configuration menu press M EN U then
select M E A S U R E , and then double click on O B - F E T A L . The A P P L I C A T I O N
Application Measurements Folder

Here you can set:
 The bibliographic reference both in fetal growth and in fetal
age,
 whether to enable the measurement graphs or not,
 the measurement method,
 the measurement insertion type,
 ADD/EDIT custom tables.
Fig. 10-4: OB Custom Table Edit
The MEASUREMENT METHOD allows to choose between two different calipers

+...+ (DISTANCE) or >...< (DISTANCE >...<) for measurements of distance.
The MEASUREMENT INSERTION type allows to choose between MANUAL or
automatic (AUTO) insertion for measurement of AC, BPD, CRL, FIB, FL,
HC, HL, RL, TL and UL.

NOTE When AUTO is selected, the measure is not closed till you have confirmed it
pressing EN TER .
When ENABLE MEASUREMENT OF 3 DIAMETERS is selected, it enables the

calculation of GS (gestational Sac) by 3 diameters, instead of a single distance.
MEASUREMENTS
Adding and Editing OB custom tables
When any B-Mode measurement based on table is selected, you can edit
custom tables both in Fetal Growth and in Fetal Age pressing A D D / E D I T .
Once one of the buttons has been pressed, the system displays the following
menu that allows to create a custom table:
Fig. 10-5: OB Custom Table Selection
Field Action
MEASUREMENT NAME Indicates the selected parameter.

TYPE Indicates whether in Fetal Age or Fetal Growth.
The menu lists all the factory and custom tables.

EDIT TABLE and D E L E T E TABLE respectively allow to modify and delete
the selected custom table.
NEW TABLE button allows to create a new custom table.
NEW TABLE FROM EQUATION button allows to create a new custom table.

CLOSE exits the menu.

When creating (N E W T A B L E ) or editing (E D I T TABLE) a custom table the
system displays the following menu:
Fig. 10-6: OB Custom Table Insertion
The configuration menu shows:

 on the upper left side the fields to enter the author and the
bibliographic references,
 on the upper right side the fields to set the format, the
measure unit, the range and the gestational age,
 on the left side the table where entering values,
 on the right the graph corresponding to the table values.
The custom table can be composed of up to 256 rows each: press I N S E R T
to add a new row below the selected one, press R E M O V E to delete the
selected row.
To add a table, follow the procedure below:
Procedure  Using the alphanumeric keyboard, enter the AUTHOR and
BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCE.
NOTE The AUTHOR field is mandatory.

 Set the fields:
Field Values
FORMAT MIN-MEAN-MAX, MEAN-DEV OR MEAN
MEASUREMENTS
MEASURE UNIT cm or mm
RANGE SD1, SD2, SD3, 3%-50%-97%, 5%-150%-
95% OR 10%-50%-90%
GA DAY, WEEK OR WEEK+DAY
 Place the cursor on the table column and press EN TER to

activate the cell.
 Enter the values and press EN TER to confirm.
 Repeat the same operations to fill in the whole table.
OK saves the custom table.
NOTE The custom table will be available for the measurement only after having
set a bibliographic reference into the corresponding parameter.
CANCEL exits the menu without saving the custom table.

Identification of Measurements Taken with Custom Tables
Worksheet and Report When measurements based on custom tables have been performed during the
exam, the Author of these measurements is indicated with characters in Italic.
Advanced Folder
Field Action
FETAL HR CYCLES AVERAGE Sets the number of cardiac cycles to be averaged

for fetal HR.
GESTATIONAL PERIOD Sets the formula for EDD computation.
BIO PROFILE Sets the method for the biophysical profile
evaluation.

Field Action
MEASUREMENT AREA - ROW 1 Sets the parameter to be displayed on the first

MEASUREMENT AREA - ROW 2 and second rows of the measurement area. See
below the description of drop-down menu
options.
FOLLICLES MEASURED BY Sets the method for the measurement of follicles
by one distance or two distances.
INFO ON SCREEN CAPTION When checked, it enables the presence of LMP/
EDD/GA information on the screen caption.
ENABLE DERIVED HC When checked, it enables the derived head
circumference (HC* in the Report)
ENABLE DERIVED AC When checked, it enables the derived abdominal
circumference (AC* in the Report)
SHOW AUTHOR’S NAME ON When checked, it enables the presence of the
MEASURE BUTTON author’s name on the touchscreen button label
for the reference Fetal Age/Growth table
ENABLE EDD IN PANEL When checked, it enables calculated EDD (based
on AUA) in measurement panel and worksheet/
report.
ENABLE DERIVED OFD When checked, it enables the derived OFD(HC)
that is the measurement of Occipital Frontal
Diameter calculated from HC.
NOTE HC* is calculated starting from BPD and OFD parameters; AC* is
calculated starting from APAD and TAD. In both cases the circumference
is drawn on an ellipse having the two measured parameters as axes: for this
reason the two parameters have to be orthogonal.
In the Multiple Fetuses area you can select the Sections to be included in the
Worksheet/Report Compare page when measurements from different
fetuses have been taken.
Table 10-8: Multiple Fetuses Settings fields
Field Action
INCLUDE 2D SECTION Includes the related section in the report.

INCLUDE M SECTION Includes the related section in the report.
INCLUDE PW SECTION Includes the related section in the report.

Field Action
INCLUDE CALCUL SECTION Includes the related section in the report.

INCLUDE BIOPHYSICAL SECTION Includes the related section in the report.
INCLUDE OBSERV SECTION Includes the related section in the report.
MEASUREMENTS
INCLUDE FETAL MASS SECTION Includes the related section in the report.
INCLUDE RATIO GRAPHS Includes the related section in the report.
GRAPHICS Sets the Graphs Compare Section in the Report.
When SKIP COMPARAT GRAPHS is selected,
the graphs are separated per fetus (each fetus
will have his graph with the measurement
reference), while when PRINT ONLY COMPAR
GRAPHS is selected the same measurement for
different fetus is reported on the same graph.
Table 10-9: Single Fetus Settings fields
Field Action
INCLUDE CALCULATIONS Includes the related section in the report.

SECTION
Measurement Area
When measurements are performed, the value under measure is displayed on
the left side of the image (screen measurement area).
In Obstetrics application the first two rows of the screen measurement area
can be set to display specific parameters. The parameters that can be displayed
are:
 GA(LMP): gestational age based on LMP,
 GA(AUA): gestational age based on AUA,
 GA(DGA): gestational age based on DGA,
 GA(LMP/DGA): gestational age based on LMP/DGA,
 ESTIM FETAL WEIGHT: Estimated fetal weight,
 LAST MENSTRUAL PERIOD.


11
Chapter
11 - Thyroid Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter lists all the Advanced Measurements available for the Thyroid
application.
Thyroid Advanced Measurements in B-

Mode
Table 11-1: Thyroid Advanced Measurements in B-Mode
Measurement Measurement Input Measurement Input Displayed

Description (Abbreviation) (Label) Type Results
Right Lobe Volume Right Lobe Antero-Posterior diameter (AP) Distance AP

Transversal diameter (Transv) Distance Transv
Sagittal diameter (Sag) Distance Sag
Volume
Left Lobe Volume Left Lobe Antero-Posterior diameter (AP) Distance AP

Volume
Isthmus AP Thickness Isthmus AP Thickness Isthmus AP Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Nodule Volume Nodule # Antero-Posterior diameter (AP) Distance AP

Volume
Parathyroid Gland Parathyroid Gland # Antero-Posterior diameter (AP) Distance AP

Volume Transversal diameter (Transv) Distance Transv
Volume
Lymph Node Volume Lymph Node # Antero-Posterior diameter (AP) Distance AP

Volume
AP/Trv

THYROID MEASUREMENTS
Thyroid Worksheet Organization

Here are described the additional fields dedicated to the Thyroid Worksheet.
Table 11-2: Evaluations in Thyroid
R/L LOBE Echotexture Homogenous, Heterogenous
NODULES # Location Right upper, Right mid, Right lower, Left

upper, Left mid, Left lower, Isthmus
Composition Mixed Cystic and Solid, Solid,

Spongiform, Cystic
Echogenicity Anechoic, Hypoechoic, Hyperechoic,

Very Hypoechoic, Isoechoic
Shape Wider than Tall, Taller than Wide
Margins Smooth, Lobulated Irregular, Ill-defined,

Extrathyroidal Extension
Echogenic L Comet Tail Art: Yes, No

Foci Periph Rim Calc: Yes, No
Macrocalcification: Yes, No
Punct Echo Foci: Yes, No
TI-RADS Benign, Not Suspicious, Mildly

Category Suspicious, Moderately Suspicious,
Highly Suspicious
PARATHYROID Location Right superior, Right inferior, Left

GLAND # superior, Left inferior
Echogenicity Hypo, Iso, Hyper, Complex
Vascularity Polar artery
LYMPH NODE # Laterality Left, Right, Central
Location VI, VII, III, IV, VA, VB, IA, IB, IIA, IIB
Echogenicity Hypo, Iso, Hyper, Complex
Vascular Avascular, Peripheral, Incr Intranod

Vascularity

Margins Smooth, Irregular, Infiltrating
Shape Oval, Round
Hilar Line Absent, Normal, Thickened
MEASUREMENTS
Thyroid Measurement Set Up

To access the Thyroid Measurement configuration menu press M EN U then
select M E A S U R E , and then T H Y R O I D . The A P P L I C A T I O N
Advanced Folder
Field Action
ENABLE RADS Enables the TI-RADS evaluation


Chapter
12 - Urologic
12
Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter lists all Advanced Measurements available for the Urologic
application.
Application Data
Fig. 12-1: Urologic Patient ID page
Table 12-1: Additional data in Urologic Patient ID page
Field
PSA Prostate Specific Antigen

in ng/ml

UROLOGIC MEASUREMENTS
Urologic Advanced Measurements in B-

Mode
Table 12-2: Urologic Advanced Measurements in B-Mode

Bladder Volume Bladder Volume Diameter 1 (Diam1) Distance Diam1

Volume
Whole Gland Volume Whole Gland Volume Diameter 1 (WG D1) Distance WG D1
Diameter 2 (WG D2) Distance WG D2
Diameter 3 (WG D3) Distance WG D3
Volume
Transitional Zone Trans Zone Prost Volume Diameter 1 (TZD1) Distance TZD1
Prostate Volume (Trans Zone Prost Vol) Diameter 2 (TZD2) Distance TZD2
Diameter 3 (TZD3) Distance TZD3
Volume
Left Kidney Bi-Volume L Kidney Bi-Volume Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Right Kidney Bi-Volume R Kidney Bi-Volume Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Left Kidney Mono L Kidney Mono Volume Length (L) Distance L

Volume Height (H) Distance H
Volume
Right Kidney Mono R Kidney Mono Volume Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Left Testicle Bi-Volume L Testicle Bi-Volume Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Right Testicle Bi-Volume R Testicle Bi-Volume Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Left Testicle Mono L Testicle Mono Volume Length (L) Distance L

Volume
Right Testicle Mono R Testicle Mono Volume Length (L) Distance L

Volume

Urologic Advanced Measurements in

Doppler
Table 12-3: Urologic Advanced Measurements in Doppler
MEASUREMENTS
Right Renal Artery Velocity R Renal A PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Left Renal Artery Velocity L Renal A PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Distal Cavernous Arterial Dist Cavernous A PSVa Caliper PSV

Velocities Caliper EDV
EDVb
Proximal Cavernous Arterial Prox Cavernous A PSVa Caliper PSV

EDVb
Middle Cavernous Arterial Mid Cavernous A PSVa Caliper PSV

EDVb
Right Renal Artery VTI R Renal A VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Left Renal Artery VTI L Renal A VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Distal Cavernous Arterial VTI Dist Cavernous A VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Proximal Cavernous Arterial Prox Cavernous A VTI VTIc Profile VTI

VTI
Middle Cavernous Arterial VTI Mid Cavernous A VTI VTIc Profile VTI

Urologic Worksheet Organization

Here are described the additional fields dedicated to the Urologic Worksheet.
The worksheet, besides displaying the single measurements, shows the
following calculated parameters:
 Predicted PSA Level by Whole Gland Volume,
 Predicted PSA Level by Transitional Zone Volume,
 PSA Density.

Fig. 12-2: Urologic Worksheet
The correction factors displayed in the report can be modified as follows:

 place the cursor on the corresponding field and press EN TER ;
 digit the new value using the alphanumeric keyboard.
The system automatically updates the relevant predicted PSA level.
The modified correction factor is not saved when the exam is closed: the next
urologic exam will use the set default factors.

Table 12-4: Evaluations in Urology
PROSTATE Hyperplasia Refer to table 12-5
MEASUREMENTS
Capsule Continuous, Discontinuous Swollen,
Discontinuous Extra Invasion,
Discontinuous Hyperdense Echos
BLADDER Urinary Normal, Abnormal

Bladder Wall
URETHRA Morphology Continuous, Discontinuous Swollen
SEMINAL VESICLE Characteristics Solid, Liquid, Dishomogeneous,

Invasion
Table 12-5: Assessment categories for prostate hyperplasia
0 - Little or no zonal enlargement
1 - Bilateral lateral zone enlargement
2 - Retro urethral enlargement
2A - Mild enlargement without herniation
2B - Greater enlargement, elevation of the trigone

without adenoma herniation
2C - Enlargement, elevation of the trigone with

trapping of adenoma
2D - Greater enlargement with adenoma herniation
2E - Mild enlargement producing posterior bladder lip
3 - Bilateral and retro urethral enlargement
4 - Pedunculated
5 - Bilateral and pedunculated
6 - Subtrigonal
7 - Other combinations

Table 12-6: Evaluations for Focal Regions
Location Side Right, Left
Zone Peripheral, Transitional, Central,

Anterior fibromuscular stroma
Sector Base, Midgland, Apex
Region Anterior, Posterior, Medial Posterior,

Lateral Posterior
Cystic - Simple Cyst, Multiple Cyst
Solid Shape Round, Oval, Lenticular, Lobulated,

Irregular
Margins Regular, Irregular
Echogenicity Isoechoic, Hypoechoic, Hyperechoic
Echotexture Homogeneous, Heterogeneous
Calcification Yes, No
Vascularity Intralesional, Perilesional, Both
Contour Yes, No
Bulging
Elasticity Absent, Normal, Thickened


Urologic Measurement Set Up

To access the Urologic Measurement configuration menu press M EN U then
select M E A S U R E , and then U R O L O G Y . The A P P L I C A T I O N
MEASUREMENTS
Advanced Folder
Field Action
PSA CORRECTION Sets the correction factor for the PSA predicted
FACTOR - WG level by whole gland volume.
PSA CORRECTION Sets the correction factor for the PSA predicted
FACTOR - TZ level by transitional zone volume.
INCLUDE CALCULATED Includes the calculated values in the report, when
VALUES IN THE REPORT checked.
The WG and TZ default values are 0,12 and 0,16 respectively.


Chapter
13 - Vascular
13
Measurements
MEASUREMENTS
This chapter lists all the Advanced Measurements available for the Vascular
application.
Application Data
Fig. 13-1: Vascular Patient ID page
Table 13-1: Additional data in Vascular Patient ID page
Field
QIMT TABLE Selection of the table for QIMT

QIMT Ethnicity for QIMT table
ETHNICITY
SYSTOLIC in mmHg
PRESSURE

VASCULAR MEASUREMENTS
Field
DIASTOLIC in mmHg
PRESSURE
Vascular Advanced Measurements in B-

Mode
Table 13-2: Carotid Advanced Measurements group in B-Mode

Righta Common Carotid R CCA Stenosis Diam True Diameter (True D) Distance True D
Artery stenosis diameter Residual Diameter (Res D) Distance Res D
% Sten
Righta Internal Carotid R ICA Stenosis Diam True Diameter (True D) Distance True D
% Sten
Righta External Carotid R ECA Stenosis Diam True Diameter (True D) Distance True D
% Sten
Righta Common Carotid R CCA Stenosis Area True Area (True A) Contour True A
Artery stenosis area Residual Area (Res A) Contour Res AD
% Sten
Righta Internal Carotid R ICA Stenosis Area True Area (True A) Contour True A
Artery stenosis area Residual Area (Res A) Contour Res AD
% Sten
Righta External Artery R ECA Stenosis Area True Area (True A) Contour True A
stenosis area Residual Area (Res A) Contour Res AD
% Sten
Table 13-3: Aorta Advanced Measurements group in B-Mode

Aorta proximal Prox Aorta Diam Systolic Diameter (Syst D) Distance Syst D
diameter Diastolic Diameter (Diast D) Distance Diast D
Aorta distal diameter Dist Aorta Diam Systolic Diameter (Syst D) Distance Syst D
Diastolic Diameter (Diast D) Distance Diast D
Aorta dilatation Ao Dil Segm Length Aorta dilatation segment length (L) Distance L
segment length
Aorta dilatation Ao Dil Segm Width Aorta dilatation segment width (W) Distance W
segment width

Vascular Advanced Measurements in

Doppler
Table 13-4: Carotid Advanced Measurements group in Doppler
MEASUREMENTS
Measurement Input Measurement Input Displayed
Measurement Description
(Abbreviation) (Label) Type Results
Righta proximal common carotid R Prox CCA PSVb Caliper PSV

velocities Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal common carotid VTI R Prox CCA VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta middle common carotid R Mid CCA PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta middle common carotid VTI R Mid CCA VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta distal common carotid R Dist CCA PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta distal common carotid VTI R Dist CCA VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta bulb velocities R Bulb PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta bulb VTI R Bulb VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta external carotid velocities R ECA PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta external carotid VTI R ECA VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta proximal internal carotid R Prox ICA PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta proximal internal carotid VTI R Prox ICA VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta middle internal carotid R Mid ICA PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta middle internal carotid VTI R Mid ICA VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta distal internal carotid velocities R Dist ICA PSVb Caliper PSV
Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta distal internal carotid VTI R Dist ICA VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta vertebral artery velocities R Vertebral A PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta vertebral artery VTI R Vertebr A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta subclavian artery velocities R Subclav A PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta subclavian artery VTI R Subclavian A VTI VTId Profile VTI

b. PSV = Peak Systolic Velocity
c. EDV = End Diastolic Velocity

d. VTI = Velocity Time Integral
Table 13-5: Lower Limb Veins Advanced Measurements group in Doppler.

Input Type
Righta Vein Cava reflux R V Cava Reflux Time Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
time Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Righta Common iliac vein R Com Iliac V Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
reflux time Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Righta External iliac vein R Ext Iliac V Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
Righta internal iliac vein R Int Iliac V Hypogartric Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
reflux time - Hypogastric Reflux T (R Int Iliac V Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Hypog RT) Width (W) Distance W
Righta common femoral R Com Femoral V Reflux Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
vein reflux time T (R Com Femoral V Refl Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
T) Width (W) Distance W
Righta superficial femoral R Sup Femoral V Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
vein reflux time (R Sup Femoral V Refl T) Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Righta profunda femoral R Prof Femoris V Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
vein reflux time (R Prof Femoris V Refl T) Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Righta popliteal vein R Popliteal V Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
Righta gemellary vein R Gemellary V Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
Righta anterior tribal vein R Ant Tibial V Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
Righta posterior tribal R Post Tibial V Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
vein reflux time Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Righta saphenous-femoral R Saf-Fem Junct Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
anastomosis reflux time (R Saf-Fem Junct Refl T) Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Righta saphenous- R Saf-Popl Junct Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
popliteal anastomosis (R Saf-Popl Junct Refl T) Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
reflux time Width (W) Distance W
Righta great saphenous R Great Saphenous V Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
vein reflux time Reflux T (R Great Saphen Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
V Refl T) Width (W) Distance W
Righta short saphenous R Small Saphenous V Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
vein reflux time Reflux T (R Small Saphen Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
V Refl T) Width (W) Distance W


Input Type
Righta Hunterian vein R Hunterian Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
Righta Boyd vein reflux R Boyd Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
MEASUREMENTS
Righta Cockett vein reflux R Cockett Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T
Righta Superficial R Superficial Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T

Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Righta Deep R Deep Reflux T Reflux Time (Refl T) Time Refl T

Thickness (Thickn) Distance Thickn
Table 13-6: Abdomen Advanced Measurements group in Doppler

Righta proximal common iliac R Prox Com Iliac A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta proximal common iliac R Prox Com Iliac A VTId Profile VTI
VTI VTI
Righta middle common iliac R Mid Com Iliac A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta middle common iliac VTI R Mid Com Iliac A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta distal common iliac R Dist Com Iliac A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta distal common iliac VTI R Dist Com Iliac A VTId Profile VTI
VTI
Righta proximal external iliac R Prox Ext Iliac A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta proximal external iliac R Prox Ext Iliac A VTI VTId Profile VTI
VTI
Righta middle external iliac R Mid Ext Iliac A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta middle external iliac VTI R Mid Ext Iliac A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta distal external iliac R Dist Ext Iliac A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta distal external iliac VTI R Dist Ext Iliac A VTI VTId Profile VTI


Righta iliac artery bifurcation R Iliac A Bif PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta iliac artery bifurcation R Iliac A Bif VTI VTId Profile VTI
VTI
Righta proximal internal iliac R Prox Int Iliac A PSVb Caliper PSV
artery velocities Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal internal iliac R Prox Int Iliac A VTI VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI

Table 13-7: Lower Limb Advanced Measurements group in Doppler

Righta proximal common R Prox Com Femoral A PSVb Caliper PSV

femoral artery velocities Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal common R Prox Com Femoral A VTId Profile VTI

femoral artery VTI VTI
(R Prox Com Fem A
VTI)
Righta middlw common femoral R Mid Com Femoral A PSVb Caliper PSV
artery velocities (R Mid Com Femor A) Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta middle common femoral R Mid Com Femoral A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI
(R Mid Com Femor A
VTI)
Righta distal common femoral R Dist Com Femoral A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta distal common femoral R Dist Com Femoral A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI
(R Dist Com Femor A
VTI)
Righta profunda femoral artery R Prof Femoral A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta profunda femoral artery R Prof Femoral A VTI VTId Profile VTI
VTI
Righta proximal superficial R Prox Sup Femoral A PSVb Caliper PSV

femoral artery velocities Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal superficial R Prox Sup Femoral A VTId Profile VTI

femoral artery VTI VTI
(R Prox Sup Femor A
VTI)


Righta middle superficial femoral R Mid Sup Femoral A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta middle superficial femoral R Mid Sup Femoral A VTId Profile VTI
MEASUREMENTS
artery VTI VTI
(R Mid Sup Femor A
VTI)
Righta distal superficial femoral R Dist Sup Femoral A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta distal superficial femoral R Dist Sup Femoral A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI
(R Dist Sup Femor A
VTI)
Righta above knee popliteal R Above Knee PSVb Caliper PSV

artery velocities Popliteal A (R Above Caliper EDV
EDVc
Knee Poplit A)
Righta above knee popliteal R Above Knee VTId Profile VTI

artery VTI Popliteal A VTI
(R Above Knee Poplit
A VTI)
Righta below knee popliteal R Below Knee Popliteal PSVb Caliper PSV
artery velocities A Caliper EDV
EDVc
(R Below Knee Poplit
A)
Righta below knee popliteal R Below Knee Popliteal VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI A VTI
(R Below Knee Poplit
A VTI)
Righta proximal posterior tibial R Prox Post Tibial A PSVb Caliper PSV
artery velocities (R Prox PTA) Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal posterior tibial R Prox Post Tibial A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI
Righta middle posterior tibial R Mid Post Tibial A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta middle posterior tibial RMid Post Tibial A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI
Righta distal posterior tibial R Dist Post Tibial A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta distal posterior tibial R Dist Post Tibial A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI
Righta proximal anterior tibial R Prox Ant Tibial A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta proximal anterior tibial R Prox Ant Tibial A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI
Righta middle anterior artery R Mid Ant Tibial A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta middle anterior tibial R Mid Ant Tibial A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI


Righta distal anterior tibial artery R Dist Ant Tibial A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta distal anterior tibial artery R Dist Ant Tibial A VTId Profile VTI
VTI VTI
Righta proximal peroneal artery R Prox Peroneal A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta peroneal artery VTI R Prox Peroneal A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta middle peroneal artery R Mid Peroneal A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta middle peroneal artery R Mid Peroneal A VTI VTId Profile VTI
VTI
Righta distal peroneal artery R Dist Peroneal A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta distal peroneal artery VTI R Dist Peroneal A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta dorsalis pedis artery R Dorsalis Pedis A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta dorsalis pedis artery VTI R Dors Pedis A VTI VTId Profile VTI

Table 13-8: Upper Limb Advanced Measurements group in Doppler

Righta proximal superior R Prox Sup Cerebr A PSVb Caliper PSV

cerebella artery velocities Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal superior R Prox Sup Cerebr A VTId Profile VTI

cerebella artery VTI VTI
Righta middle superior cerebella R Mid Sup Cerebr A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta middle superior cerebella R Mid Sup Cerebr A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI
Righta distal superior cerebella R Dist Sup Cerebr A PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta distal superior cerebella R Dist Sup Cerebr A VTId Profile VTI
artery VTI VTI
Righta axillary artery velocities R Axillary A PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta axillary artery VTI R Axillary A VTI VTId Profile VTI


Righta proximal brachial artery R Prox Brachial A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta proximal brachial artery R Prox Brachial A VTI VTId Profile VTI
MEASUREMENTS
VTI
Righta middle brachial artery R Mid Brachial A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta middle brachial artery R Mid Brachial A VTI VTId Profile VTI
VTI
Righta distal brachial artery R Dist Brachial A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta distal brachial artery VTI R Dist Brachial A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta proximal radial artery R Prox Radial A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta proximal radial artery VTI R Prox Radial A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta middle radial artery R Mid Radial A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta middle radial artery VTI R Mid Radial A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta distal radial artery R Dist Radial A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta distal radial artery VTI R Dist Radial A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta proximal ulnar artery R Prox Ulnar A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta proximal ulnar artery VTI R Prox Ulnar A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta distal ulnar artery R Dist Ulnar A PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta distal ulnar artery VTI R Dist Ulnar A VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta palmar artery velocities R Palmar Arch PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta palmar artery VTI R Palmar Arch VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta digital artery velocities R Digital A PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc


Table 13-9: Aorta Advanced Measurements group in Doppler

Proximal aorta velocities Prox Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Proximal aorta VTI Prox Ao VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Middle aorta velocities Mid Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Middle aorta VTI Mid Aorta VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Distal aorta velocities Dist Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Distal aorta VTI Dist Ao VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Post prandial superior Post Prandial Sup PSVa Caliper PSV

mesenteric artery velocities Mesenteric A Caliper EDV
EDVb
(Postp Sup Mesenteric
A)
Post prandial superior Post Prandial Sup VTIc Profile VTI

mesenteric artery VTI Mesenteric A VTI
(Postp Sup Mesent A
VTI)
Post prandial celiac artery Post Prandial Celiac PSVa Caliper PSV
EDVb
Post prandial celiac artery VTI Post Prandial Celiac VTIc Profile VTI
VTI
Proximal superior mesenteric Prox Sup Mesenteric A PSVa Caliper PSV

EDVb
Proximal superior mesenteric Prox Sup Mesenteric A VTIc Profile VTI

artery VTI VTI (Prox Sup Mesent
A VTI)
Middle superior mesenteric Mid Sup Mesenteric A PSVa Caliper PSV

EDVb
Middle superior mesenteric Mid Sup Mesenteric A VTIc Profile VTI

artery VTI VTI (Mid Sup
Mesenter A VTI)
Distal superior mesenteric artery Dist Sup Mesenteric A PSVa Caliper PSV
EDVb
Distal superior mesenteric artery Dist Sup Mesenteric A VTIc Profile VTI
VTI VTI (Dist Sup Mesent
A VTI)
Celiac tripod artery velocities Celiac Tripod PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Celiac tripod artery VTI Celiac Tripod VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Inferior mesenteric artery Inf Mesenteric A PSVa Caliper PSV

EDVb
Inferior mesenteric artery VTI Inf Mesenteric A VTI VTIc Profile VTI


Proximal splenic artery velocities Prox Splenic A PSVa Caliper PSV

(Prox Splenic A) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Proximal splenic artery VTI Prox Splenic A VTI VTIc Profile VTI
MEASUREMENTS
(Prox Splenic A VTI)
Middle splenic artery velocities Mid Splenic A PSVa Caliper PSV

(Mid Splenic A) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Middle splenic artery VTI Mid Splenic A VTI VTIc Profile VTI
(Mid Splenic A VTI)
Distal splenic artery velocities Dist Splenic A PSVa Caliper PSV

(Dist Splenic A) Caliper EDV
EDVb
Distal splenic artery VTI Dist Splenic A VTI VTIc Profile VTI
(Dist Splenic A VTI)
Hepatic artery velocities Hepatic A PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Hepatic artery VTI Hepatic A VTI VTIc Profile VTI

Table 13-10: Arterial Graft Advanced Measurements group in Doppler

Righta inflow arterial vessel R A Art Vessel PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta inflow arterial vessel VTI R Art Vessel VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta proximal arterial R Prox A Art Anast PSVb Caliper PSV

anastomosis velocities Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal arterial R Prox Art Anast VTI VTId Profile VTI
anastomosis VTI
Righta proximal graft velocities R Prox A Graft PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal graft VTI R Prox Graft VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta middle graft velocities R Mid A Graft PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta middle graft VTI R Mid Graft VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta distal graft velocities R Dist A Graft PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta distal graft VTI R Dist Graft VTI VTId Profile VTI


Righta distal arterial anastomosis R Dist A Art Anast PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta distal arterial anastomosis R Dist Art Anast VTI VTId Profile VTI
VTI
Righta outflow arterial vessel R A Outflow Vessel PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc

Table 13-11: Dialysis Graft Advanced Measurements group in Doppler

Righta inflow arterial vessel R D Inflow Vessel PSVb Caliper PSV

EDVc
Righta inflow arterial vessel VTI R Art Vessel VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta proximal arterial R Prox D Art Anast PSVb Caliper PSV

anastomosis velocities Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal arterial R Prox Art Anast VTI VTId Profile VTI
anastomosis VTI
Righta proximal graft velocities R Prox D Graft PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta proximal graft VTI R Prox Graft VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta middle graft velocities R Mid D Graft PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta middle graft VTI R Mid Graft VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta distal graft velocities R Dist D Graft PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta distal graft VTI R Dist Graft VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta distal arterial anastomosis R Dist D Art Anast PSVb Caliper PSV
EDVc
Righta distal arterial anastomosis R Dist Art Anast VTI VTId Profile VTI
VTI
Righta puncture 1 velocities R Puncture 1 PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta puncture 1 VTI R Puncture 1 VTI VTId Profile VTI



Caliper EDV
EDVc
MEASUREMENTS
Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta venous vessel velocities R Venous Vessel PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta venous vessel VTI R Ven Vessel VTI VTId Profile VTI
Righta venous junction velocities R Venous Junction PSVb Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVc
Righta venous junction VTI R Venous Junction VTI VTId Profile VTI

Table 13-12: Renal Advanced Measurements group in Doppler

Aorta velocities Aorta PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Aorta VTI Aorta VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Rightd renal artery ostium R Renal A Ostium PSVa Caliper PSV

EDVb
Rightd renal artery ostium VTI R Renal A Ost VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Rightd proximal renal artery R Prox Renal A PSVa Caliper PSV

EDVb
Rightd proximal renal artery VTI R Prox Renal A VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Rightd middle renal artery R Mid Renal A PSVa Caliper PSV

EDVb
Rightd middle renal artery VTI R Mid Renal A VTI VTIc Profile VTI
Rightd distal renal artery R Dist Renal A PSVa Caliper PSV

EDVb
Rightd distal renal artery VTI R Dist Renal A VTI VTIc Profile VTI


Rightd upper arterial segment 1 R Segm1 Upper PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Rightd upper arterial segment 1 R Segm1 Upper P VTI VTIc Profile VTI
VTI
Rightd upper arterial segment 2 R Segm2 Upper PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Rightd upper arterial segment 2 R Segm2 Upper P VTI VTIc Profile VTI
VTI
Rightd lower arterial segment 1 R Segm1 Lower PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Rightd lower arterial segment 1 R Segm1 Lower P VTI VTIc Profile VTI
VTI
Rightd lower arterial segment 2 R Segm2 Lower PSVa Caliper PSV

Caliper EDV
EDVb
Rightd lower arterial segment 2 R Segm2 Lower P VTI VTIc Profile VTI
VTI
Rightd hilar acceleration time R Hilar Acc Time Acceleration Time (R Time R HilAT
HilAT)

d. The measurement is bilateral
Vascular Worksheet Organization

Here are described the additional fields dedicated to the Vascular worksheets.
Velocities Ratio and Vessels Evaluation

The Vascular worksheet looks like the other report, except in the “Carotid
Velocities” and “Lower Limbs” groups.
In the “Carotid Velocities” group the internal carotid/common carotid
velocity and mesenteric/aorta ratios are automatically calculated and
displayed in the report when the corresponding flow measurements have
been performed.
In the “Lower Limbs” group the worksheet, besides displaying the single
measurements and the average (if enabled), also allows the insertion of an
evaluation of the vessel status:
Status Evaluation
Patency Yes, No, Partial

Status Evaluation
Compressibility Yes, No, Partial
Reflux Light, Moderate, Severe
Thrombus Yes, No, Partial
MEASUREMENTS
Vascular Measurement Set Up
To access the Vascular Measurement configuration menu press M EN U then
select M E A S U R E , and then V A S C U L A R . The A P P L I C A T I O N
Advanced Folder
Field Action
ICA/CCA Sets which velocity measurements (PROX, MID, DIST)

use for both Internal Carotid Artery and Common
Carotid Artery for their ratio calculation when the
corresponding flow measurements have been performed.
SMA/AORTA Sets which velocity measurements (PROX, MID, DIST)
use for both Superior Mesenteric Artery and Aorta for
their ratio calculation when the corresponding flow
measurements have been performed.
In both cases when the AUTO MAX field is checked, the ratio is calculated using
the maximum velocities values among all performed measurements of the
same parameters.


A
Appendix
A - Formula and References

in B-Mode
MEASUREMENTS
Volume in abdominal and breast
Formula
Volume [ml] or [cm3]
4 L H W
Vol = ---    ---  ----  -----
3 2 2 2
Volume in thyroid
Formula
Volume [ml] or [cm3]

Vol = ---  AP  Transv  Sag
6
Diameter Reduction
Formula
%ST =
D
100  1 – ------1
D0
D1: Residual diameter
D0: True diameter
Accuracy ±10%
Reference W.Robert Felix Jr., “Noninvasive diagnosis of peripheral vascular disease”.

In: Raven Press, p.121

FORMULA AND REFERENCES IN B-MODE
Length by Vertex
Formula
L=
  Ln 
Ln: Umpteenth length
Area by Ellipse Axes
Formula
A=
ab
a: Major semi axis
b: Minor semi axis
Area Reduction
Formula
%ST =
A
100  1 – -----1-
A0
A1: Residual diameter
A0: True diameter
Accuracy ±16%
Reference W.Robert Felix Jr., “Noninvasive diagnosis of peripheral vascular disease”.

In: Raven Press, p.122

Volume by Ellipse
Formula
V=
4--- 2
ab
MEASUREMENTS
3
a: Major semi axis
b: Minor semi axis
Volume by Trace and by Area-Length
Formula
V=
2
A
0 85  ------
D
A: Area
D: Diameter
Bi-Plane Volume
Formula
V=

---  D 1  D 2  D 3
6
D1: First diameter
D2: Second diameter
D1: Third diameter

Uterus, Fibroma, Ovary and Mass Volumes
Formula
Vol (cm3) =
4--- L H W
   ---  ----  -----
3 2 2 2
L: Length
H: Height
W: Width
Accuracy ±15%
Reference Barry B. Goldberg, Alfred B. Kurtz, “Atlas of Ultrasound Measurements”,

Year Book Medical Publisher, 1990, pp. 192-194.
Bladder Volume
Formula
Volume (ml or cm3) =


D 0  D 1  D 2  ---
6
D0: First diameter
D1: Second diameter
D2: Third diameter
Accuracy ±15%
Reference Griffiths, et al., “Measuring Bladder Volume and Residual Urine” In: The
Journal of Urology, Vol. 136, 808-812, 1986

Whole Gland and Transitional Zone Prostate Volume
Formula
Volume (cm3) =
MEASUREMENTS

D 0  D 1  D 2  ---
6
D0: First diameter
D1: Second diameter
D2: Third diameter
Accuracy ±15%
Reference Peter J, Littrup, M.D., et al., “Determination of Prostate Volume with

Transrectal US for Cancer Screening” In: Radiology, Vol. 179, 49-53, 1991.
Kidney and Testicle Volume - Biplane Method
Formula
Volume (cm3) =
4--- D0 D1 D2
   ------  ------  ------
3 2 2 2
D0: First diameter
D1: Second diameter
D2: Third diameter
Accuracy ±15%
Kidney and Testicle Volume - Monoplane Method
Formula
Volume (cm3) =
 2
----  D 0  D 1
6
when D0<D1

Formula
Volume (cm3) =
 2
----  D 1  D 0
6
when D1<D0
D0: First diameter
D1: Second diameter
D2: Third diameter
Accuracy ±15%
Predicted PSA Level
Formula
Predicted PSA (ng/ml) =

AB
A: Volume
B: Correction factor
Accuracy ±15%
Reference Fred Lee, M.D., et al., “Predicted Prostate Specific Antigen Results Using
Transrectal Ultrasound Gland Volume” In: Cancer Supplement, Vol. 70, No. 1,
July 1992.
Mitchell C. Benson, et al., “Prostate Specific Antigen Density: A means of
Distinguishing Benign Prostatic Hypertrophy and Prostate Cancer” In: The
Journal of Urology, Vol. 147, 815-816, March 1992.
Mitchell C. Benson, et al., “The Use of Prostate Specific Antigen Density to
Enhance the Predictive Value of Intermediate Levels of Serum Prostate
Specific Antigen” In: The Journal of Urology, Vol. 147, 817-821, March 1992.

Predicted PSA Density
Formula
Predicted PSA (ng/ml/cc) =

A
MEASUREMENTS
---
B
A: PSA serum
B: Volume
Reference Fred Lee, M.D., et al., “Predicted Prostate Specific Antigen Results Using
Transrectal Ultrasound Gland Volume” In: Cancer Supplement, Vol. 70, No. 1,
July 1992.
Mitchell C. Benson, et al., “Prostate Specific Antigen Density: A means of
Distinguishing Benign Prostatic Hypertrophy and Prostate Cancer” In: The
Journal of Urology, Vol. 147, 815-816, March 1992.
Mitchell C. Benson, et al., “The Use of Prostate Specific Antigen Density to
Enhance the Predictive Value of Intermediate Levels of Serum Prostate
Specific Antigen” In: The Journal of Urology, Vol. 147, 817-821, March 1992.
Stenosis Diameter
Formula
%ST =
D
100  1 – ------1
D0
D1: Residual diameter
D0: True diameter
Accuracy ±10%
Reference W. Robert Felix Jr., “Noninvasive Diagnosis of Peripheral Vascular Disease”,

Raven Press, p. 121.

Stenosis Area
Formula
%ST =
A
100  1 – -----1-
A0
A1: Residual diameter
A0: True diameter
Accuracy ±16%
Reference W. Robert Felix Jr., “Noninvasive Diagnosis of Peripheral Vascular Disease”,

Raven Press, p. 121.
Cardiology
Left Ventricle Simpson Volume - Biplane
Formula
Volume (ml) =
 h-
---  -----  d D
4 20 1 – 20 h h
h: Long axis
dh: A2C diameter
Dh: A4C diameter
Accuracy ±15%
Reference Schiller N.B. et al. “Two-Dimensional Echocardiographic Determination of

Ventricular Volume, Systolic Function and Mass”. In: Summary and Discussion
of the 1989 Recommendations of the American Society of Echocardiography

Left Ventricle/Left Atrium/Right Atrium Simpson

Volume - Single Plane
Formula
Volume (ml) =
MEASUREMENTS
 h- 2
---  -----  D
4 20 1 – 20
h: Long axis
D: Left ventricle diameter
Accuracy ±15%
Reference LV Volume: A.J.Camm, T.F.Luscher et al.“The ESC Textbook of

Cardiovascular Medicine”, 2008, pag.53-53
LA and RA Volume: Lang R, Bierig M, Devereux R et al. “Recommendations
for chamber quantification: a report from the American Society of
Echocardiography’s Guidelines and Standards Committee and the Chamber
Quantification Writing Group, developed in conjunction with the European
Association of Echocardiography, a branch of the European Society of
Cardiology” In: J Amer. Soc. Echocardiography, 2005, Vol.18; N.12; pp1440-1463
Left Ventricle/Right Atrium Volume - Area Length
Formula
Volume (ml) =
2
8A -
------------------
3D
A: Area
D: Long axis
Accuracy ±21%
Reference Schiller N.B.et al. “Two-Dimensional Echocardiographic Determination of

Ventricular Volume, Systolic Function and Mass” In: Summary and Discussion
of the 1989 Recommendations of the American Society of Echocardiography

Left Ventricle Diastolic/Systolic and Left Atrium

Systolic Volume Index
Formula
Index =
A-
----------
BSA
A: LV diastolic volume or LV systolic

volume or LA systolic volume
Reference Lang R, Bierig M, Devereux R et al. “Recommendations for chamber

quantification: a report from the American Society of Echocardiography’s
Guidelines and Standards Committee and the Chamber Quantification
Writing Group, developed in conjunction with the European Association of
Echocardiography, a branch of the European Society of Cardiology” In: J
Amer. Soc. Echocardiography, 2005, Vol.18; N.12; pp1440-1463
Ejection Fraction (Simpson and Area-Length)
Formula
EF=
------------------------------
A – B   100-
A
A: Diastolic volume
B: Systolic volume
Accuracy ±42%
Reference Feigenbaum H., Echocardiography, 4th Ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia,
1986, pp. 153-155
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS A - 10

Stroke Volume
Formula
SV (ml) =
A–B
MEASUREMENTS
A: Diastolic volume
B: Systolic volume
Accuracy ±42%
Reference Weyman A., Principles and Practice of Echocardiography, Lea & Febiger,
1994, p. 605
Stroke Index
Formula
SI=
A
---
B
A: Stroke volume
B: BSA
Reference Oh J, Seward J, Tajik A The echo manual-Second edition, Lippincott

Williams &Wilkins
Cardiac Output
Formula
CO (l/min) =
 A – B   HR
A: Diastolic volume
B: Systolic volume
Accuracy ±45%
1994, p. 605

Cardiac Index
Formula
CI=
A
---
B
A: Cardiac Output
B: BSA

Williams &Wilkins
Left Ventricle/Right Ventricle Area Fractional

Shortening
Formula
FAC=
------------------------------
A – B   100-
A
A: Left ventricle or right ventricle diastolic area
B: Left ventricle or right ventricle systolic area
Accuracy ±16%
Diameter Fractional Shortening
Formula
FS=
------------------------------
A – B   100-
A
A: Diastolic diameter
B: Systolic diameter
Accuracy ±10%
Reference Quinones M.A., Gaasch W.H., Alexander J.K., “Echocardiographic

Assessment of Left Ventricular Function with Special Reference to Normal
Velocities” In: Circulation, 1974, 50, p. 42.

Ejection Fraction (Left Ventricle)
Derived Parameter
EF= A:
3
 A – B   100- 7D -
MEASUREMENTS
------------------------------ ------------------
A 2 4 + D
D: Diameter in diastole
B:
3
7D -
------------------
2 4 + D
D: Diameter in systole
Left Ventricle Mass
Formula
LVM (g) =
3 3
0 8   1 04    A + B + C  – A   + 0 6
A: Left ventricle internal diameter in diastole
B: Posterior wall in diastole
C: Intraventricular septum in diastole
Accuracy ±15%
Reference Lang R, Bierig M, Devereux Ret et al. “Recommendations for chamber

quantification: a report from the American Society of Echocardiography’s
Guidelines and Standards Committee and the Chamber Quantification
Writing Group, developed in conjunction with the European Association of
Echocardiography, a branch of the European Society of Cardiology” In: J
Amer. Soc. Echocardiography, 2005, Vol.18; N.12; pp1440-1463.

Outflow Tract Area
Formula
OTA (cm2) =
D 2
   ----
 2
D: Outflow tract diameter
Aortic Area
Formula
AOA (cm2) =
D 2
   ----
 2
D: Aortic diameter
Left Atrium/Aorta Ratio
Formula
Ratio =
A
---
B
A: Left atrium diameter
B: Aortic diameter

Right Ventricle Volume
Formula
Volume (ml) =
2
A  D  ---
MEASUREMENTS
3
A: Area
B: Long axis
Accuracy ±21%
Pulmonary Artery/RVOT Area
Formula
Area (cm2) =
D 2
   ----
2
D: Pulmonary artery/RVOT diameter
Left Atrium Volume
Formula
Volume (ml) =
 85  A  B-
0---------------------------
C
A: Area in 4AC
B: Area in 2AC
C: Length
Accuracy ±24%

Williams &Wilkins

Indexed IVC Size
Formula
Size =
A
---
B
A: Maximum IVC diameter
B: BSA
Reference J.M.Brennan, A.Ronan. et al. “Handcarried Ultrasound Measurement of the

Inferior Vena Cava for Assesment of Intravascular Volume Status in the
Outpatient Hemodyalisis Clinic” In: Clin J Am Soc Nephrol 1:749-753, 2006
IVC Collapsibility Index
Formula
Index =
--------------------------------
A – B   100-
A
A: Maximum IVC diameter
B: Minimum IVC diameter
Accuracy ±16%
Reference J.M.Brennan, A.Ronan. et al. “Handcarried Ultrasound Measurement of the

Inferior Vena Cava for Assesment of Intravascular Volume Status in the
Outpatient Hemodyalisis Clinic” In: Clin J Am Soc Nephrol 1:749-753, 2006

Relative Wall Thickness
Formula
RWT = 2 x LVPWd / LVIDd
MEASUREMENTS
LVPWd: LV Posterior wall - Diastole
LVIDd: LV diameter - Diastole
Reference Marwick et al., “Recommendations on the Use of Echocardiography in Adult

Hypertension: A Report from the European Association of Cardiovascular
Imaging (EACVI) and the American Society of Echocardiography (ASE)”,
Journal of the American Society of Echocardiography July 2015


B
Appendix
B - Formula and References

in M-Mode
MEASUREMENTS
Left Ventricle Ejection Fraction
Derived Parameter
EF= A:
3
------------------------------
A – B   100- 7D
-------------------
A 2 4 + D
D: Diameter in diastole
B:
3
7D -
------------------
2 4 + D
D: Diameter in systole
Accuracy ±30%
Reference Teichholz L.E., et al. “Problems in Echocardiographic Volume

Determinations: Echocardiographic/Angiographic Correlations in the
Presence or Absence of Asynergy” In: American Journal of Cardiology, 37, January
1976.1986, pp. 153-155
Left Ventricle Volume
Formula
Volume (ml) =
3
7D -
------------------
2 4 + D
D: Left ventricle diameter
Accuracy ±15%
Reference Teichholz L.E. et al. “Problems in Echocardiographic Volume

Determinations: Echocardiographic/Angiographic Correlations in the
Presence or Absence of Asynergy” In: American Journal of Cardiology, 37,
January 1976.1986, pp. 153-155.
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS B-1

FORMULA AND REFERENCES IN M-MODE
Stroke Volume
Formula
SV (ml) =
A–B
A: Diastolic volume
B: Systolic volume
Accuracy ±42%
Reference G Kronik, J Slany et al. “Comparative Value of Eight M-Mode

Echocardiographic Formulas for Determining Left Ventricular Stroke
Volume” In: Circulation 1979;60;1308-1316
Stroke Index
Formula
SI=
A
---
B
A: Stroke volume
B: BSA
Reference G Kronik, J Slany et al. “Comparative Value of Eight M-Mode

Echocardiographic Formulas for Determining Left Ventricular Stroke
Volume” In: Circulation 1979;60;1308-1316

Cardiac Output
Formula
CO (l/min) =
 A – B   HR
MEASUREMENTS
A: Diastolic volume
B: Systolic volume
Accuracy ±45%
Reference G. de Simone, R. B. Devereux et al. “Stroke Volume and Cardiac Output in

Normotensive Children and Adults: Assessment of Relations With Body Size
and Impact of Overweight” In: Circulation. 1997;95:1837-1843
Cardiac Index
Formula
CI=
A
---
B
A: Cardiac Output
B: BSA
Reference G. de Simone,R, B. Devereux et al. “Stroke Volume and Cardiac Output in

Normotensive Children and Adults: Assessment of Relations With Body Size
and Impact of Overweight” In: Circulation. 1997;95:1837-1843
Left Ventricle Fractional Shortening
Formula
FS=
------------------------------
A – B   100-
A
A: Diastolic diameter
B: Systolic diameter
Accuracy ±10%
1986, pp. 153-155

Septum Thickening
Formula
S%=
------------------------------
A – B   100-
A
A: Intraventricular septum in systole
B: Intraventricular septum in diastole
Accuracy ±10%
1986, pp. 153-155
Posterior Wall Thickening
Formula
PW%=
------------------------------
A – B   100-
A
A: Posterior wall in systole
B: Posterior wall in diastole
Accuracy ±10%
1986, pp. 153-155

Left Ventricle Mass
Formula
LVM (g) =
3 3
1 04    A + B + C  – B  –  13 6 
MEASUREMENTS
A: Intraventricular septum in diastole
B: Diameter in diastole
C: Posterior wall in diastole
Accuracy ±15%
Reference Devereux R.B., Reichek N. et al. “Echocardiographic Determination of Left

Ventricular Mass in Man - Anatomic Validation of the Method”. In:
Circulation, n.55, 1977, pp. 613-8
Left Ventricle Mass Index
Formula
Index =
A
---
B
A: Left ventricle mass
B: BSA
Accuracy ±15%
Reference Devereux R.B., Reichek N. et al. “Echocardiographic Determination of Left

Ventricular Mass in Man - Anatomic Validation of the Method”. In:
Circulation, n.55, 1977, pp. 613-8

LA/Aorta Diameters Ratio
Formula
Ratio =
A
---
B
A: Left atrium diameter
B: Aortic diameter
Accuracy ±10%
Excentricity Index
Formula
Index =
A
---
B
A: Aortic diameter
B: Aortic coaptation line
Accuracy ±10%
Reference Nanda N.C., Gramiak R. et al. “Evaluation of Bicuspid Valves by Two-

Dimensional Echocardiography” In: American J. Cardiol. 1987, 11 p.372

C
Appendix
C - Formula and References

in Doppler
MEASUREMENTS
Gradient
Formula
G (mmHg) =
2
4V
V: Velocity
Accuracy ±16%
Reference Weyman A, “Principles and Practice of Echocardiography”, Lea & Febiger,

1994. p.516
Peak Gradient
Formula
Gradient (mmHg) =
2
4V
V: Peak velocity
Accuracy ±16%
1994, p. 605
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS C-1

FORMULA AND REFERENCES IN DOPPLER
Flow Velocity Integral
Formula
VTI (cm) =
  V i  T 
Vi: Instant velocity
T: Time interval
Accuracy ±8%
Mean Velocity
Formula
Vmn (m/s) =
FVI
----------
t
t: Flow duration
Accuracy: ±11%
Mean Gradient
Formula
Gmn (mmHg) =
2 2 2
 4   V 1 + V 2 +  + V n  
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
n
Accuracy: ±11%
Reference Weyman A, “Principles and Practice of Echocardiography”, Lea & Febiger,

1994. p.605

Pulsatility Index
Formula
PI =
V p – V TD
MEASUREMENTS
----------------------
V mn
Applicable where the flow doesn’t go

through the baseline
PI =
V p – V rev
----------------------
V mn
Applicable where the flow goes through the
baseline
VP: Peak velocity
VTD: Telediastolic velocity
Vrev: Reverse velocity
Vmn: Mean velocity
Accuracy ±27%
Reference Bardelli, Cominotto, Carretta, “High Blood Pressure & Cardiovascular

Prevention” In: The Official Journal of the Italian Society of Hypertension, 6: 48-63
1997

Resistive Index
Formula
RI =
V p – V TD
----------------------
VP
Applicable where the flow doesn’t go

through the baseline
RI =
V P – V rev
-----------------------
VP
Applicable where the flow goes through the
baseline
VP: Peak velocity
VTD: Telediastolic velocity
Vrev: Reverse velocity
Accuracy ±16%
Reference Bardelli, Cominotto, Carretta, “High Blood Pressure & Cardiovascular

Prevention” In: The Official Journal of the Italian Society of Hypertension, 6: 48-63
1997

Flow by Trace and by Ellipse
Formula
Flow (ml/s) =
V MT  A
MEASUREMENTS
TAV: Time average velocity
: Area by Trace or by Ellipse
Flow by Diameter
Formula Derived Parameters
FS (ml/s)= A=
A  VMT D 2
   ----
 2
TAV: Time average velocity D: Vessel diameter
Accuracy ±21%
Reference Nichols W., O'Rourke M., McDonald's, “Blood Flow in Arteries”, Edward
Arnold London, p. 204
Pressure Half-Time
Formula
PHT (ms) =
V Max   1 – 0,707 
--------------------------------------------
Slope
Accuracy ±28%
Reference Hatle L., Angelsen B et al. “Noninvasive Assesment of Atrioventricular

Pressure Half-Time by Doppler Ultrasound” In: Circulation 60, n.5, 1979, pp
1096-1104

Cardiology
Mitral Valve Area
Formula
Area (cm2) =
220-
-----------
PHT
Accuracy ±28%
1994, p. 605
E Wave/A Wave
Formula
E/A =
A
---
B
A: E wave peak velocity
B: A wave peak velocity
Accuracy ±10%

Miocardiac Performance Index
Formula
Index =
A + B-
MEASUREMENTS
------------
C
A: Isovolumetric contraction time
B: Isovolumetric relation time
C: Ejection time
Accuracy ±6%
Reference C.Bruch, A.Schmermund et al. “TEI-index in patients with mid-to-moderate

congestive heart failure” In: Eu. H.J. 2000, n.21 pp.1888-1895
dP/dt Ratio
Formula
Ratio =
32
------
t
t: time elapsed between -1m/s to -3m/s velocity
values
Accuracy ±3%
Reference Bargiggia GS, Bertucci C. et al. “A new method for estimating left ventricular
dP/dt by continuous wave Doppler echocardiography. Validation studies at
cardiac catheterisation” In: Circulation 1989; 80; 1287-1292

Regurgitation Flow (PISA)
Formula
Flow (ml/s)=
2
628  R  V
R: Radius
V: Aliasing velocity
Accuracy ±14%
Reference Bargiggia G.S., Tronconi L., Sahn D.J. et al. “A New Method for Quantitation
of Mitral Regurgitation Based on Color Flow Doppler Imaging of Flow
Convergence Proximal to Regurgitant Orifice” In: Circulation, 1991, 84: pp.
1481-1489
Effective Regurgitation Orefice (PISA)
Formula
O (ml)=
2
628  R  V 1
------------------------------
V2
R: Radius
V1: Aliasing velocity
V2: Regurgitation velocity
Accuracy ±22%
Reference Oh J, Seward J, Tajik A, The echo manual-Second edition, Lippincott

Williams &Wilkins

Mitral Regurgitation Volume (PISA)
Formula
Volume (ml)=
2
 28  R  V
6------------------------------
MEASUREMENTS
3 25
R: Radius
V: Aliasing velocity
Accuracy ±14%
Reference Rossi A., Dujardin K.S. et al. “Rapid Estimation of Regurgitant Volume by
the Proximal Isolvelocity Surface Area Method in Mitral Regurgitation: Can
Continuous-Wave Doppler Echocardiography Be Omitted?” In: Journal of the
American Society of Echocardiography. Volume 11, Number 2, pp. 138-148
Aortic Regurgitation Volume (PISA)
Formula
Volume (ml)=
2
6 28  R  V 1  VTI
-----------------------------------------------
V2
R: Radius
V1: Aliasing velocity
VTI: Flow velocity integral
V2: Regurgitation peak velocity
Accuracy ±30%
Reference Shiota T., Jones M., Yamada I. et al. “Effective Regurgitant orifice Area by
the Color Doppler Flow Convergence Method for Evaluating the Severity of
Chronic Aortic Regurgitation. An Animal Study” In: Circulation, 1996; 93; pp.
594-602

E’ Wave/A’ Wave
Formula
E’/A’ =
A
---
B
A: E’ wave peak velocity
B: A’ wave peak velocity
Accuracy ±16%
E Wave/E’ Wave
Formula
E/E’ =
A
---
B
A: E wave peak velocity
B: E’ wave peak velocity
Accuracy ±16%
Intraventricular Mechanical Delay
Formula
IMD (ms) =
A–B
A: Aorta pre-ejection time
B: Pulmonary pre-ejection time
Accuracy ±9%
Reference F.Knebel, R.K.Reibeis et al. “Tissue Doppler Echocardiography and

Biventricular Pacing Heart Failure: Patient Selection, Procedural Guidance,
Follow up, quantification of Success” In: Card Ultr 2004, n.2-17
MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS C - 10

Effective Aortic Valve Area
Area (cm2)= A=
2
A  VTI 1 D
MEASUREMENTS
   ----
--------------------  2
VTI 2
A: LVOT area D: LVOT diameter
VTI1: LVOT flow velocity integral
VTI2: Aortic flow velocity integral
Accuracy ±28
Reference Huntsman L., Stewart D. et al. “Noninvasive Doppler Determination of

Cardiac Output in Man” In: Circulation 67, n. 3, March 1983
Maximal Aortic Valve Area
Area (cm2)= A=
A  V1
--------------
V2
D 2
   ----
 2
A: LVOT area D: LVOT diameter
V1: Aortic peak velocity in LVOT
V2: Aortic peak velocity
Accuracy ±22%
Reference Zaghbi WA, Farmer KL et al. “Accurate non-invasive quantification of

stenotic aortic valve area by Doppler echocardiography” In: Circulation 1986;
73; 452-459

Systolic Pressure
Formula
Pressure (mmHg)=
2
4  V + Set pressure gradient
V: Regurge velocity
Accuracy ±16%
Reference Currie P.J. et al. “Continuous Wave Doppler Determination of Left

Ventricular Pressure: a Simultaneous Doppler Catheterization Study in 127
Patients” In: J. Amer. College Cardiol. 1985, 6, p.750
Systolic Velocity/Diastolic Velocity
Formula
Vs/Vd=
A
---
B
A: Systolic velocity
B: Diastolic velocity
Accuracy ±10%

Heart Rate
Formula
HR (bpm) =
60
MEASUREMENTS
------
T
T: R-R interval
Accuracy ±3%
Stroke Volume
SV (ml)= A=
A  VTI D 2
   ----
 2
A: LVOT area D: Diameter
Accuracy ±19%

Cardiac Output in Man” In: Circulation, 67, n. 3, March 1983
Stroke Index
Formula
SI =
A
---
B
A: Stroke volume
B: BSA
Accuracy ±19%

Cardiac Output in Man” In: Circulation 67, n. 3, March 1983;
Skjaerpe T, Hegrenaes L et al. “Non invasive estimation of valve area in
patients with aortic stenosis by Doppler ultrasound and two-dimensional
echocardiography” In: Circulation 1985; 72; 810-818

Cardiac Output
Formula Derived Parametes
CO (l/min)= A=
A  VTI  HR D
   ----
2
 2
A: LVOT area D: Diameter
HR: Heart rate
Accuracy ±21%

Cardiac Output in Man” In: Circulation, 67, n. 3, March 1983
Cardiac Index
Formula
CI =
A
---
B
A: Cardiac output
B: BSA
Accuracy ±19%

Cardiac Output in Man, In: Circulation 67, n. 3, March 1983; Skjaerpe T,
Hegrenaes L et al. “Non invasive estimation of valve area in patients with
aortic stenosis by Doppler ultrasound and two-dimensional
echocardiography” In: Circulation 1985; 72; 810-818

Qp/Qs
Formula
Qp/Qs =
A
---
MEASUREMENTS
B
A: Pulmonary artery stroke volume
B: LVOT stroke volume
Accuracy ±42%
Reference Sanders S.P. et al. “Measurement of Systemic and Pulmonary Blood Flow and
Qp/Qs Ratio using Doppler and Two-Dimensional Echocardiography” In:
Am. J. Cardiol. 1983, 51, p.952
Coronary Reserve
Formula
Reserve =
A
---
B
A: Post LAD prox/mid/distal
B: Rest LAD prox/mid/distal
Accuracy ±10%
Reference P. Guarini, G Scognamiglio et al. “La valutazione non invasiva della riserva di
flusso coronarico mediante ecocardiografia transtoracica: fisiopatologia,
metodologia e valenza clinica” In: Ital Heart J supp Vol 4 Marzo 2003
F. Rigo et al. “Transthoracic echocardiography imaging of coronary arteries:
tipps, traps, pittsfull” In: Cardivascular Ultrasound 2008, 6:7

Pulmonary Capillary Wedge Pressure
Formula
PCWP = 1.24 [E/e'] + 1.9
E: Mitral peak velocity - E wave
e’: Lateral E’ Wave
Reference Nagueh et al., “Doppler Tissue Imaging: A Noninvasive Technique for

Evaluation of Left Ventricular Relaxation and Estimation of Filling
Pressures”, JACC Vol. 30, No. 6 November 15, 1997:1527–33
Formulas of Automatic Doppler Measurements

This paragraph lists when applicable, the formulas of the automatic Doppler
measurements.
Table C-1: Flow Velocity Integral
Formula
VTI (cm) =
  V i  T 
T: Time interval
Accuracy ±8%
Table C-2: Mean Velocity
Formula
Vmn (m/s) =
VTI
---------
t
t: Flow duration
Accuracy: ±11%

ARCHIVING
ARCHIVING
INDEX
Table of Contents
1 Digital Archiving .......................................................................... 1-1

Archive Icons .............................................................................................. 1-4
Saving and Exporting Configuration....................................................... 1-5
Saving Options......................................................................................... 1-5
ARCHIVING
Multimedia Export .................................................................................. 1-6
Clip Quality ......................................................................................... 1-6
Image Quality...................................................................................... 1-7
2 How to Review Archived Exams.................................................. 2-1

Access to the Archive ................................................................................ 2-1
Exams Archive Icons.............................................................................. 2-1
Exam Patient List .................................................................................... 2-2
Archive Management Touchscreen Controls ..................................... 2-3
Basic Controls..................................................................................... 2-3
Advanced Controls ............................................................................ 2-4
How to Select Exams................................................................................. 2-5
Exam Exported on CD/DVD ................................................................. 2-6
Import Exams from the DICOM Database........................................... 2-7
Query/Retrieve from PACS .................................................................. 2-8
How to Review Archived Exams............................................................. 2-9
Review Touchscreen ............................................................................... 2-9
Image Post Processing (Raw Data from Archive)............................... 2-11
3 Visual Comparison ....................................................................... 3-1

How to Activate Visual Comparison....................................................... 3-1
Display Organization ................................................................................. 3-1
How to Compare Images and Clips......................................................... 3-2
Visual Comparison Touchscreen .......................................................... 3-3
Measurements in Visual Comparison................................................... 3-4
4 Archive Media Menus................................................................... 4-1

Operations Menu........................................................................................ 4-2
Retry Failed Operations............................................................................. 4-3
Properties ..................................................................................................... 4-3
Delete Temporary Directories.................................................................. 4-3
Show IP Address Info................................................................................ 4-3
Erase Device................................................................................................ 4-3
Erase CD/DVD ......................................................................................... 4-4
Eject .............................................................................................................. 4-4
Export Log File to USB............................................................................. 4-4

INDEX
5 MyLabDesk Evo ...........................................................................5-1

MyLabDesk Evo Description ...................................................................5-2
Calculations Packages and Advanced Tools ........................................5-2
MyLabDesk Evo Installation.....................................................................5-3
PC requirements for MyLabDesk Evo installation.............................5-3
Operating Systems..............................................................................5-3
Minimum PC Requirements .............................................................5-3
Recommended PC Requirements ....................................................5-3
Note for installation on PC with Windows 10 ....................................5-3
MyLabDesk Evo Installation Procedure..............................................5-4
Information about the Screen ...................................................................5-5
How to Import Exams ...............................................................................5-6
Complex Measurements.............................................................................5-6
Menu Options..............................................................................................5-6
DICOM Configuration ...........................................................................5-7
General Configuration.............................................................................5-7
System Info ...............................................................................................5-7
Navigation ....................................................................................................5-7
6 DICOM Configuration .................................................................6-1

How to Configure DICOM Profile..........................................................6-1
General Folder..........................................................................................6-2
Storage and MPPS Folders .....................................................................6-2
Storage Folder .....................................................................................6-3
MPPS ....................................................................................................6-4
How to Delete a DICOM Configuration .......................................6-4
Worklist Folder.........................................................................................6-4
Start Exam Page..................................................................................6-7
How to Delete a Worklist Configuration........................................6-7
Quality Folder...........................................................................................6-8
Printers Folder..........................................................................................6-9
Printing Profile..................................................................................6-11
QUERY/RETRIEVE Folders ............................................................6-12
MyLabTablet Folder ..............................................................................6-13
Management of DICOM Printers ..........................................................6-14
Page Preview...........................................................................................6-14
Print Now................................................................................................6-14
Reset Page ...............................................................................................6-14
Print Operations.....................................................................................6-14
7 Network Configuration.................................................................7-1
Special Cautions When Connecting MyLab to a Network ...................7-1
Network Characteristics..........................................................................7-1
How to Configure the Network................................................................7-2

INDEX
IP Configuration Folder ......................................................................... 7-3

Network Directories Folder................................................................... 7-3
Modifying and Deleting Existing Directories................................ 7-4
Wireless Folder ........................................................................................ 7-4
How to Set a Wireless Network ...................................................... 7-5
CONNECTED Field........................................................................ 7-6
CONNECT Button........................................................................... 7-6
ARCHIVING
AUTOCONN Button....................................................................... 7-6
8 Printer Management..................................................................... 8-1

How to Configure a Printer Profile ......................................................... 8-1
Printer Remote Control.......................................................................... 8-2
Printing Profiles ....................................................................................... 8-3
Configure printer ..................................................................................... 8-4
Printer Installation ...................................................................................... 8-6
How to install an USB printer ............................................................... 8-6
How to install a Network printer.......................................................... 8-7
Management of Remote-Controlled Printers......................................... 8-9
Page Preview ............................................................................................ 8-9
Print Now ................................................................................................. 8-9
Reset Added Images................................................................................ 8-9
Layout Options ........................................................................................ 8-9

INDEX

1
Chapter
1 - Digital Archiving
ARCHIVING
MyLab is equipped with an internal hard disk (local archive) where exams can
be archived.
During the exam, acquired still images and clips are temporarily saved into the
local archive and listed as thumbnails at the right side of the screen.
At the end of the exam, when EN D EXAM is pressed, they can be definitively
stored both on the local archive itself and on external memories (DVDs,
CDs, USB devices, or sent over a network to an archive server).
At the end of the exam, unless AUTO SAVE is enabled (see further in this
chapter), at EN D EXAM pressure the following screen is displayed.
Fig. 1-1: End Exam Screen
NOTE The above screen is displayed also when the system is switched on if the
machine was switched off without first closing the exam underway.
Here you can select the destination(s) where data will be stored: LOCAL
ARCHIVE to save in the system internal hard disk, USB to save into an external
USB device, CD/DVD to burn a removable disk and BROWSE to send over a
network to a selected destination. As alternative you can tap the related
buttons on the touchscreen.

DIGITAL ARCHIVING
Beside each destination the TIME field shows the estimated time for the
operation while the SIZE field shows the estimated size of data.
The exam can be:
 archived in native format in the local archive and on an
external medium (NATIVE area),
 exported in multimedia formats on an external medium
(MULTIMEDIA area),
 exported in DICOM format on an external medium (DICOM
area).
Still images can be exported on external media with full (BMP format) or
compressed resolution (PNG and JPEG formats); clips are compressed. The
system menu allows to set the clip duration.
Data can be archived both in native format, in DICOM format (for systems
equipped with a DICOM license) and exported as single frames and AVI files
(refer to the “Getting Started” manual for information on supported images
and clip formats). Exported data cannot be reviewed by the system.
The corresponding report can be simultaneously saved on an external
medium in pdf format.
The following media can be selected for archiving and exporting operations:
Table 1-1: Archiving Media
Native Other
Medium Notes
Format Formats
Internal Hard Disk Yes No -
CD Yes Yes Empty disks must be used. If the disk

(R and RW) contains data, the system will not allow
it to be written. Rewritable CDs can be
used to archive data as far as they are
empty
DVD Yes Yes Empty disks must be used. If the disk

(+R, -R, single layer) contains data, the system will not allow
it to be written. Double Layers DVDs
are NOT supported by MyLab systems.
USB Media Yes Yes USB archiving media devices are

managed as multi-session: data can be
added to the ones already available.
Network directory Yes Yes
DICOM Storage Server No Yes Data are saved in DICOM format only

DIGITAL ARCHIVING
Selection can be made either by checking the desired destinations in the End
Exam screen using the trackball or by pressing the buttons in the touchscreen.
MyLab allows to manage many USB media devices; you can select the
destination you prefer in the combo box. Different USB devices can be
selected for saving in Native, Multimedia or DICOM format.
When the exam is archived on CD or DVD in DICOM format, the DVLite1
ARCHIVING
viewer is automatically stored in the medium, allowing the user to review the
exams on any PC.
Before archiving, you can also select ANONYMIZE, to made anonymous the
patient’s data.
NOTE The native format of the exam can not be made anonymous.
Selecting EXPORT DESK SETUP MyLabDesk will be exported on the external

media with data.
Once all the options have been selected, press O K to start the saving
procedure. Instruction messages will open if there are any user or system
errors. Archiving is always carried out in background, therefore real time can
be reactivated almost immediately. While data are being transferred, the icon
is filled with color; when color disappears the archiving procedure is over.
NOTE If no option is selected in the End Exam screen, all stored data are deleted.
NOTE When wireless connection is active, the exams ought to be archived in a

network directory only when the Signal Strength level is higher than 80%:
the operation could fail when the signal level is below this threshold. Refer
to “Network Configuration” chapter on this manual for further information
on wireless connection.
When the free disk space is lower than 10GB, the system displays a warning
message to alert the user. In this case, back the archive up and then delete
exams from the internal data base.
Exported exams are organized in folders: each exam is included in a specific
folder with its images, clips and report.
1. DVLite is a DICOM viewer developed by Esaote.

DIGITAL ARCHIVING
Archive Icons
The icons identifying archiving media are displayed on the left of the footer
bar.
Fig. 1-2: Archive Icons
Hard Disk USB Medium Burner Network DICOM
When background operations are running, the corresponding icon is filled

with color and the screen indicates the remaining time. The color disappears
once the operation is over.
The icon marked with a red “X” indicates that there are problems in the
management of that specific archiving medium. When this occurs, check the
“OPERATIONS” menu (see next chapters for further information).
NOTE During burning procedures, the burner icon turns yellow to inform the
operator that the system might be slowed down during the burning initial
phase. This phase lasts a few seconds.
Refer to next chapters for When clicking on the icon, MyLab displays the status of the operations.
further details on how to
check each operation status.
NOTE Do not switch the system off or remove the archiving medium while saving;
this could cause damages to data or to the hard disk.
Before removing the archiving medium, check that the remaining time is
over.

DIGITAL ARCHIVING
Saving and Exporting Configuration

Saving Options
Refer to the “Getting Saving Options allows to configure the settings to save the data at the end of
Started” manual for the exam.
information on the
ARCHIVING
Press M EN U then S A V I N G O P T I O N S to enter in the Saving Options
Configuration Menu. It is organized in two main areas: the left side shows the
list of all saved saving data profiles and the right side the system configuration
menu.
Here you can create a new profile (N E W or C L O N E ), modify (E D I T ) or delete
(C A N C E L ) an existing one.
Table 1-2: Saving Options
Parameter Action
LOCAL ARCHIVE When checked, the exam is saved on the MyLab

internal Hard disk Drive in native format.
AUTO SAVE When checked, it allows to automatically save the exam
at the end without displaying the End Exam window.
VERIFY BURN CD/DVD When checked, it allows to automatically verify the
burned CD/DVD.
PAUSE EXAM When checked, it allows to temporarily suspend an
exam.
Procedure 1. Select to save exams in the internal archive and/or external

destinations as USB, CD/DVD or network (BROWSE) and in
which exam format (NATIVE, DICOM or MULTIMEDIA).
NOTE When more than one USB media is connected, you can select the desired
one in the combo box.
2. fill the NAME field with the desired name for the saving
option and add an optional description in the NOTES field,
3. SAVE or C A N C E L .

DIGITAL ARCHIVING
Multimedia Export
Refer to the “Getting These options allow to set the compression format of single images and clips. The
Started” manual for defined formats will be used each time images and clips are exported.
information on the
You can assign specific export configurations to different system configurations:
refer to the “Getting Started” manual and within this section for further
information on system configuration.
Press M EN U then M U L T I M E D I A to enter in the Multimedia Export
Configuration Menu. It is organized in two main areas: on the left side the list
of configured export profiles and on the right side the configuration menu.
Procedure 1. Select the desired Clip and Image Quality that are the com-
pression characteristics that can be set both for clips and sin-
gle images.
Fig. 1-3: Export Configuration Menu
Clip Quality
The following formats are available:
 MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) CODEC, ensuring the best image quality

and compression, compatible with Windows and Linux
software programs for clip management;
 MS-VIDEO1 CODEC, ensuring the best compatibility with Mac

OS and other software programs for clip management.

DIGITAL ARCHIVING
Image Quality
The following formats are available:
 HIGH (UNCOMPRESSED BMP) ensuring the high image quality;
 MEDIUM (LOSSLESS PNG) ensuring a medium image quality;
ARCHIVING
 LOW (LOSSY JPEG), with low image quality.

DIGITAL ARCHIVING

2
Chapter
2 - How to Review Archived

Exams
ARCHIVING
Access to the Archive
Archived data can be accessed by pressing ARCHIVE.
Once the button is pressed the system displays the screen below and at the
same time the touchscreen displays dedicated key for Archive controls.
Fig. 2-1: Main Archive Menu
1
2 3
1. Exam Archive Icons,

2. Exam Patient List,
3. Thumbnails preview.
Exams Archive Icons

When the system accesses the archive, the header bar shows on the right the
following icons.

HOW TO REVIEW ARCHIVED EXAMS
Fig. 2-2: Exam Archive Icons
Hard Disk Burner USB Medium Network
The selected archive is displayed on a brighter background, available archives

on a darker background. Select the icon to see the list of the archived exams
stored in the related media.
When more than one USB media is connected, you can select the desired
origin by right clicking on the USB Medium icon and selecting the device you
want from the list. At the end of the exam list it is displayed the selected
origin.
As alternative selecting SELECT ARCHIVE tab on the touchscreen displays the
buttons to select the available archiving media (for example local archive,
DVD) and the button to browse directories: LOCAL ARCHIVE, DVD, USB or
BROWSE.
Exam Patient List

Images can be reloaded for each patient and a specific exam can be reviewed.
Specific measurements can be taken and saved on the reloaded images.
The current exam is displayed on the top of the list of archived exams.
Archived exams follow in alphabetic order.
The folder symbol, when shown on the archived exams list, indicates that the
corresponding exam contained images/clips.
The thumbnail of the selected exam is displayed on the right side of the
screen: when more exams are selected, the thumbnail corresponds to the last
selected exam.
This icon is displayed on the footer area whenever a read-only exam is
selected. An exam could be read-only either because it is archived on CD/
DVD or because an operation is still in progress on the selected exam. In the
latter case click on the corresponding icon to display the status of the
operations.

Archive Management Touchscreen Controls

Once ARCHIVE has been tapped, the touchscreen, within ARCH MANAGER tab,
provides two control levels containing the following buttons and knobs:
Basic Controls
ARCHIVING
DEL EXAMS deletes the selected exams from the archive.
EXPORT saves the selected exams both in native and in other formats (BMP, PNG or
JPEG for single frames and AVI for clips in Multimedia option and in
DICOM format) on external media. Media can be selected directly on the
touchscreen or by checking the desired boxes on the screen with the trackball
and the EN TER key. Data can be made anonymous in both formats.
Before exporting the selected exams, MyLab estimates the files size and the
time necessary for the transfer. The displayed estimation allows the user to
check whether there is enough space on the destination medium. Exam
reports are exported in pdf format.
IMPORT DICOM DB imports exams from the DICOM Database. Refer to the related paragraph
for further information.
ITEM If the list is longer than one page this knob scrolls down exam by exam.
LATEST DICOM DB opens the more recently accessed DICOM Database. Refer to the related
paragraph for further information.
NO SELECTION deselects the selected exams.
OPEN automatically displays the selected exam(s). Refer to the paragraph “How to
Review Archived Exams” for further information.
PAGE If the list is longer than one page this knob scroll down the entire page.
QUERY allows the user to selectively review the exams by setting search criteria such
as patient’s name or date of birth. Use the trackball and the alphanumeric
keyboard to enter search criteria in the fields and press EN TER to activate the
search. A list of exams satisfying the set criteria appears on the screen at the
end of the search.
RESET deletes the set search criteria.
ROW This knob scrolls down the page row by row.
SELECT ALL EXAMS selects all the exams included in the archive.

SELECT INTERVAL selects more than one exam: using the trackball position the cursor on the
first exam and press EN TER . Place then the cursor on the last exam and press
EN TER again. Alternatively, if possible, move the cursor using the trackball,
press Shift and EN TER key simultaneously.
SELECT PAGE selects the exams displayed in the current page.
TODAY lists the exams archived today.
YESTERDAY lists the exams archived yesterday.
Advanced Controls
EVENT VIEWER opens a dedicated menu where the operations done on the exams, saved in
the local archive, can be sorted according to advanced searching criteria.
The viewer menu is organized with internal folders, selectable either using the
tabs displayed on the top/left of the screen or by pressing the corresponding
buttons on the touchscreen.
Press either ARCHIVE or BACK TO EXAM LIST to exit from the viewer menu.
All Events Folder This folder displays the list of all the exams where at least one operation (for
ALL EVENTS instance modifying the report or printing an image) has been done.
The exams are listed with additional information compared with main archive
menu. Information on the type of operation, the status and the final
destination are added. These parameters offer additional searching criteria as
listed in the table below.
Field Searching criteria
TYPE Sets the type of exams to be searched (for example

all DICOM exams, all printed exams).
STATUS Sets the status of the performed operations to be
searched (for example all completed operations, all
failed operations).
DESTINATION Sets the destination to be searched.
Set the searching criteria in the corresponding field; multiple criteria can be
used for the exams selection.
History of Selected The history of the exams, selected in the main archive menu, is displayed in
Exams Folder this folder.
HISTORY OF SEL
EXAMS

Back Up Reminder This folder displays the list of all the exams where no operation has been done
BACK UP REMINDER according to the set searching criteria.
Set the searching criteria in the corresponding field; multiple criteria can be
used for the exams selection.
EXAMS NOT shows the list of exams that have been performed and not archived into the
ARCHIVED local database. From this window, the user can select the exams to be saved
ARCHIVING
on the local hard disk (R E S T O R E button) and delete not saved exams.
NOTE The available memory size for the exams which have not been archived
depends upon the archive size. When the memory is full, the list is updated
by deleting the oldest exams. Typically, about 100 exams can be kept on
this list.
REBUILD ARCH IDX allows rebuilding the index of the archive, if the archive is corrupted. The
archive index can be rebuilt both for the internal and for external archive,
such as external USB hard disk.
WARNING Do not switch the unit off while performing this procedure. The hard disk
could be permanently damaged.
How to Select Exams

Once the proper archive has been selected, the listed exams contain the
following data:
 The patient’s name,
 The exam number (PATIENT ID),
 The exam type (for example cardiology, vascular),
 The exam date and time.
The exams to be reviewed can be directly selected either by placing the cursor
on them (or on the corresponding thumbnails) and by pressing EN TER to
confirm or by using advanced searching criteria. Selected exams are
highlighted.
MyLab allows the multiple selection of exams: the ACTIO N key can be used both
to select single exams and to select groups of exams.

Selection of Single Exams Place the cursor on the exam and press ACTIO N . Move the cursor on the next
exam to be selected and press ACTIO N again. Repeat the operation to select all
the desired exams.
Alternatively, if possible, move the cursor using the trackball, press the Ctrl
and EN TER key simultaneously to select single exams.
Selection of Groups of Place the cursor on the first exam and press ACTIO N . By keeping this key
Exams pressed, move the cursor on the last exam of the interval and release then the
ACTIO N key: all the exams located between the first and the last one will be
automatically selected.
Alternatively, if possible, move the cursor using the trackball, press the
Shift and EN TER key simultaneously to select groups of exams.
Advanced When the EXAM DESCRIPTION field in the Patient ID page has been filled,
Searching Criteria MyLab offers a quick search criteria for the corresponding exams: by typing
the first description letters, MyLab automatically lists all the exams matching
the criteria.
Exam Exported on CD/DVD

CD/DVD are not managed in multi-session: only one burning operation at a
time can be activated.
When the exam is exported to a CD/DVD disk, the system will be
inoperative during the burning procedure. The system displays the following
message:
Warning:
One of selected destinations is CD/DVD;
during CD/DVD operations, the user interaction
will be stopped.
Do you want to continue?
The duration of the burning procedure corresponds to the estimated time for
the selected CD/DVD operation.
Press NO to end the procedure.

The burning procedure starts as soon as the YES button is pressed. The
system displays a waiting icon and the following message:
A burning procedure is in progress.

Pressing CANCEL the operation stops.
Warning: the CD/DVD may be unusable.
ARCHIVING
The procedure can be stopped at any time by pressing the CANCEL button.
In this case the CD/DVD is unusable.
Import Exams from the DICOM Database

IMPORT DICOM DB allows to import into the local archive exams saved in
DICOM format from USB, CD/DVD, Temporary Storage, Network folders
and PACS when it has been configured. Refer to “DICOM Configuration”
chapter for further information on DICOM configuration.
Temporary Storage is a temporary archive where DICOM exams are sent
from external devices when the option ENABLE STORE SCP SERVER is
enabled. Refer to “DICOM Configuration” chapter for further information.
MyLab allows to import multi-modality DICOM exams; when loaded from
archive, multi-modality imported DICOM files have some restriction
compared to the exams done with MyLab: no measurements are allowed, no
sending to PACS is allowed, no multimedia export is allowed. Those files are
recognizable by a grey text on the exam list.
NOTE Before importing exams archived on other MyLab systems, verify that
DICOM data have been exported with specific DICOM settings (header
and report) from Esaote systems. Contact Esaote personnel for all
information on compatible Esaote systems and on how to correctly import
these databases.
NOTE Imported DICOM exams can be reviewed and XStrain analyzed (contact
Esaote personnel for more information on the Esaote systems that are
compatible with the Strain analysis). A cross is displayed in the exam list to
indicate that the corresponding exam has been DICOM imported.
The image quality of the imported DICOM data is strictly correlated to the
compression level set on MyLab Esaote systems. Esaote recommends to use
at least high-level quality and, for XStrain processing, mandatory
uncompressed.

Query/Retrieve from PACS

When the importing procedure from PACS is selected, the system displays
the list of all the patients and the details of the exam, study and series.
Fig. 2-3: Query/Retrieve screen
The following controls are available both on screen and touchscreen:
QUERY allows the user to selectively review the exams by setting search criteria such
as patient’s name, date of birth or modality. Use the trackball and the
alphanumeric keyboard to enter search criteria in the fields and press QUERY
to activate the search. A list of exams satisfying the set criteria appears on the
screen at the end of the search. Select an exam from the list to view its details.
It will be displayed in two tabs S T U D Y D E T A I L S and S E R I E S D E T A I L S to
the right of search result box.
RESET QUERY resets the query parameters.
RETRIEVE SERIES loads the selected exam into the MyLab local archive from PACS.
RETRIEVE STUDY
TODAY lists the exams archived today.
YESTERDAY lists the exams archived yesterday.
At the end of the copy, CANCEL has to be pressed in order to exit from
Query/Retrieve.

NOTE Only ultrasound images can be downloaded from PACS and it is not
possible to perform measurements on them.
WARNING
WARNING This symbol is displayed on the screen when the loaded image size is
slightly bigger than the display area, for this reason part of the original
ARCHIVING
image is not shown. Use the P A N key to display the missing part.
How to Review Archived Exams

OPEN automatically displays the selected exam(s). The system automatically
displays the first exam, showing its related thumbnails. The selected image or
sequence is shown on the screen and its thumbnail is contoured by a frame.
Clips are played in motion.
When more exams have been selected, the tabs displayed above the
thumbnails columns allows to browse the data of the reviewed exams. To
display a thumbnail full screen, place the cursor on the desired thumbnail and
press EN TER .
Reloaded images can be printed.
Any performed annotation (adding both text and bodymark) on the reviewed
exam is automatically saved with it. To remove the annotation press DELETE
ALL button before closing the archived exam revision.
See the “Measurements” Measures can be done on the archived images and sequences. The performed
section for information on measurements are saved on the report, they are not stored on the image itself.
taking measurements.
Review Touchscreen
The REVIEW menu includes the controls described below.
ATTACH attaches the selected image to the report; in this case this icon is displayed in
the footer area of the screen, whenever the user reviews an image attached to
the report.
BACK TO exits from revision displaying a frozen image of the current exam.
ACQUISITION
CLOSE EXAM closes the selected exam.
DELETE IMAGES deletes the selected images and sequences.
EDIT enables post processing operations. Refer to the paragraph “Image Post
Processing” for further information.

EXAM scrolls the exams (when more exams are reviewed).
EXPORT exports the selected image/clip in multimedia formats on an external

medium.
FIRST FRAME positions the scroll memory cursor at the begin of the selected sequence.
FOLLOW UP shows the selected multi-modality image in the main screen with the
ultrasound image live for real time comparison. Multi-modality follow-up
includes US, CT, MRI, RX, PET/CT.
The multi-modality archived image can be displayed on the touchscreen
instead of the main screen, allowing you to have even more detail while
performing the ultrasound exam. Swipe down on the blue arrow on top
center of the touchscreen to access this layout. Swipe left/right to scroll the
images. Swipe up to close.
FRAME scrolls the memory frame by frame.
ITEM scrolls the thumbnails.
LAST FRAME positions the scroll memory cursor at the end of the selected sequence.
OPENED EXAMS shows the buttons to scroll the opened exams: each button is named with the
patient name and exam date.
PAGE scrolls the thumbnails if the selected exam has more than 16 stored images or
clips: when pressing this button, the system skips to the next 16 thumbnails.
Alternatively, the trackball can be used.
PLAY activates the sequence playing presentation.
ROW scrolls a row of the thumbnails list.
SPEED shows the sequence at different speeds.
STOP de-activates the playing presentation and allows the sequence to be scrolled
image-by-image, using the trackball.
When in archive review, both still frames and clips can be saved following the
same procedures used in real time and Freeze.
NOTE When an image/clip has been saved from an archived image/clip, the date
for this saved image/clip starts with * to identify it from the original one.

Multiple Selection To speed up exporting and deleting operations, MyLab allows the multiple
of Images and Clips selection of images and clips using the same procedures described for
multiple selection of exams in Archive Review.
Selection of Single Place the cursor on the first thumbnail and press ACTIO N . Move the cursor on
Thumbnails the next thumbnail to be selected and press ACTIO N again. Repeat the
operation to select all the desired thumbnails.
ARCHIVING
Alternatively, if possible, move the cursor using the trackball, press the Ctrl
and EN TER key simultaneously to select single thumbnails.
Selection of Groups of Place the cursor on the first thumbnail and press ACTIO N . By keeping this key
Thumbnails pressed, move the cursor on the last thumbnail in the interval and the release
the ACTIO N key: all images located between the first and the last thumbnail will
be automatically selected.
Alternatively move the cursor using the trackball, press the Shift and EN TER
key simultaneously to select groups of thumbnails.
SELECT ALL selects all thumbnails.

REPO RT button can be pressed at any time to display the archived report.
Press either ARCHIVE or BACK TO ACQUISITION to exit from the review menu.
Image Post Processing (Raw Data from

Archive)
Clips acquired in Retrospective mode, clips of trace and single image can be
post processed both in Exam Review and in Archive Review when saved in
raw data format.
NOTE Raw Data from Archive is an optional feature requiring a specific licence
that allows to save clips/images in raw data format.
Clips acquired in retrospective mode, clips of trace and single images can
be post processed only if acquired in systems with the installed Raw Data
from Archive licence.
The thumbnails of the clips/images saved in raw data format are identified by
the green counter, displayed on the right bottom side of the thumbnail. All
the other thumbnails have a white counter.
EDIT, active only when a clip/image saved in raw data has been selected,
enables post-processing operations that are related to the mode in which the
image/clip has been saved (B-Mode, CFM or Doppler).

NOTE In post processing it is possible to perform measurements on the image

while annotations, bodymarks, print and export are disabled.
The controls available in Post Processing are a subset of those available in

every mode: refer to the “Image Optimization” section for detailed
information on their functionality.
IM AGE and CLIP respectively allow to save the post processing changes as single
image and clip. The image/clip is not saved in raw data format. The
modifications done on the image/clip are lost if they are not saved through
the IM AGE and CLIP buttons.

3
Chapter
3 - Visual Comparison
ARCHIVING
This chapter explains how to compare archived exams.
How to Activate Visual Comparison

Saved images and clips can be simultaneously compared both with each other
(in Exam Revision and in Archive Revision) and with archived images and
clip of the same patient or of other patients. Up to four different images and
clips from different exams can be compared.
When in Exam Review and Archive Review, COMPARE, displayed on the
tools menu to the touchscreen left side, activates and de-activates the visual
comparison modality.
Display Organization
In Visual Comparison the screen is divided in two (Dual format) or four
(Quad format) boxes. The boxes are organized in clockwise order: in Dual
format the left box is in the first; in the Quad format the upper left box is the
first.
The box of the selected image or clip is highlighted by a yellow frame. The
related patient data are displayed at the top of each box.
1X2 and 2X2 buttons respectively select to the Dual or the Quad displaying
format.
Depending on the selected displaying format, additional tabs are added to the
Visual Comparison touchscreen (VIS COMP tab). The first tab (indicated as 1)
selects the first box and so on.
Fig. 3-1: Touchscreen Organization
To select the desired image or clip, press the relevant tab or, alternatively,
place the cursor on the image and press EN TER .

VISUAL COMPARISON
How to Compare Images and Clips

Different modalities have to be followed to compare images and clips. These
modalities depend both whether the compared images/clips belonged to the
same patient or to different patients and whether the images and clips are
archived in the internal data base or not.
Images and clips of Images and clips to be compared can belong to the same exam or to
the same patient previously saved exams that can be archived locally or on external media. In
this latter case the procedure to be followed is exactly the same of the
comparison among different patients (see further).
Once Visual Comparison modality has been activated, follow the procedure
below to add new images or clips:
1. If necessary, select the desired displaying format.
2. If the images/clips to be added belonged to the same exam:
• Scroll the thumbnails.
• Select the desired image or clip: the selected thumbnail is
contoured by a white frame.
• Place the cursor on the desired box in the image area and
3. If the images/clips to be added are archived in the internal
data base:
• Press QUERY button.
• MyLab shows the list of all the archived exams of the
same patient.
• Using the trackball and the alphanumeric keyboard select
the exams to be added.
• Press O K to confirm.
• Scroll the thumbnail columns to select the desired exam.
• Scroll the thumbnails.
• Select the desired image or clip.
• Place the cursor on the desired box in the image area and

VISUAL COMPARISON
Images and clips of In this case the images and clips to be compared have to be opened before
the different activating the Visual Comparison modality.
patients
1. Press ARCHIVE.
2. Select the exams to be compared and open them.
3. Press COMPARE to activate the Visual Comparison modality.
ARCHIVING
4. If necessary, select the desired displaying format.
5. Scroll the thumbnail columns to select the desired exam.
6. Scroll the thumbnails.
7. Select the desired image or clip.
8. Place the cursor on the desired box in the image area and
9. Repeat the operation.
The thumbnails of the displayed images and clips are contoured by an orange
frame and are marked with the corresponding tab number.
The selected image/clip on the main display is contoured by a yellow frame.
Visual Comparison Touchscreen

The menu of both the Visual Comparison tab and the additional tabs includes
the following buttons:
1X2 respectively select to the Dual or the Quad displaying format.

2X2
BEST SIZE acts on both panned and zoomed image/clip canceling all modifications.
PAN moves the selected image or clip.
PLAY ALL respectively display in cine mode and stop all clips shown on the screen.
STOP ALL
ZOOM activates the zoom function on the selected image: use the trackball to adjust
the enlargement factor.
Refer to the previous paragraphs for information on all other controls.

VISUAL COMPARISON
Measurements in Visual Comparison

Generic measurements (+… + key) on single frames can be done on the 1x2
format: MyLab automatically activates the generic measures available for the
application of the selected image.
NOTE The performed measurements can not be added to the report.

4
Chapter
4 - Archive Media Menus
ARCHIVING
Right clicking on the Archive Media (Devices) icons displayed in the footer
area gives access to contextual menus with the following controls:
 Operations,
 Retry failed operations,
 Properties,
 Delete temporary directories,
 Show IP address info,
 Erase device,
 Erase CD/DVD,
 Eject,
 Export log file to USB.
Select the desired controls to open the related menu.
The following media can be selected for archiving and exporting operations:
Table 4-1: Menu available on Archiving Media
Hard Disk USB DVD/CD Network DICOM
Operations Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Retry failed operations Yes Yes - Yes Yes
Properties Yes Yes Yes - -
Delete temporary directories Yes - - - -
Show IP address info Yes - - - -
Erase device - Yes - - -
Erase CD/DVD - - Yes - -
Eject - - Yes - -
Export log file to USB - Yes - - -

ARCHIVE MEDIA MENU S
NOTE When more than one USB media is connected, right clicking on the USB
icon you can select the desired USB media and the controls listed will act
only on the selected USB media.
Operations Menu
The Operations menu can be directly displayed by positioning the pointer on
the icon and by pressing EN TER .
The dialogue window displays the list of exams (in the EXAM DESCRIPTION
column), the type of operation, the destination, the operation status
(completed, in progress or failed) and the date and time of the operation.
The operations can be sorted by checking the different criteria boxes:
The Operations touchscreen displays the following buttons.
ABORT interrupts the operation selected with the trackball.
ALL displays all operations.Also available on screen.
DELETE deletes the operation selected with the trackball.
DETAILS gives information on the error of the operation selected with the trackball.
EXCLUDE DONE displays all operations, except the ones already completed. Also available on
TASKS screen.
FAILED selects failed operations. Also available on screen.
RETRY repeats the operation selected with the trackball.
TO BE COMPLETED selects operations which still have to be completed. Also available on screen.
TIME LEFT indicates the time necessary to complete all pending operations.
DONE indicates the percentage of completed operations.
If one or more operations have failed, the icon is marked with a red “X”.
Select the failed operation(s) and either retry it or delete it; the cross will
disappear when no failed operation is listed.

Retry Failed Operations

The system automatically repeats all failed operations. Position the cursor on
the option and press EN TER to repeat or delete.
Properties
ARCHIVING
This option shows the free space available in the internal hard disk, the whole
disk space and the used system memory.
For USB devices, it indicates the size of the inserted medium and the amount
of still free space on it.
For CD/DVD, it shows the properties of the disk inserted into the burner.
NOTE When the free space is between 20 and 60% and, in any case, when it is
lower than 20%, make a copy of the archive and then delete all copied
exams to free space on the hard disk.
Delete Temporary Directories

Temporary directories are automatically created to be used as extra memory
for archiving operations such as DICOM conversion or exams copies. When
the archiving operations are particularly slow, the temporary directories can
be deleted to improve the performances.
NOTE To avoid dealing with a slow archive, make periodical copies of it and free
some space in the internal hard disk by deleting the copied exams.
Show IP Address Info

This option shows the set IP configuration both for wired and wireless
connections.
Erase Device
This option is used to delete all data stored on the USB medium. Insert the
USB medium, select the option from the menu, place the cursor on field Yes
and press EN TER to begin the erasing procedure.

Erase CD/DVD
This option is used to delete all data stored on rewritable CD/DVDs. Insert
the CD/DVD in the burner, select the option from the menu, place the
cursor on Yes field and press EN TER to begin the erasing procedure.
Eject
This option is used to eject CD/DVD from the burner.
For all the other options apply the same instructions as the ones given for the
hard disk.
Export Log File to USB

This option allows the user to save the log files onto a USB key. To save the
log files, insert a USB medium into one of the two connectors and activate
the procedure.
For all the other options the same instructions apply as the ones given for the
hard disk.

5
Chapter
5 - MyLabDesk Evo
ARCHIVING
MyLabDesk Evo is a viewer with the intended use of displaying the ultrasound
studies stored within the MyLab device. The Software is provided “AS IS”.
Fig. 5-1: MyLabDesk Evo Display
WARNING MyLabDesk Evo has not to be used in order to take a medical decision,
including the interpretation for diagnostic purposes of any image, image
detail or image/data resulting from a post-processing elaboration of the
original image.
Refer to the End User Licence Agreement, enclosed with the software, for
further details.

MYLABDESK EVO
MyLabDesk Evo Description

MyLabDesk Evo, once installed on a PC, offers working procedures equivalent
to what has been described for MyLab.
MyLabDesk Evo offers the MyLab major features for exam management: exams
can be archived and exported in native format and in DICOM format1;
patient data can be modified; measurements, annotations, body marks can be
activated; images and reports can be printed and advanced tools such as Stress
Echo can be activated.
NOTE Some advanced features require the specific licence to be installed.
Image Post Processing is not feasible on MyLabDesk Evo.
WARNING Image and video compression methods or insufficient graphic board and
PC display performances might affect image quality: no diagnosis can be
based on measurements performed with MyLabDesk Evo. Always compare
the values obtained with measurements directly performed on the structure
under exam with a MyLab system.
NOTE The PC mouse works as a cursor in MyLabDesk Evo. The left and right keys
are named EN TER and UN DO , as in the MyLab manuals.
WARNING Do not place the PC with MyLabDesk Evo within the patient’s area (1.5 m
distance - 2.5 m height).
Calculations Packages and Advanced Tools

All MyLab advanced calculation packages are available with MyLabDesk Evo.
NOTE PISA - MIT and PISA - AO groups (Cardiac applications) are not available
on MyLabDesk.
Advanced tools may require a specific licence and hardware key.
NOTE The DICOM Media class is supported only for USB media and network
directories.
1. Refer to Esaote DICOM conformance statement.

MYLABDESK EVO
MyLabDesk Evo Installation

PC requirements for MyLabDesk Evo installation
MyLabDesk Evo has to be installed on a PC having specific characteristics. Here
below are reported more detailed specifications.
ARCHIVING
Operating Systems
The supported operating systems are:
 Windows 7 SP1,
 Windows 10.
Minimum PC Requirements
 CPU: Intel Core 2 Duo E6550 2.33 GHZ,
 RAM: 2 GB,
 Graphic Card: 512 MB, supporting 1366x768 pixels
resolution and 32 bit color depth; OpenGL 3.0 support,
 Available hard-disk space: 10GB,
 Display: at least 1366x768 pixels.
Recommended PC Requirements
 CPU: Intel Core i7-2700K 3.5 GHz,
 RAM: 8 GB,
 Graphic Card: 2048 MB, supporting 1920x1080 pixels
resolution and 32 bit color depth; OpenGL 4.1 support,
 Available hard-disk space: 50GB,
 Display: 1920x1080 pixels.
Note for installation on PC with Windows 10

Before running the MyLabDesk Evo installation be sure the application “.NET
Framework 3.5” is correctly installed and enabled on your PC. Please follow
the installation instructions provided by Microsoft at the following link:
https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/us/library/hh506443(v=vs.110).aspx
The MyLabDesk Evo installation is interrupted if the application “.NET
Framework 3.5” is not correctly installed on the PC.

MYLABDESK EVO
MyLabDesk Evo Installation Procedure

MyLabDesk Evo set up is organized in two folders: the “Archive” folder,
containing copied exams, and the “MyLabDeskSetUp” folder with the
installation files.
NOTE It is highly recommended to assign a dedicated PC to MyLabDesk Evo to get

optimal performances.
NOTE MyLabDesk Evo installation can only be performed by users with an

Administrator profile. To check the active user profile, access the “User
Account” utility in the PC Control Panel.
Procedure 1. Insert the medium containing the set up in the PC.

2. Select the “MyLabDeskSetUp” folder out of the File
Management utility.
3. Copy the folder into a local disk.
4. Run the SetupDesktop.exe file inside the folder.
NOTE Read carefully the EULA (End User Licence Agreement) before
proceeding with the installation.
NOTE You are allowed to install only one copy of the software for each owned
ultrasound device.
Licence Agreement Before starting with the installation, the acceptance of the licence agreement
is required. The following software conditions are covered by the agreement
 Restrictions,
 Title,
 Confidentiality,
 Warranty Disclaimer,
 Limitation of Liability,
 Indemnify,
 Term,
 Miscellaneous.

MYLABDESK EVO
The PC requirements are displayed soon after the agreement has been
accepted. The installation is guided by a wizard: follow the given instructions
to successfully complete the installation. At the end of the installation the PC
is automatically re-started.
Once the installation is over, the desktop will include the MyLabDesk Evo icon.
ARCHIVING
CAUTION Esaote is not responsible for data loss if other software is installed on the
PC.
Viruses, malware and harmful software may damage MyLabDesk Evo. The
operator is responsible for continuously updating the PC antivirus software
and security patches.
Esaote is not responsible for Microsoft operative systems and for PC

hardware components.
A periodical back up of the MyLabDesk Evo database is recommended.

Esaote is not responsible for data loss.
Information about the Screen

 GS The screen reproduces the MyLab working environment: the touchscreen
controls are re-organized to be displayed on the screen.
The thumbnail column and the Exam Management area are displayed on the
right side of the screen. The Image Parameters area is displayed at the bottom:
the “+” and “-” buttons allow to scroll the controls displayed above. The
control panel keys required by MyLabDesk Evo (such as ARCHIVE, CLIP) are
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE MyLabDesk Evo controls are indicated in this chapter using the same
graphical conventions of the manual.
When the PC video resolution has the minimum requirements, place the
cursor on the lateral arrow (displayed at the far right of the screen) to display
the thumbnails of the selected exams and press EN TER to confirm: MyLabDesk
Evo shows the thumbnail column. Press the lateral arrow again to display the
Exam Management area.
NOTE Always use the MyLabDesk Evo at full screen size, without window resizing.

MYLABDESK EVO
WARNING If the PC video resolution is lower than the minimum requirements, the
image could not be consistent with the original one on the system. If this is
the case the image can not be used for diagnostic purposes.
How to Import Exams

To copy the exams, archived in native and DICOM formats1, into the PC
follow the following procedure:
1. Run MyLabDesk Evo by double clicking on its icon.
2. Select the source medium (CD/DVD, USB, Network) and
press EN TER .
3. Select the exams to be imported.
4. Press E X P O R T .
5. Select “Local Archive” in the Copy Manager section.
6. Press O K to start.
Complex Measurements
Some measurements of the cardiac calculations package require the selection
of a different view or a different modality. Before starting complex
measurements, make sure that the available images allow to complete them.
Measurements are system guided: operating instructions are given on the
lower part of the screen.
Procedure 1. Select the desired image.
2. Press the M EASURE key and select the group.
3. Follow the instructions to perform the first set of
measurements.
4. When requested, select the next image.
5. Press M EASURE again to proceed with measurements.
Menu Options
The M EN U key displays the MyLabDesk Evo configuration menu that contains
most of the features of the MyLab menu.
1. Only for exams saved in DICOM on MyLab Esaote systems.

MYLABDESK EVO
DICOM Configuration
The menu includes three folders: General, Quality and Report. The first
folder allows to assign the AE Title and set the forwarding modalities of
Stress Eco views. Images characteristics and report forwarding modalities are
defined in the other two folders.
ARCHIVING
NOTE DICOM connection requires a hardware key to be connected to the PC.
Refer to Esaote personnel for further information.
General Configuration
The menu allows the user to set date and time format, height and weight
format the clip presentation and the application preset. The same menu
allows the user to set the default language.
System Info
The menu shows the current installed software version and build. The menu
allows the user to export the log file on a USB medium and to read the PC
requirements and the licence agreement.
Navigation
All MyLabDesk Evo features are available both on local exams and on the ones
archived on external media. Select the pertaining icon to access the remote
archives.

MYLABDESK EVO

6
Chapter
6 - DICOM Configuration
ARCHIVING
Refer to the “Getting Press M EN U then D I C O M to enter in the DICOM Configuration Menu. It is
Started” manual for organized in two main areas: the left side shows the list of all saved DICOM
information on the profiles and the right side the DICOM configuration menu.
NOTE These options are available if the system is DICOM licensed.
NOTE Refer to the site www.esaote.com for the supported DICOM classes.
How to Configure DICOM Profile

The configuration menu is organized with internal folders, selectable using
the tabs displayed on the top of the menu.
Fig. 6-1: DICOM Configuration Menu
To create a customized profile follow the procedure below:

Procedure  select the folder you want configure,
 select the desired class.

DICOM CONFIGURATION
General Folder
This option sets the LOCAL AE TITLE for MyLab. The factory setting is
“MyLab”.
The TCP LISTEN PORT field relates to the SC DICOM class and defines the
port used by MyLab for Storage Commitment.
When the option ENABLE STORE SCP SERVER is checked, MyLab can receive
unsolicited DICOM exams. Those images are saved in a temporary storage
and can be imported though IMPORT DICOM DB; once taken they are deleted
from the temporary storage.
Pressing E M P T Y T E M P O R A R Y AREA, the entire content of the temporary
storage is deleted.
Storage and MPPS Folders

The configuration menus of these DICOM classes are similar and each menu
shows:
 in the center the list of all set DICOM configurations,
 on the bottom the fields to A D D , E D I T , R E M O V E a DICOM
configuration.
Procedure To create a customized profile follow the procedure below:
1. press the A D D button to add a new DICOM configuration;
2. to change an existing configuration, select the desired
configuration using the trackball and press E D I T ;
3. the figure below shows the configuration menu:
Fig. 6-2: MPPS Folder

DICOM CONFIGURATION
This option allows the user to set the configuration DESCRIPTION, its AE TITLE,
the HOST NAME (or IP ADDRESS), the number of the port used to
communicate with MyLab (PORT NUMBER).
NOTE To use DICOM functions, a static IP address is recommended.
The set DICOM class is used only when the ENABLED field is selected.
ARCHIVING
Selecting TLS ENABLED enables encrypted and authenticated transmission.
For the correct configuration the PACS administrator has to supply three
configuration files (for certificate, private key and server certificate) and the
password to fill the field in the configuration windows displayed after
pressing C O N F I G U R E . File can be loaded with a USB drive.
TLS can be enabled for each single host.
VERIFICATION checks the connection status.
Storage Folder
In this folder it is possible to enable the sending of DICOM image/clip
during the exam and to configure the Storage Commitment.
When the field SEND IMAGE AS SOON AS ACQUIRED is checked, both in real
time and in Exam Review any saved image and clip (respectively by pressing
IM AGE and CLIP) are sent to the set DICOM Storage Server as soon as they are
created.
NOTE When the sending of DICOM image/clip during the exam has been
enabled, it is not possible:
- to modify the patient data during the exam;
- to modify the bodymark and the annotations on the saved image/clip in
Exam Review.
When AUTOMATIC RETRY is checked MyLab, in case of unsuccessful sending,

repeats many attempts up to the maximum number defined in MAX RETRIES
field. DELAY(S) field sets the time between two successive attempts.
NOTE To be enabled only in the event of occasional communication problems

and after the DICOM Storage configuration has been completed and you
have verified that it is working.
The report and the saved images and clips of Stress echo protocol are sent at
the end of the exam.
STC SERVER button opens the menu where the configuration description,
the AE Title, the Host name (or IP address), the number of the port used to
communicate have to be set together with the Response Time (in minutes).

DICOM CONFIGURATION
MPPS
When the MPPS DICOM class is enabled, MyLab displays a warning message
whenever an exam is started without any patient data inserted.
ABANDONED PROCEDURE button is added to the End Exam window.
When this button is pressed, the exam is abandoned.
How to Delete a DICOM Configuration
To delete a DICOM configuration, follow this procedure:
1. select the desired class with the trackball;
2. select the DICOM configuration to be deleted and press
REMOVE.
Worklist Folder
The configuration menu of the Worklist class allows the user to set the
configuration description, its AE Title, the Host name (or IP address), the
number of the port used to communicate with MyLab.
NOTE To use DICOM functions, a static IP address is recommended.
Fig. 6-3: Worklist Folder
The Worklist class is used only when the ENABLED field is selected.

DICOM CONFIGURATION
The same configuration menu allows to configure query parameters for the
Worklist.
Field Action
NARROW QUERY When enabled, MyLab automatically runs a control

on the scheduled exam before starting it to detect
ARCHIVING
eventual modifications.
AUTOMATIC QUERY MyLab automatically executes the last run query
whenever the W O R K L I S T button is pressed from
the Start Exam page.
ENABLE The configured query is automatically run every set
BACKGROUND QUERY refresh period.
FORCE DETAILS When checked MyLab verifies that at least one among
Patient Last Name, Patient ID and Accession number
in the worklist panel contains a string. In case all these
three attributes are empty, an error message appears
and the query is not done.
REFRESH PERIOD Sets the refresh period. To change the period, place
the cursor on the field, press EN TER and set the
desired value.
CONFIGURATION button allows to configure the search criteria for the

background query.
Fig. 6-4: Worklist configuration
Field Action
MODALITY Sets the default modality for the Worklist exam. To

change the modality, place the cursor on the field, press
EN TER and set the desired one.
THIS ONE The query searches the exams having the same AETitle.

DICOM CONFIGURATION
Field Action
ALL The query searches all the exams in the Worklist.

SPECIFIC The query searches the exam having the entered criteria. To
do it, place the cursor on the field, press EN TER and set
the desired one.
PERFORMING Sets the LAST NAME and FIRST NAME of the
PHYSICIAN performing physician.

DICOM CONFIGURATION
Start Exam Page

The WORKLIST button is displayed in the Start Exam window when the
Worklist DICOM class is enabled. When pressed the menu below is
displayed:
Fig. 6-5: Worklist at start exam
ARCHIVING
The PATIENT, EXAM and PERFORMING PHYS sections of the menu allow to
configure and change the search criteria for the query.
The system displays the following controls:
CANCEL exits the menu without loading any patient.
QUERY refreshes the patient list.
RESET PARAMETERS resets the query parameters.
SELECT EXAM loads the patient in the Start Exam page.

When the field PERFORM PROCEDURE AS REQUESTED is checked, the exam is
run exactly as the Worklist server requires.
Place the cursor on the desired listed patient and press EN TER to select it. The
PATIENT, EXAM and RECORD STATUS right tabs are updated and respectively
display the patient data, the exam data and any warning related to the selected
exam.
How to Delete a Worklist Configuration
To delete a Worklist configuration follow this procedure:
1. select the desired class with the trackball;

DICOM CONFIGURATION
2. select the Worklist configuration to be deleted and press

REMOVE.
Quality Folder
Here for each archiving media (USB, CD, DVD, mapped network
directories...) you can set different options. Select on the Device box on the
left the media you want, then set its option on the boxes on the right.
Clip Quality The following quality values can be set for clips:
 HIGH (LOSSY JPEG), when this option is selected, the clip
quality is affected by a minimum compression;
 MEDIUM (LOSSY JPEG), when this option is selected, the clip
quality is affected by a medium compression;
 LOW (LOSSY JPEG), when this option is selected, the clip
quality is affected by a maximum compression;
 MAX (UNCOMPRESSED), clips can be left uncompressed but
this option has to be set only when the Esaote compression
algorithm is not compatible with other DICOM
environments, as explained in the following warning,
displayed on the screen.
WARNING The MAX (UNCOMPRESSED) option should be used just in case of

compatibility problems. Please note that it heavily affects the converted clip
size and the conversion time.
The MATRIX SIZE option allows to resize the clip frames selecting the size from
small to full.
When the option SKIP CLIP is checked, every DICOM clip exporting
operation is disabled.
WARNING When this option is selected, every DICOM exporting operation is disabled
both on PACS and on CD, DVD and USB media.
Image Quality The following quality values can be set for images:
 HIGH (UNCOMPRESSED), when this option is selected the
image is not compressed;
 MEDIUM (LOSSLESS RLE), when this option is selected the
image quality is compressed without loss of information;

DICOM CONFIGURATION
 LOW (LOSSY JPG), when this option is selected, the image

quality is compressed with a minimum compression.
The set qualities for clips and images are used for any DICOM archiving
operation (on server or on any other medium).
ARCHIVING
Report The report can be set as:
 STRUCTURED REPORT, when this option is enabled, the ADD
MEASUREMENTS FILE field allows to send measurements file
to SuiteEstensa1;
 DICOM VIEWER COMPATIBLE IMAGE;
 NONE.
When DICOM viewer compatible image is enabled, the MODALITY field

allows to set whether to send the report in DOC modality or in US modality.
Calibration When ADD PIXEL SPACING is enabled, the Pixel Spacing tag will be added
whenever an image is DICOM converted.
Image Caption When INCLUDE CAPTION IN IMAGE is enabled, all data displayed in MyLab
header area will be inserted into the pixels of the DICOM image.
Printers Folder
The configuration menu of the DICOM printer shows:
 on the top the combos allowing to associate the printers to
the dedicated panel keys (PRINTER MODEL field) and to set the
printing layout (PROFILE field); additional options allow the
automatic printing while saving images (AUTOMATIC PRINTING
OF ACQUIRED IMAGES) and automatic saving of all printed
images (STORE PRINTING IMAGE); BUTTON 1 configures the
printer controlled by button 1, BUTTON 2 the one controlled
by button 2 and so on;
NOTE The same printer key can manage both an USB and a DICOM printer at
the same time. When both printers are configured on the same key, the
system will print two printings each time this key is pressed.
 in the center the list of the available printing profiles;
1. SuiteEstensa is an Esaote Software for CIS/RIS/PACS systems. Refer to

www.esaote.com for further information.

DICOM CONFIGURATION
 on the bottom the fields to A D D , E D I T , R E M O V E a DICOM

printer profile and to add a new DICOM printer model.
SAVE saves and activates the settings.
NEW MODEL button allows to add a new DICOM printer model. Contact
Esaote personnel for further information.
1. press the A D D button to add a new DICOM printer profile;
2. to change an existing profile, select the desired configuration
using the trackball and press E D I T ;
Fig. 6-6: Add DICOM Printer
4. set the configuration description, its AE Title, the Host name

(or IP address), the number of the port used to communicate
with MyLab. Every DICOM printer connected to the system
has to be selected among the available ones (MODELS field).
NOTE If the DICOM printer model to be configured is not listed, select the option
“Generic_Printer” and verify that the configuration is working. If not,
please contact the Esaote personnel.
The DICOM printer is available only when the ENABLED field

is selected.

DICOM CONFIGURATION
 if necessary, verify the connection status by pressing the

V E R I F I C A T I O N button;
 select the printer model and the printing profile in the

BUTTON 1 fields.
Printing Profile
ARCHIVING
Each DICOM printer can have different printing profiles.
Highlight the desired printer and press S H O W PROFILES: the menu lists the
set printer profiles.
To create a printing profile follow this procedure:
1. press the A D D button to add a new profile;
2. to change an existing profile, select the desired configuration
using the trackball and press E D I T ;
3. the figure below shows the printing profile menu:
Field Action
PRINTER MODEL Indicates the selected DICOM printer.

DESCRIPTION Modifies the printer description.
LAYOUT Sets the printing layout.
ROWS Indicates the number of rows for the
selected printing layout.
COLUMNS Indicates the number of columns for the
selected printing lay-out.
FILM ORIENTATION Sets the orientation of the film.
FILM SIZE Sets the size of the film.
MEDIUM TYPE Sets the medium type (for example
sheet, film).
COLOR CAPABILITIES Sets the color scale.
NUMBER OF COPIES Sets the number of copies.
REMOVE deletes the selected printing profile.

DICOM CONFIGURATION
QUERY/RETRIEVE Folders
When the QUERY/RETRIEVE DICOM class is configured, MyLab archive
is able to retrieve data from a PACS.
NOTE Only ultrasound images can be retrieved from the PACS.

1. press the A D D button to add a new DICOM configuration;
2. to change an existing configuration, select the desired
configuration using the trackball and press E D I T ;
Fig. 6-7: Query/Retrieve configuration menu
This option allows the user to set the configuration description, its AE Title,
the Host name (or IP address), the number of the port used to communicate
with MyLab.
NOTE To use the DICOM functions, a static IP address is recommended.
The set DICOM class is used only when the ENABLED field is selected.

DICOM CONFIGURATION
MyLabTablet Folder
MyLabTablet allows to remotely access the MyLab archive to review images and
clips. Data transfer uses a DICOM protocol. The MyLabTablet application
communicates with the Web server to fetch and represent images on your
mobile device.
From this folder you can enable MyLabTablet.
ARCHIVING
NOTE MyLabTablet requires a dedicated App to be installed on your tablet +
licence.
Fig. 6-8: MyLabTablet configuration menu
Procedure To enable creating a customized profile, follow the procedure below:

1. Here, in order to establish the connection, the ENABLED field
should be checked and a password set;
2. Write down the IP ADDRESS value to be used on
MyLabTablet in order to set up the connection;
3. Configure the App on your tablet.

After the connection has been established, you can access the MyLab images/
clips and enjoy all the features of MyLabTablet. Please refer to the complete
user manual for operation guidance. We hope you have a great experience
with MyLabTablet!

DICOM CONFIGURATION
Management of DICOM Printers

Positioning the trackball pointer on the DICOM printer icons displayed in
the footer area and pressing UN DO give access to a contextual menu with the
following controls:
 Page Preview,
 Print now,
 Reset added images,
 Layouts.
Page Preview
This option shows the print preview.
UP and D O W N buttons respectively allow to move up and down the selected
image.
REMOVE button deletes the selected image.
OK saves the modifications and C A N C E L exits the menu without saving.
Print Now
To print before formatting is complete, select the PRINT NOW option to start
printing.
Reset Page
The option cancels all images sent to be printed: the printing counter is
automatically reset.
Print Operations
The dialogue window displays the list of exams (in the DESCRIPTION column),
the type of operation, the destination, the operation status (completed, in
progress or failed) and the date and time of the operation.
The operations can be sorted by checking the different criteria boxes:
 ALL displays all operations;
 FAILED selects failed operations;
 TO BE COMPLETED selects operations which still have to
be completed;

DICOM CONFIGURATION
 EXCLUDE DONE TASKS displays all operations, except the

ones already completed;
TIME LEFT indicates the time necessary to complete all pending operations.
DONE indicates the percentage of completed operations.
The touchscreen displays the following additional keys:
ARCHIVING
ABORT interrupts the operation selected with the trackball.
DELETE deletes the operation selected with the trackball.
DETAILS gives information about the error of the operation selected with the trackball.
RETRY repeats the operation selected with the trackball.

If one or more operations have failed, the printer icon is marked with an “X”.
Select the failed operation(s) and either retry it or delete it; the cross will
disappear when no failed operation is listed.

DICOM CONFIGURATION

7
Chapter
7 - Network Configuration
ARCHIVING
Refer to the “Getting Press M EN U then N E T W O R K to enter in the Network Configuration Menu. It
Started” manual for is organized in two main areas: the left side shows the list of configured
information on the network profiles and the right side the network configuration menu.
NOTE The user is responsible for the protection of the network from malware.
Special Cautions When Connecting

MyLab to a Network
Special cautions have to be taken when MyLab is connected to a network for data
exchanging. Other devices could be connected to the same network and this
could cause the following risks:
WARNING Connection of the system for data exchanging to a network including other
devices could result in previously unidentified risks to patients or operators.
The operator should identify, analyze, evaluate and control these risks.
Subsequent changes to the network might introduce new risks and require
additional analysis. Subsequent changes include:
 any modification to the network configuration,

 any new connection of additional devices,
 any disconnection of device,
 any update or upgrade of any connected device.
Network Characteristics
MyLab should be connected only to a carefully managed data network.
The system can be connected both to a Local Area Network (LAN) using the
connector placed in the rear panel and to a Wi.Fi network using the native
wireless capabilities.

NETWORK CONFIGURATION
The network connection enables:

 to use network shared printers,
 to use network directories,
 to use the supported DICOM Classes (for example worklist,
SC).
MyLab uses the TCP/IP network protocol.
In using the network remember that:
 data might be damaged or not sent at all if the network is
unstable or is not correctly set,
 data might be lost by disconnecting the network,
 data might be sent to a wrong destination if the network is
not correctly configured.
WARNING Never use the network when its icon is crossed.
How to Configure the Network

The network configuration menu is organized in folders, selectable using the
tabs displayed on the top of the menu.
Fig. 7-1: Network configuration
To create a customized network profile follow this procedure:

Procedure 1. select the desired tab option with the trackball.

IP Configuration Folder
The menu allows the user to set, for both the LAN and the wireless networks,
a dynamic (DHCP box checked) or static (MANUAL CONFIG box checked)
address.
NOTE The wireless address can be set only after the wireless connectivity has been
ARCHIVING
enabled (box available in the WIRELESS folder).
The static address configuration requires to set the following parameters:

 IP address;
 subnet mask address;
 gateway address.
The A P P L Y button immediately saves the network configuration allowing the
user to set network directories and to configure the wireless connection
without saving the configuration and entering again the menu.
Network Directories Folder

The directory configuration menu shows:
 in the center the list of all set network directories;
 on the bottom the fields to add, modify, remove a network
directory.
Procedure To create a network directory follow this procedure:
1. if necessary, select the IP CONFIGURATION folder and set the
network IP configuration;
2. press the A D D button to add a new network directory;
3. the network directory configuration window is displayed:

Fig. 7-2: Network Directory Configuration
4. enter a folder description in the DESCRIPTION field;

5. enter the folder path in the PATH field. If necessary browse
the network to enter the path;
6. enter the user ID and password parameters in the USER
NAME and PASSWORD fields;
7. check the ENABLED option to use it as network directory;

8. press O K to confirm.
When a network drive is configured and enabled, it will appear in the list of
the media available for archiving and exporting exams.
Network directories can be browsed through the Network Archive icon
displayed on the right side of the header bar when the system accesses the
archive.
Modifying and Deleting Existing Directories
The network directory menu allows to modify or delete existing folders, listed
in the configuration menu.
EDIT allows to modify the directory selected with the trackball.
REMOVE deletes the directory selected with the trackball.
Wireless Folder
The wireless configuration menu shows:
 on the top the box to activate the wireless connectivity;
 in the center the list of all available, configured and
connected wireless networks;

 at the bottom the fields to manage wireless connection.
NOTE MyLab can be connected only to secured wireless network.
Data ought to be exchanged through wireless network only when the Signal
ARCHIVING
Strength level is higher than 80%: the operation could fail when the signal
level is below this threshold.
MyLab is compatible with WPA Personal or PSK (TKIP, AES) and WPA2
Personal or PSK (AES); Open and WEP networks are not allowed for
security reasons, WPA Enterprise (Radius server, 802.1x) is not supported.
How to Set a Wireless Network

To create a wireless network configuration follow the procedure below:
 select the WIRELESS folder and enable the wireless
connection by checking the corresponding box (ENABLE
WIRELESS). When enabled, the wireless led on the right side
of the control panel is on;
 if necessary, select the IP CONFIGURATION folder and set the
wireless IP configuration;
 select the WIRELESS folder again and configure the wireless
connection. The table below lists and explains the available
fields.
Field Action
NETWORK ID Indicates the name of the network.

AUTO CONNECTION Indicates the status of the auto-connection (YES or NO).
SECURED Indicates if the network is protected (YES or NO).
CONNECTED Indicates the status of the connection.
SIGNAL STRENGTH Indicates she level of the signal.
REFRESH When pressed, it refreshes the list of available wireless
networks.
CONNECT When pressed, it allows the connection to the selected
network.
DISCONNECT When pressed, it disconnects the selected network.
ENABLE/DISABLE Enables or disables the auto-connection.
AUTOCONN

CONNECTED Field
Depending on the network configuration this field displays the following
status:
 CONNECTED, when MyLab is connected to this network.
Any device (printer, network directory.) connected to this
network can be used;
 AVAILABLE, when the network is available;
 NOT AVAILABLE, when the network is not detectable and
it is configured on MyLab.
CONNECT Button
When pressed, MyLab displays the menu allowing to enter the network key
and to enable the auto-connection.
NOTE The field where the password is entered is case sensitive.
AUTOCONN Button
When enabled, MyLab automatically connects to the wireless network as soon
as it is available.
If more wireless connections have been configured with auto-connection,
MyLab connects to the network listed in the upper position.
UP and D O W N buttons allow the user to change the network priority for
auto-connection.

8
Chapter
8 - Printer Management
ARCHIVING
Printer Management allows to set remote control for printers and to set the
printing profiles.
Refer to the “Getting Press M EN U then P R I N T E R S to enter in the Printer Management Menu. Here
Started” manual for you can create a new profile (N E W or C L O N E ), modify (E D I T ) or delete
information on the (R E M O V E ) an existing one.
NOTE Remote control can be configured only for printers which are already
installed.
MyLab manages a wide range of printers, visit the Esaote website or contact
your Esaote sales representative to know the supported models.
How to Configure a Printer Profile

From Printer Management Menu you can select an existing profile to modify
it (pressing E D I T ) or to create a copy of it (pressing C L O N E ). You can also
create a new profile (pressing N E W ). Whatever action is taken opens the
Printer Configuration Menu where are displayed:
 on the top the combos allowing to associate the printers to
the dedicated panel keys (MODEL field) and to set the printing
layout (PROFILE field);
 on the top-right the C O N F I G U R E P R I N T E R key providing
controls to install and configure printers;
 in the center the list of the available printing profiles and the
related controls to A D D , E D I T or R E M O V E them;
 on the bottom the fields used to name and describe the
customized configuration.

PRINTER MANAGEMENT
Fig. 8-1: Printer Configuration Menu
To edit a printer configuration follow this procedure:

Procedure 1. if necessary modify the printing profiles as described in the
Printing Profiles paragraph further in this chapter;
2. select the printer model and the printing profile in the
BUTTON # fields. If the printer is not present you can install it,
refer to the Printer Installation paragraph further in this
chapter;
3. if you want to set the automatic printing of all printable
images, select AUTOMATIC PRINTING OF ACQUIRED IMAGES;
4. if you want to set the automatic saving of all printed images,
select STORE PRINTING IMAGE;
5. if you want to see a preview of the printing, select PREVIEW
BEFORE PRINTING;
6. fill the NAME field with the desired name and description
(NOTES field) for the profile;
7. press S A V E to save and activate the configuration or
C A N C E L to exit without saving.
Printer Remote Control

Printers can be remotely controlled through the buttons 1, 2, 3, 4.
In the Printer Configuration Menu, BUTTON 1 configures the printer
controlled by button 1, BUTTON 2 the one controlled by button 2 and so on.

PRINTER MANAGEMENT
NOTE The same printer key can manage both an USB and a DICOM printer at
the same time. When both printers are configured on the same key, the
system will print two printings each time the key is pressed.
When at least one button is configured, the icon of the set printer is displayed
on the bottom of the screen.
The icon provides a counter where:
ARCHIVING
 the left number counts the images sent to the printer. This
number is updated as images are sent;
 the right number indicates the number of images set in each
page.
Printing takes place when the left number matches the right number unless
PREVIEW BEFORE PRINTING has been selected in the configuration menu. In
this latter case to start the printing you have to access the preview right
clicking on the icon, check the preview, then click P R I N T N O W .
Printing Profiles
For each printer which can be remote-controlled, different printing profiles
can be set.
You can create a new profile pressing A D D or you can change an existing
profile, selecting it from the list and pressing E D I T.
Fig. 8-2: Printer Profile Menu
The printing profile menu contains the fields described below.
Field Action
DESCRIPTION Defines the name of the profile.

PRINTER MANAGEMENT
Field Action
PRINT LAYOUT Positions the header. If no header is

selected in the drop-down menu, the
header is not printed and the images and
the measurements, if present, are
enlarged.
NOTE: It may happen that enlarged
measurement text goes on the left side
of the image.
ROWS and COLUMNS Sets the number of images (printing

format) in the page: the number is
defined by the number of rows and
columns.
ORIENTATION Defines whether portrait or landscape.
MARGINS Defines the print margins.
BACKGROUND COLOR The slider allows to change the
background color of the printed image
from black (0) to white (255).
INCLUDE LOGO When selected the Esaote logo is
included on printing.
OK saves and activates the settings and CANCEL exits the menu without
saving the new settings.
Configure printer
Press C O N F I G U R E PRINTER to set printing preferences or to install new
printers.
After pressure the following menu is displayed.

PRINTER MANAGEMENT
Fig. 8-3: Configure Printer Menu
ARCHIVING
Select a printer from the list of AVAILABLE PRINTERS, then press:
PROPERTIES to set the printers properties like paper type, format and so
on.
DELETE PRINTER to delete the selected printer.
REFRESH PRINTER to refresh the list of available printers.
PREFERENCES to set the printing preferences entering in the printers
internal menu.
RENAME PRINTER to rename the selected printer.
PRINT TEST PAGE after changes to verify the correct working.
CLOSE to exit the menu.
If the printer is not listed you can install it pressing A D D P R I N T E R ; refer to
the Printer Installation paragraph further in this chapter for additional
information.

PRINTER MANAGEMENT
Printer Installation
You can connect to your MyLab both USB and Network printers.
NOTE For the supported printers, visit the Esaote website or contact your Esaote
sales representative.
Refer to Getting Started manual for additional information on safe

connection and positioning of peripherals, printers included.
How to install an USB printer

1. Press M EN U .
2. Select P R I N T E R S , then E D I T .
3. Press C O N F I G U R E PRINTER.
4. Connect a standard USB cable between the USB port on the

printer and a USB port on the system.
5. Connect the printers to an appropriate power source.
6. Turn on the printer.
7. Ignore any message of the system requiring the installation of
the drivers.
8. Press A D D PRINTER.
9. Press S E L E C T E D PRINTER NOT IN LIST.
10. Insert the driver CD.

11. Select ADD A LOCAL PRINTER OR NETWORK PRINTER WITH
MANUAL SETTINGS. Press N E X T to continue.
12. Select USE AN EXISTING PORT and set USB001 (VIRTUAL PORT
FOR USB) from the drop-down menu. Press N E X T to
continue.
13. When the system asks to install the printer driver, select
SEARCHING...
NOTE It is suggested to require the driver CD to the Esaote Service Department.
14. Press B R O W S E to select the proper driver to be installed and

proceed with the installation. Please note that only the printer
driver has to be installed! Any other printer program which
might be listed or proposed during the installation phase has
to be deactivated.

PRINTER MANAGEMENT
NOTE Select the folder Win10_systems.
15. Press N E X T several times to continue the installation.

16. When the system displays the message WOULD YOU LIKE TO
INSTALL THIS DEVICE SOFTWARE? press I N S T A L L .
17. Select DO NOT SHARE THIS PRINTER.
ARCHIVING
18. Press F I N I S H to install the printer.
The printer is now listed among the available printers. Select it, then press
P R O P E R T I E S to correctly configure the printer settings, correct paper type,
format and so on...
Press P R I N T TEST PAGE to verify the correct working.
How to install a Network printer

The printer installation requires a basic knowledge of networking
environments: it is suggested to contact the network administrator before
proceeding with the configuration. During the installation the printer IP
address is required: ask the administrator for assigning the proper IP address
to the printer.
NOTE The printer has to be set with a fix IP address: DHCP configuration can not
be set.
Do not install the printer as a shared printer.
1. Press M EN U .
2. Select P R I N T E R S , then E D I T .
3. Press C O N F I G U R E PRINTER.
4. Connect the printer to the network.

5. Connect the printer to an appropriate power source.
6. Turn on the printer.
7. Manually set the IP address of the printer from the printer’s
control panel. Refer to the printer user manual for operating
instructions.
8. Press A D D PRINTER.
9. Press S E L E C T E D PRINTER NOT IN LIST.

PRINTER MANAGEMENT
10. Insert the driver CD.

11. Select ADD A LOCAL PRINTER OR NETWORK PRINTER WITH
MANUAL SETTINGS. Press N E X T to continue.
12. Select CREATE A NEW PORT and set STANDARD TCP/IP PORT
from the drop-down menu. Press N E X T to continue.
13. Insert the previously configured IP address of the printer in
the HOST NAME OR IP ADDRESS field. The PORT NAME field
will be filled automatically; if you want, you can change the
description for this port. Leave checked the field QUERY THE
PRINTER AND AUTOMATICALLY SELECT THE DRIVER TO USE.
Press N E X T to continue.
14. The system detects the TCP/IP port. The system could ask
additional information, if it happens press N E X T to continue.
15. The system detects the driver model.
16. When the system asks to install the printer driver, select
SEARCHING...
NOTE It is suggested to require the driver CD to the Esaote Service Department.
17. Press B R O W S E to select the proper driver to be installed and

proceed with the installation. Please note that only the printer
driver has to be installed! Any other printer program which
might be listed or proposed during the installation phase has
to be deactivated.
NOTE Select the folder Win10_systems.
18. Press N E X T several times to continue the installation.

19. Select DO NOT SHARE THIS PRINTER. Press N E X T to continue.
20. Press F I N I S H to install the printer.
The printer is now listed among the available printers. Select it, then press
P R O P E R T I E S to correctly configure the printer settings, correct paper type,
format and so on...
Press P R I N T TEST PAGE to verify the correct working.

PRINTER MANAGEMENT
Management of Remote-Controlled
Printers
Positioning the trackball pointer on the printer icons displayed in the footer
area and pressing UN DO give access to a contextual menu with the following
controls:
ARCHIVING
 Page Preview,
 Print now,
 Reset added images,
 Layouts.
Select the desired controls and press EN TER to open the menu.
Page Preview
This option shows the print preview.
UP and D O W N buttons respectively allow to move up and down the selected
image.
REMOVE button deletes the selected image.
OK saves the modifications and C A N C E L exits the menu without saving.
Print Now
To print before formatting is complete, select the PRINT NOW option to start
printing.
Reset Added Images

The option cancels all the images sent to be printed: the printing counter is
automatically reset.
Layout Options
This option allows to change the printing layout during the exam. MyLab
shows all available printing layouts. Using the trackball select the desired
format and press EN TER to confirm.

PRINTER MANAGEMENT

MyLabX9 AdvancedOperations E R02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MyLabX9 AdvancedOperations E R02

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MyLabX9 AdvancedOperations E R02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rev.

 Control panel buttons are indicated by GREY CAPITAL LET-

 Touchscreen keys are indicated by BOLD BLUE CAPITAL

 Touchscreen software strings are indicated by NORMAL BLUE

 Screen software buttons and options are indicated by B O L D

 Screen software strings are indicated by NORMAL BLACK

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS iii

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS iv

3 Acquisition Protocols ................................................................... 3-1

4 Security ......................................................................................... 4-1

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS iii

Correct management and privacy of patient data...................................4-8

6 Using the Needle Guides..............................................................6-1

8 Screen sharing and MyLab Remote .............................................8-1

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS iv

Exam End................................................................................................. 9-2

A ECG Cables ................................................................................. A-1

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS v

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS vi

BY WORD alternatively activates the By word and By sentence annotation modality.

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 1-1

OK closes the annotation session without erasing the inserted text.

UN DO key closes the annotation session.

Free Text Annotations

By Sentence / By Word Annotations

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 1-2

3. If necessary swipe to scroll the touchscreen pages.

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 1-3

Editing and Relocating Annotations

NOTE When an application is selected, F A C T O R Y retrieves all factory annotations

The glossary configuration menu changes depending on the selection made

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 1-4

Settings for All Applications

DELETE WHEN When enabled, the text is automatically deleted as

Settings for a specific Application

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 1-5

Fig. 1-2: Glossary Configuration Menu

The glossary configuration menu shows:

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 1-6

new word to the C U S T O M list. To delete a customized word,

Glossary Organization in the Touchscreen

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 1-7

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 1-8

6. The arrow on the bodymark indicates the probe marker. Use

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 2-1

Once confirmed, bodymark can be moved in any position on the image by

SIZE increases/decreases the size of the bodymark.

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 2-2

Settings for a specific Application

The bodymark configuration menu shows:

 in the center the touchscreen layout;

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 2-3

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 2-4

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 3-1

How to create an Acquisition Protocol

Once N E W or CLONE buttons have been pressed, the following menu is

The Acquisition Protocols menu is organized in three main areas:

MyLab - ADVANCED OPERATIONS 3-2

Configuration After N E W or C L O N E have been pressed, follow this procedure to create a

Actions and steps order is important creating a protocol.